JP2021073012A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game suitably.SOLUTION: A performance of a variation element of "a super-ready-to-win" is lost and "losing display (787)" appears in a main display area Dm, and a sub-display area Ds and a cockpit display area Db are displayed again on the display screen of a third pattern display device 81. Then, an execution pattern displayed in the re-displayed cockpit display area Db is displayed in a display mode changed from a display mode before erasure by execution of the variation element of "a super-ready-to-win".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting winning opening and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the variable effect related to the start winning is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect that is being executed ends, the execution of the pending variation effect that has not been executed is started.

In this variation effect, as a part of the interest of the game, a suggestion display (for example, "hold change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. When executing this suggestion display, the display mode of the display object that is always visible to the player is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or a new display object is additionally displayed to display the display object. It is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot to the player depending on the display mode of (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-3400046

However, in the conventional game machine, when the suggestion display is executed, the player always changes the display mode of the visible display object or additionally displays the display object, so that the player changes the display object. It was easy to recognize, and it was not possible to create unexpectedness in the production content. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing an unexpected effect and preferably improving the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. It is said. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the display switching means switches and controls the second display means between the display state and the non-display state. Then, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the changing means. When changing from the first state to the second mode by the changing means, when the redisplay changing means redisplays the second display means which has been hidden by the display switching means, the display of the second display means is displayed. It is changed to the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the display switching means switches and controls the second display means between the display state and the non-display state. Then, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the changing means. When changing from the first state to the second mode by the changing means, when the redisplay changing means redisplays the second display means which has been hidden by the display switching means, the display of the second display means is displayed. It is changed to the second aspect. As a result, as compared with the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is newly added and displayed, the second display means is displayed. The second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the display means. Therefore, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is recognized as the manifestation of the second aspect in the second display means. It has the effect of making it possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a state just before (immediately before) when "reach display (variable element of" normal reach ")" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing. It is a figure which showed the state which the occurrence of the variable element of "normal reach" was confirmed from the state of (a), the sub-display area was erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" was executed in the main display area. c) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is generated from the state of (b), the cockpit display area is erased, and the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area. (D) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed from the state of (c), and the "missing display" of the third symbol appears in the main display area. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, the holding ball storage area, and the holding ball execution area. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table. It is a figure which showed the example of the hold number table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation pattern table for a jackpot schematically. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for loss. It is a figure which showed an example of the production time for each fluctuation element of a variation production. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of an audio lamp control device and a display control device. It is a figure which showed the example of the pending change table schematically. It is a figure which showed an example of the big hit scenario table schematically. x It is the figure which showed the example of the scenario table for loss schematically. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the hold information storage area and execution information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the execution symbol change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a diagram showing a state just before the "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram in which the sub display area is erased from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the state which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is a figure which erased the cockpit display area from the state of (b), and " It is a figure which showed the state which the variable element of "super reach" is executed, and (d) suggests that "missing display" appears in the variable element of "super reach" from the state of (c). It is a figure which showed the state which the effect is executed, in (e), the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed from the state of (d), and "missing display" appears in the main display area. It is a figure which showed the state which was done, and (f) is the figure which showed the state just before the fluctuation element of "re-variation" is executed from the state of (e), and "big hit display" appears. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the hold information storage area and execution information storage area in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation" and the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + super reach + re-variation", and (b) is "pseudo-ream 1+". It is a time chart which showed the relationship between the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + re-variation" and the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + special reach + re-variation". It is a flowchart which showed the hold display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the execution symbol change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a state just before "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a state just before the appearance of "reach display", and (b) is from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the state which the secondary display area is erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b). It is a figure which showed the state which the variable element of is executed, and (d) shows the state which the sub-display area was redisplayed from the state of (c), and "missing display" appeared in the main display area. It is a figure shown. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a drive pattern by the "weak pattern" of the left movable accessory and the right movable accessory in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the left movable accessory and the right movable accessory in a schematic manner. It is a figure which showed typically the drive pattern by the "strong pattern" of an object. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the big hit scenario table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the scenario table for loss in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the accessory lottery table in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the production time for each fluctuation element of the fluctuation production in the third embodiment, and (b) is the driving time of the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship of the "weak pattern" of each movable accessory in the "normal reach" production mode in the third embodiment, and (b) is a time chart showing the relationship of each movable accessory in the "super reach" production mode. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" of the above, and (c) shows the relationship with the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory in the "special reach" production mode. It is a time chart which shows. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the hold information storage area and execution information storage area in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the execution symbol change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory drive process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a state just before "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a state just before the appearance of "reach display", and (b) is from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the state which the secondary display area is erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b). It is a figure which showed the state which the variable element of is executed, (d) is a figure which showed the state which each movable accessory was driven by the "strong pattern" from the state of (c), (e). ) Is a diagram showing a state in which each movable accessory has returned to its original position from the state of (d), and (f) is a state just before the "big hit display" appears from the state of (e). It is a figure which showed. (A) is a diagram showing a state just before "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a state just before the appearance of "reach display", and (b) is from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the state which the secondary display area is erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b). It is a figure which showed the state which the variable element of is executed, and (d) shows the state which the sub-display area was redisplayed from the state of (c), and "missing display" appeared in the main display area. It is a figure shown. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a state in which a small cut-in display appears on the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a state in which a small cut-in display appears, and (b) is a large cut on the third symbol display device. It is the figure which showed typically the state which the in-display appeared. (A) is a diagram showing a state just before "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a state just before the appearance of "reach display", and (b) is from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the state which the secondary display area is erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b). It is a figure which showed the state which the variable element of (d) is executed, (d) is a figure which showed the state which the large cut-in display appeared from the state of (c), (e) is a figure which showed (d). It is a figure which showed the state which the big cut-in display was erased from the state of (e), and (f) is the figure which showed the state just before the "big hit display" appeared from the state of (e). It is a figure which showed typically an example of the big hit scenario table in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the scenario table for loss in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the hold information storage area and execution information storage area in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the execution symbol change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a state just before "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a state just before the appearance of "reach display", and (b) is from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the state which the secondary display area is erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b). It is a figure which showed the state which the variable element of (d) is executed, and (d) is the effect which suggests that "missing display" appears in the variable element of "super reach" from the state of (c). It is a figure which showed the state which is shown, and (e) is the figure which showed the state which the sub-display area was redisplayed from the state of (d), and "missing display" appeared in the main display area. , (F) is a diagram showing a state just before the "big hit display" appears in the fluctuation effect suspended from the state of (e). It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern" of the reach pattern in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a reach pattern table. .. (A) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of a variable element of "normal reach" in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of a variable element of "normal reach". , (C) is a diagram showing a “weak pattern” of a variable element of “super reach”, and (d) is a diagram showing a “weak pattern” of a variable element of “super reach”. e) is a diagram showing a “weak pattern” of a variable element of “special reach”, and (f) is a diagram showing a “strong pattern” of a variable element of “special reach”. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a state just before "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a state just before the appearance of "reach display", and (b) is from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the state which the secondary display area is erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is the state which the cockpit display area is erased from the state of (b), and has been erased. It is a figure which showed the state which "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area, and (d) is "loss" in the variable element of "super reach" from the state of (c). It is a figure which showed the state which the effect suggesting that "display" appears is executed, and (e) shows the sub-display area and cockpit display area redisplayed from the state of (d), and is the main It is a figure which showed the state which "loss display" appeared in the display area, and (f) is just before the fluctuation element of "re-variation" is executed from the state of (e), and "big hit display" appears. It is a figure which showed the state of.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 33, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, is changed. Further, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content in the notice display executed in the variation display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variation display of the third symbol is referred to as "variation effect"). Also used as.

The variable effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as described later, a ball launched into the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (the first entry opening 64 described later). It is executed when the ball enters the ball (hereinafter, the ball entering the first entry port 64 may be referred to as a "starting prize"), and the symbol (the third symbol described later) is displayed. It is an effect of presenting to the player the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed for the start winning prize by the combination of the symbols displayed after being changed for a predetermined time.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. The above-mentioned variable effects and various effects such as "reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The "reach display" refers to a display one step before the "big hit display" indicating that a big hit occurs in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It means the state of being.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into one unit element for executing the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit element for executing the effect is referred to as a "variable element"). It is developed and executed from the variable element of the "normal reach", and is developed and executed from the variable element of "super reach" which has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of the "normal reach" and the variable element of the same "normal reach". Therefore, the variable element of "special reach", which has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of "super reach", is prepared. Details of each "reach display" and "variable element" will be described later.

To change the stage, the player presses the frame button 22 during a period during which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during a fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed so that the player cannot see it. In this case, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "city stage"-> "sky stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

When the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the variable element of "normal reach" changes to the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". Even if the selection screen of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 among the variable elements of "normal reach". Good.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is displayed. It is configured so that the selected candidate is changed when the player presses it. Then, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is determined based on the candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". According to the determination, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player directs the pachinko machine 10 in a predetermined direction (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10). It may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted forward, backward, right and left). Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be selected based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined "reach display", and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode; hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") are provided. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and at the time of jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LEDs are lit or blinked to cause the illumination units 29 to 33. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the "reach display" just before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in the front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Style) in which the area around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 is chrome-plated in order to bring out more glitter, hereinafter abbreviated as “ABS”. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the operation handle 51, the push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) to detect.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, is arranged on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is a variable display of the first symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the first symbol is referred to as “dynamic display”). The game status of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly displayed.

The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a dynamic display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the ball is changing due to the ball entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), or the plurality of LEDs 37a are stopped after the change is completed. As a symbol, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is shown by the lighting state, or a ball that has not been changed among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 (holding ball). The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, the hit / fail determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is determined, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, "15R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", and "15R normal jackpot" are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, but also indicates that the jackpot is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Is shown according to the jackpot type.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot. Further, the "15R normal jackpot" shifts to the "time shortened state" after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and becomes the "time shortened state" during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It's a big hit.

In addition, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a high probability state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability change, in other words, a gaming state in which the transition to a special gaming state is easy. That is. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change, probabilistic change state) in the first embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, the "normal game state" refers to a time of a low probability state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability is higher than that of a normal state, that is, a "probability fluctuation state". Is low. In addition, the "time reduction state (so-called time reduction state)" is a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is the same as in the "normal game state", and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the first ball entrance. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball easily enters the 64.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 to open or the electric accessory per hit. May change the number of times it is released. Specifically, in the "time shortened state", the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 may be longer than in the cases other than the "time shortened state", or the electric accessory may be used once. The number of times the object is opened may be increased compared to the case other than the "time reduction state". Further, in the "time shortened state", at least two of increasing the hit probability of the second symbol, prolonging the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory are performed at the same time. It may be.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that performs a variation effect of the third symbol while synchronizing with the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). The third symbol display device 81 composed of a display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") and the second symbol are fluctuated and displayed (hereinafter, the fluctuation of the second symbol) triggered by the passage of a ball at the second entry port 67. A second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs for displaying (referred to as "variable display") is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 6) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. In the third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A decorative display is made according to the above. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. Further, FIGS. 5A to 5D schematically show the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the “reach display” described later appears in the main display area Dm. It is a figure.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variation effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variation effect is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. When the jackpot shifts to the "probability fluctuation state (probability variation state)" and a jackpot of up to 15 rounds is given, a fluctuation effect in which the main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to the "high probability symbol") are aligned is displayed. Will be done. Similarly, when the jackpot shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" and a jackpot of up to 2 rounds is given, the main symbol of a specific symbol number combination (for example, "341") (corresponding to the so-called "probability symbol"). A variable production is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the "time reduction state (time reduction state)" after the jackpot ends, a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers added (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is varied and produced, and other than that. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, and the like. Further, a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like is provided in the central portion on the lower bottom side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The left symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. The right symbol column Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variation effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols; "big hit display") is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying a character and a preview effect image, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db includes a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variation effect has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and the variable effect being executed. It is an area to display the execution symbol related to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of a notice symbol is displayed, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. Suggested to the player.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the first embodiment) normally performs a predetermined operation, and the variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm. Based on this, a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of the white headband, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears. Is done.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level meter (not shown) that gradually suggests whether or not a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm appears. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expected occurrence of "reach display" and the expected jackpot in the running fluctuation effect increase based on the appearance of the notice symbol etc. in the variation effect. It is configured to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variation effect (dynamic display) is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters the ball. (Number of reserved balls) is reserved up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and when the cockpit display area Db is displayed, the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 provided in the cockpit display area Db are displayed. Even if it is shown. In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol (white circle symbol) in the normal display mode) is displayed for each reserved ball (one reserved ball). , The number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and the first -When a total of two reserved symbols are displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db1 and Db2, it means that the number of reserved balls is twice, and the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 When a total of three reserved symbols are displayed in each of ~ Db3, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is three, and one each in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4. When four reserved symbols are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0 and there is no reserved variable effect.

Further, the cockpit display area Db is provided with an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is being executed is displayed in the main display area Dm. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided on the left side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1, and is configured to be larger than the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4. Further, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol.

When the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 shifts to the execution symbol display area Db0 and is displayed as an execution symbol, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 expands. It is configured to be moved and displayed and displayed as an execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Specifically, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is configured to be displayed larger than the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 (for example, the radius is doubled). ..

When shifting the reserved symbol from the first reserved symbol display area Db1 to the execution symbol display area Db0, in addition to the mode of moving and displaying while enlarging, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is displayed. After making it invisible once, the pattern to be redisplayed as an execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0 or the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is displayed as an execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0 while being morphed. It may be configured as follows.

The execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is deleted when the variation effect is completed, and as the execution symbol is deleted, the displayed reserved symbol is moved and displayed as a lower (left) reserved symbol. To. Specifically, when the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted with the end of the variation effect, and when the reservation symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, the execution symbol is displayed. It is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol in the area Db0. When the reserved symbol is displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the first reserved symbol display area Db1. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the second reserved symbol display area Db2. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Db3.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 while the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm (in the variation element of "super reach" or "special reach". Except in the variable elements of). On the other hand, when the variation effect is completed, or when the variation element of "super reach" or the variation element of "special reach" is being executed, the execution symbol is deleted. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variation effect is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the fluctuation effect is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or that the fluctuation element of "super reach" or the fluctuation element of "special reach" is executed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "hold change notice" can be executed by using the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "hold change notice" is to change the display color of the hold symbol and the execution symbol in a plurality of stages from before the execution of the variation effect to during the execution of the jackpot expectation of the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm. It is a notice suggested by.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a "holding change notice", the display colors of the holding symbol and the execution symbol are changed from the normal display mode of white to the blue display mode of "blue" and the red display mode. It is configured to be changeable to "red" or "rainbow" in a rainbow-colored display mode. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the selection ratio of the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is different when the "big hit display" occurs in the variable effect or when the "reach display" occurs. By changing the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol from the normal display mode (white) to another display mode (for example, "blue"), the "reach display" is displayed in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol. It is possible to suggest to the player for each display color the possibility that "" or "big hit display" may occur.

Specifically, in the "hold change notice", when the hold symbol and the execution symbol are in the "blue" display mode rather than the normal display mode (white), in the variation effect indicated by the hold symbol and the execution symbol. The ratio of "reach display" and "big hit display" is set high. In addition, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "red" rather than "blue", the ratio of "reach display" or "big hit display" is higher in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol. Set. Furthermore, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are in the display mode of "rainbow" rather than "red", the ratio of "reach display" and "big hit display" is higher in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol. Set. The setting ratio of "pending change notice" will be described later.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "red", the mode of the effect mainly "super reach" in the variable effect indicated by the "red" reserved symbol or the executed symbol (hereinafter, main). The mode of the production is referred to as "production mode"), "special reach" production mode or "special variation" production mode (hereinafter, "super reach" production mode, "special reach" production mode or "special variation" production mode. It is set so that the execution of (sometimes collectively referred to as "super reach or higher") is confirmed. Further, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "rainbow", the appearance of the "big hit display" is set to be confirmed in the variable effect indicated by the reserved symbol or the executed symbol of the "rainbow". There is. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the display modes of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are the current “reach display” and “big hit display” in the order of normal (white) → “blue” → “red” → “rainbow”. It is set so that the degree of expectation is high.

The display mode of "rainbow" in the "pending change notice" is set so that it does not appear in the reserved symbol but can appear only in the executed symbol. This is obtained by the player if the reserved symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, power off) after the display mode of "rainbow" in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed in the reserved symbol is displayed. Dissatisfaction will occur due to not being able to get the right jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the above dissatisfaction from occurring by configuring the reserved symbol so that the display mode of the "rainbow" in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed does not appear in advance.

In addition, when the reserved symbol shifts due to the execution (digestion) of the variation effect in the state where the displayed mode of the reserved symbol has changed due to this "pending change notice", the displayed mode of the changed reserved symbol shifts. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected in the previous reserved symbol or executed symbol. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol changes, even when the changed reserved symbol shifts to another reserved symbol display area Db1 to Db3 or the executed symbol display area Db0 with the execution of the variation effect, the display before the shift is performed. The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4, the reserved symbol changes from the third reserved symbol display area Db3 to the second reserved symbol display area Db2 to the first reserved symbol. When shifting from the display area Db1 to the execution symbol display area Db0, the "red" reserved symbol or the execution symbol is continuously displayed. The details of this "pending change notice" will be described later.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the entry into the first entry port 64 is configured to be reserved up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. If the third symbol display device 81 does not display information on the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.), the "reserved change notice" by the reserved symbols cannot be executed, so other character symbols, etc. are additionally added. It may be configured to execute a look-ahead notice similar to the "pending change notice" by making it appear.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. When the number of reserved balls is displayed by the hold lamp, it is natural that the same look-ahead notice as the "hold change notice" of the first embodiment is executed by providing a plurality of types of display colors of the hold lamp. Is possible.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the variable element of “normal reach” and the variable element of “super reach” appear in the variation effect will be described. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a state just before (immediately before) when the “reach display (variable element of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 5 (b), the variable element of "normal reach" is started from the state of FIG. 5 (a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a figure which showed the state. In FIG. 5 (c), the variable element of "super reach" is started from the state of FIG. 5 (b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a figure which showed the state which is. FIG. 5D shows a state in which the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. 5C, and the “missing display” of the third symbol appears in the main display area Dm. It is a figure shown.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, when the third symbol is expressed, the main symbol is expressed only by the numerical symbol in the diagram, and the rear symbol consisting of the wooden box and the attached symbol imitating the character are omitted. It will be expressed and its description will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 5, the variable elements of "super reach" will be described as an example of the variable elements of "super reach" as the "reach display" developed from the variable elements of "normal reach", but the variable elements of "super reach" and the variable elements of "special reach" will be described. Although the background display, character pattern, fluctuation time, and other effects are different, the screen configurations (erasure or redisplay, etc.) of the sub-display area Ds, cockpit display area Db, etc. are the same. It is possible to replace the variable element of "" with the variable element of "special reach".

First, in FIG. 5A, in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is displayed. Immediately before the stop display is displayed, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and "high-speed fluctuation" is shown. Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a warning mode suggesting that the "reach display" appears. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is supporting. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times.

In FIG. 5 (b), from the state of FIG. 5 (a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. Is confirmed, and indicates a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol during stop display is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is visibly changed at a low speed (for example). , "5" symbol is scrolled slowly to "6" symbol).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the variable element of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds is invisible. As described above, the sub-display area Ds mainly has a function of suggesting whether or not "reach display" occurs in the fluctuation effect in the main display area Dm, and the "reach display" in the main display area Dm. This is because the significance of existence of the sub-display region Ds is diminished when "" occurs.

Further, the player pays attention to whether or not the result of the "reach display" becomes the "big hit display" or the "missing display" when the "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm. Therefore, attention to the display content of the sub-display area Ds, which suggests the occurrence of "reach display", is diminished.

Therefore, when "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content of the main display area Dm is enlarged in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the content of the "reach display" that the player pays attention to. It is configured to display and erase the sub-display area Ds as the image is enlarged.

In the state of FIG. 5B, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 as in the display state of FIG. 5A, and the first to fourth reserved symbols are displayed. The reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 5A, it is shown that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm by the execution symbol, and that the number of reserved balls of the variable effect is four times by the four reserved symbols. Shown.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the display of the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed without being erased during the variable element of the “normal reach”. This is because the variable element of the "normal reach" is often out of the jackpot lottery in the variable effect of only the variable element of the "normal reach", and there is a high possibility that a "missing display" will appear. Then, when the variable element of "normal reach" becomes "missing display", the next variable effect is started immediately, so it is necessary to suggest to the player whether or not the next variable effect is suspended. is there. Therefore, during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the display of the cockpit display area Db is maintained (continuous display), and it is configured to suggest to the player how many reserved balls of the variable effect exist. ing.

Further, since the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the sub display area Ds, even if it is continuously displayed at the time of the variable element of the "normal reach", the effect of the variable element of the "normal reach" is not hindered. Therefore, there is no actual harm even if the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed while the variable element of "normal reach" is being executed.

Further, the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the above-mentioned "hold change notice", and even in the execution symbol suggesting the content of the variation effect during execution, the "hold change notice" is said. It is configured to inherit (inherit) the display mode of the reserved symbol changed by ". That is, it is configured so that the player can be suggested to the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect during execution depending on the display mode of the execution symbol. Therefore, by having the player confirm the display mode of the execution symbol during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach", the variable element of the "normal reach" being executed develops into the variable element of the "super reach" and becomes a big hit. Whether or not it is determined in a predictable manner for the player, and the interest based on the prediction is given.

Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the execution symbol is displayed in "white" which is a normal display mode or "blue" which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the "white". If so, the player predicts that the variable element of the "normal reach" is unlikely to develop into a variable element of the "super reach" and become a big hit. On the other hand, if the execution symbol is displayed as "red" or "rainbow" during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the player changes the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach". It is predicted that it will develop and become a big hit, and that a "big hit display" will appear even if the variable element of the "normal reach" remains. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with the "pending change notice", the cockpit display area Db is continued during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element in order to give the player the above-mentioned interest during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element. It is configured to display. The details of the "pending change notice" will be described later.

FIG. 5C shows a state in which the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 5B. In this "super reach" variable element, a symbol indicating that "reach display" based on the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element has occurred (hereinafter, this "reach display" has occurred). The symbol indicating the above is referred to as a “reach forming symbol”) is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in FIG. 5C, a “battle effect” in which a plurality of character symbols compete for victory or defeat using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (“competition effect” in the variable element of “special reach”). Is displayed. In this "battle effect", an effect (in the first embodiment, kickboxing) in which the character symbol on the player side (for example, the left character symbol) and the character symbol on the enemy side (for example, the right character symbol) fight is executed. .. In the "battle production", if the character symbol on the player side wins, it becomes a big hit, and the "big hit display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, in the "battle effect", if the character symbol on the enemy side wins, it becomes a loss, and the "loss display" is set to appear as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

Further, as shown in FIG. 5C, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the variable element of the “super reach”, and instead, the third symbol display is displayed. The reach forming symbol of the numerical symbol (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is newly displayed on the upper left of the display area of the device 81 and below the reach forming symbol. It is configured in.

When a variable element of "super reach" that has a higher expectation for a jackpot than the variable element of "normal reach" occurs in the variable effect during execution, the player determines how many variable effects are on hold (standby). Also, we are paying attention to whether the fluctuation effect during execution is "big hit display" or "missing display". For this reason, we are not paying attention to the reserved symbols that indicate the number of reserved balls in the fluctuation effect before execution. Rather, if the reserved symbol is displayed by the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", the player cannot concentrate on the production of the variable element of "super reach", and the player cannot concentrate on the production of the variable element of "super reach". You may find it annoying to display the reserved symbol.

Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db have no direct relationship with the variation effect during execution. Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 are set (lottery) different from the display control of the variable effect being executed (in the voice lamp control device 113, regarding the variable effect, the variable effect is performed. The variable effect processing (see FIG. 31) described later. The display of the reserved symbol is controlled based on the holding display setting processing (see FIG. 30) described later. On the other hand, during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the processing load of display control is increasing by displaying various character symbols and displaying many effects on each character symbol. is there. In such a situation, if the display control of a plurality of reserved symbols that are not directly related to the variable effect during execution is performed, the processing load related to the display control of the entire third symbol display device 81 for each reserved symbol increases. This may result in display abnormalities such as so-called dropped frames.

Further, since the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db inherits (inherits) the display mode of the reserved symbol changed by the "hold change notice", it is directly related to the fluctuation effect during execution. However, the "pending change notice" suggests the appearance expectation of the "big hit display" and the appearance expectation of the "reach display". For this reason, when a variable element of "super reach" appears, it is in a state of fulfilling the suggestion of the appearance expectation of "reach display" as "pending change notice". In addition, when a variable element of "super reach" appears, the appearance expectation of "big hit display" is suggested by executing "reach display" which has a high expectation of big hit as a variable element of "super reach". It is in a state where it is satisfied to a certain extent (for example, half). Furthermore, as described above, when the variable element of "super reach" appears, the player pays attention to the effect content of the variable element of "super reach", and displays the "pending change notice" in the execution symbol. Interest in aspects is diminishing.

Therefore, during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", the reserved symbol and the executed symbol, which are not attracting the attention of the player, are deleted, and the effect of the variable element of "super reach" is mainly executed on the display screen. It is possible to draw attention (concentration) to the production of the variable elements of "super reach". Further, by erasing the reserved symbol and the executed symbol, which are not attracting the attention of the player, the burden on the display control can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of display abnormalities such as dropped frames.

Further, in the state of FIG. 5C, the reach forming symbol of the “7” symbol, which is the cause of the variable element of the “super reach”, is reduced in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. it's shown. The effect of the variable element of "Super Reach" indicates whether the variable effect being executed is "big hit display" or "missing display", but it is directly related to the display mode of the third symbol. Since it is performed by a character symbol that does not have, if only the character symbol in the variable element of "super reach" is focused on when the third symbol is not displayed at all, the effect is "reach display". There are cases where it cannot be recognized whether or not it is (for example, it may be mistaken for a "demo screen"). In addition, since the effect of the variable element of "super reach" is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the player determines which third symbol caused the "reach display" in the variable element of "super reach". May be forgotten. However, if the reach formation symbol is displayed large during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", it becomes difficult to see the effect of the variable element of "Super Reach", and the effect of the variable element of "Super Reach" itself. May be hindered.

Therefore, among the variable elements of the "super reach", the reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which is the cause of the variable element of the "super reach", is displayed small in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Configure. With this configuration, it is suggested to the player that the "reach display" is generated without hindering the production of the variable element of the "super reach", and the third symbol that generated the "reach display" is generated. It is possible to make the player clearly suggest the type of.

Further, in the state of FIG. 5 (c), in the upper left of the display area (lower side of the "reach display") of the third symbol display device 81, a numerical symbol indicating the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect (in the first embodiment). , "4") is displayed. As described above, during the execution of the variable element of the "super reach", the display of the cockpit display area Db is erased, so that the player can completely reduce the number of variable effects reserved by the display contents of the cockpit display area Db. It may not be recognized.

Therefore, during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", instead of erasing the cockpit display area Db, a numerical symbol indicating the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Configure to. With this configuration, during the production of the variable element of "Super Reach", the number of variable productions held by the player is shown without interfering with the production of the variable element of "Super Reach". Can be done.

In FIG. 5 (d), from the state of FIG. 5 (c), the effect of the variable element of "super reach" is lost (the enemy character symbol wins), and the "loss display" appears in the main display area Dm. At the same time, the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds and the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are visible again. The character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a manner showing a disappointed expression due to the appearance of the "loss display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation element of the "super reach" ends and the variation effect is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the display state of the third symbol display device 81 is the initial state, that is, the main state. The display area Dm, the sub-display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are each displayed. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the variation effect has been stopped (confirmed display), and when there is a pending (standby) variation effect, the next variation effect can be smoothly performed. It becomes possible to execute. Therefore, when the variable element of "super reach" is completed, the redisplay of the execution symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is a natural expression in the flow of the execution process of the variation effect, so that the player Does not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 5A to 5D, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display state of the main display area Dm is enlarged or reduced at each timing in the variation effect, and the sub-display area is enlarged or reduced. By displaying, hiding (erasing) or redisplaying the display state of Ds, and displaying, hiding (erasing) or redisplaying the display state of the cockpit display area Db, the display contents having high importance at each timing can be displayed. It is configured so that it can be easily recognized by the player.

At each timing of the variation effect, the display states of the main display area Dm, the sub display area Ds, or the cockpit display area Db may be appropriately rearranged to execute the variation effect. Specifically, for example, the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds may be displayed, the cockpit display area Db may be erased to execute the variation effect, or the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db may be displayed. The main display area Dm may be enlarged and displayed while the reduced display is performed, and the variation effect may be executed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯” in the first embodiment), the first ball entry port 64 is in the operating state for a predetermined time ( It is configured to be open).

The number of reserved balls in the second entry port 67 of the ball is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the second symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 37 or the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st ball entry port 64, and the number of times of passing through the second ball entry port 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example). , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6), a display according to the lottery result is indicated by LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a variation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81. To. The first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

The first ball entry port 64 is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering the opening through which the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. By opening and closing the two blades of the electric accessory, the first ball entry port 64 is set to an open state (expanded state) or a closed state (reduced state). In the normal state, the first ball entry port 64 is in a closed state in which the blades of the electric accessory are closed (the blades stand upright), and the ball cannot enter the first ball entry port 64, or It is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at the symbol of "◯", the electric accessory of the first ball entry port 64 is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blades of the electric accessory stand up while the electric accessory is operating. It is in a state of being movable in a substantially V shape (inverted C shape), and the first ball entry port 64 is in an open state. When the first ball entry port 64 is opened, the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64, or the ball is more likely to enter the ball than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, the ball stops at the symbol "○" and hits, and when the first entry port 64 is opened, the ball moves to the first entry port 64. It is possible to enter a ball and make it possible to perform many big hit lottery.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is set so as to stop the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. Along with turning on the lights, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

A second entry port 67 is provided on the left side and the right side of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The second entry port 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the second entry port 67, the second entry port switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the on. Then, a winning lottery for the second symbol (also called a normal symbol) is held.

As a result of the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball that has passed through the second entrance 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is followed by "○". After the symbol "" is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is activated. As a result, the blades of the electric accessory, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, can move from a state in which the blades of the electric accessory stand up substantially vertically to a substantially V shape (inverted C shape) for a predetermined time. The ball can enter the first ball entry port 64, or the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery. A random number generator used for the above, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read-only memory (Read Only Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random Access Memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a program, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits. Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result of variable display in the second symbol display device 83. Performs the main processing of. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by the various counters stored in the RAM 203 and the various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like can be used for jackpot lottery, dynamic display setting of the first symbol display device 37, setting of variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, and display result of variable display on the second symbol display device 83. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a lottery or the like. Further, in the description of the various counters, the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13.

For the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot symbol The first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the variation effect, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0".

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area 203b composed of four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port 64. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899"), and is "899" in the case of a counter capable of taking a maximum value (for example, "0 to 899"). ) Is reached and then returns to "0". In particular, when the first per random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, and the first per hit from the initial value. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". is there. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is stored in any of the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that is the set jackpot, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "normal gaming state" and a "time shortening state" (a period other than the "probability fluctuation state"). , The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state (during probability change)" which is the high probability state where the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than the low probability state. .. Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the values "7,307,582" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. Has been done.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become jackpots in the high probability state is 30, and the values "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298," 322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 "is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. There is.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are each jackpot random number value so as not to be duplicated. Is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value can be easily predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, the jackpot is changed by changing the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0") is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value of "~ 99", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (starting prize). , Of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203, the first random number counter C1 is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is a loss, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect. Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the 1 hold area in the hold ball storage area 203b is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect will be those at the time of the big hit. .. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 8B. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, a "15R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a "probability fluctuation state" in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability state, and a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. Later, the jackpot probability becomes a low probability state, and the "15R normal jackpot" shifts to the "time reduction state" for 100 fluctuations, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after a jackpot of 2 rounds. There is a "2R probability change jackpot". In the following description, the 15-round jackpot of "15R probability variation jackpot" and "15R normal jackpot" may be described as "15R jackpot common".

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value "0 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with "15R probability variation jackpot", and the first hit type counter C2 is associated with "15R normal jackpot". The values "40 to 79" are associated with each other, and the value "80 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the "2R probability variation jackpot".

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. .. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of a big hit, "15R probability variation big hit" is selected with a 40% probability, "15R normal big hit" is selected with a 40% probability, and "2R" is selected with a 20% probability. "Probability change jackpot" is selected. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the first embodiment, the number of held fluctuation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 determine the rough production mode of the fluctuation effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of jackpot and loss. Be selected. Specifically, only the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode or the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode in which the "reach display" does not occur and the variable element of the "normal reach" as the "reach display" are executed. The "normal reach" production mode and the "super reach" production mode in which the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed and the variable element of the "super reach" is executed, and the "special reach" which is also developed from the variable element of the "normal reach". 6 effect modes are selected: a "special reach" effect mode in which the variation element of "" is executed, and a "special variation" effect mode that occurs when "2R probability variation jackpot" is selected.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the effect modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode and the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode are defined in the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 4A) of the main display area Dm. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 and the "reach display" is not generated after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed.

Here, the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81, and the fluctuation elements Z1 to Z3 of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A). The third symbol displayed in is scrolled at high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. In the fluctuation element of this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the fluctuation effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffle). It is executed as a production.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (shortened)" effect mode). It is configured to be used. The fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" is visually recognized by the player after the fluctuation element of the "high speed fluctuation" in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4A) of the third symbol display device 81. A state in which the third symbol is scrolled at a low speed at a possible speed. In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", the third symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4 (a)) while causing the player to recognize the display content of the third symbol. Stop and display the design. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it develops into a variable element of "normal reach" as "reach display" occurs, while in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. When a different third symbol is stopped, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is terminated (except when it develops into a "pseudo-ream" described later).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and then the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A). ) Stop in turn, and the variation effect of 1 ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and each symbol is completed after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is completed. Rows Z1 to Z3 stop at the same time, and the variation effect of 1 ends.

Among the effect modes, the "normal reach" effect mode is the same as the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 in the variable effect of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4 (a)) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, and the variable element of "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is not developed. This is one of the production modes of "display". In the variable element of this "normal reach", as described above, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 (left display area Dm1) and the right symbol column Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm is It is displayed in a larger size than usual. Further, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (middle display area Dm2) scrolls downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol of the middle display area Dm2 is displayed in a visible state by the player. .. Further, in the variable element of this "normal reach", the sub display area Ds is erased with the enlarged display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5B).

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach". In this "super reach" effect mode, while the variable element of "super reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4A) is deleted from the display state of the variable element of "normal reach", and this "super reach" is displayed. The reach-forming symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of the "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the variable element of the "normal reach", and a plurality of character symbols are displayed to perform "battle production (kickboxing in the first embodiment)" (FIG. 5 (Fig. 5). c) See).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable effect based on the result (win / loss) of the "battle effect". Specifically, for example, in the above "battle effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect is "big hit display", and the player When the character symbol on the side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable elements of the "special reach" are executed by developing from the variable elements of the "normal reach". In this "special reach" effect mode, during execution of the variable element of "special reach", the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 4) is changed from the display state of the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "normal reach" as in the case of the variable element of "super reach". (See (a)) is deleted, and the reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of this "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4A) changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of characters different from the variable element of "super reach" are made to appear to "competitive effect". (In the first embodiment, a car race) ”(not shown).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable production based on the result (win / loss) of the "competitive production". Specifically, for example, in the above "competition effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect becomes the "big hit display", and the player When the character symbol on the side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

Among the effect modes, the "special variation" effect mode is an effect mode that is executed without exception when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won. In this "special variation" effect mode, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the entire main display area Dm changes from the normal background display, suggesting that "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs. The "movie" effect is displayed.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 Of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1 is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to whether or not the variation effect is correct, the current gaming state, and the number of variation effects currently being held (number of reserved balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects during standby (number of reserved balls) and the like. In the first embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, whether or not the variation effect is correct, the current gaming state, and the current variation effect are determined. Any stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of balls (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, a detailed fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202d is different. A plurality of the stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the success or failure of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "normal game state". This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to whether or not there is (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect.

This is because, as the first reason, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. That is, the ratio of selecting the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or lost. By configuring so as to be different, the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is changed for each production mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode are easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" production is performed. It is configured so that the mode and the "normal reach" production mode can be easily selected. With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode are difficult to hit. It can be a production or a production that does not make a big hit, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be differentiated for each production mode. Therefore, when a production that is easy to hit a big hit appears in a variable production, it is suggested to the player that a big hit is likely to occur while the production that is easy to hit is being performed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to make a big hit, and it is difficult to select an effect that is hard to make a big hit. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11A)). On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is lost, it is difficult to select an effect that is easy to hit big, and it is easy to select an effect that is hard to hit big. Stop pattern table 202d (for example, A table 202d1 or B table 202d2 (FIG. 10). (A) or FIG. 10 (b)))). As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. If this is the case, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the jackpot for each effect mode, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

The second reason is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning) based on entering the first ball opening 64 when the number of waiting times for the variable effect has reached the upper limit. is there. Specifically, since the maximum number of times of waiting for the fluctuation effect is set to 4 and the fluctuation output is executed for at least a certain period of time, the first in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". 1 In a gaming state in which a ball easily enters the ball entry port 64, it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol. In these gaming states, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected, the ball enters the first ball opening 64 frequently when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is reached, and the ball enters the first ball opening 64 frequently. Despite entering the mouth 64, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if a variation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached, the number of reserved balls of the third symbol is being executed during the execution of the variation effect. Is not digested, so even if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the first entrance 64, and the fluctuation effect is digested so that the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. The ball will stop firing until it becomes, and the game will be interrupted. If the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will affect the management of the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the fluctuation time is relatively short in the gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is easily reached or in the number of reserved balls close to (or match with) the maximum number of reserved balls. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d (for example, B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10B)) which is easy to select. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first ball opening 64 when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached.

Further, the third reason is to maintain the state in which the variation effect is executed for a long time by setting the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 to be long and delaying the end of the variation effect. .. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small (not present), if a new ball is not inserted into the first entry port 64 within the variable time of the variable effect being executed, the next variable effect is produced. Cannot be started, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired and the game is played, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. Instead, I get excited about the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is difficult to obtain the game value. Therefore, there is a risk that the game on the pachinko machine 10 will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, A table 202d1 (see FIG. 10A)) makes it easy to select a relatively long fluctuation time when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is small. ) Is used to select the effect mode of the variable effect. As a result, the situation in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 is unlikely to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Here, the details of the hold number table 202c and the stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is performed based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is performed with reference to the hold number table 202c. It is configured to select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 based on the success or failure of the above, the gaming state at that time, and the number of pending fluctuation effects at that time. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect is determined based on any of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c of FIG. 9, when the number of reserved balls is "1" or "2 or 3" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", or " When the number of reserved balls is "1" at the time of extracting the loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10A) is selected. .. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is "4" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", or when the number of reserved balls is "4" at the time of extracting the loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the number of reserved balls is " In the case of "2 or 3" or "4", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10B) is selected. Further, at the time of extracting the "15R jackpot (" 15R probability variation jackpot "or" 15R normal jackpot ")", the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) regardless of the gaming state or the number of reserved balls. See) is selected. Further, at the time of extracting the "2R probability variation jackpot", the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 11B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of reserved balls.

That is, if any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3 or D table 202d4) is selected based only on the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time. Only when the jackpot is not won (that is, when the game is lost), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time.

Even when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a big hit is won, a relatively short fluctuation pattern is easily selected in the stop pattern table 202d (for example, a "super reach" production mode in which the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is 3 seconds, or " It may be configured so that the "special reach" effect mode, etc.) can be selected. In this case, in each effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed, it is configured to select an effect mode in which only the time of the variable element portion of the "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 7 seconds to 3 seconds. With this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started with the maximum number of reserved balls four times, even if the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed in 3 seconds, the "high-speed fluctuation" of the 3 seconds " At the end of the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" (when it is recognized as "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds), "reach display" may occur in the fluctuation production, and the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds. Is configured so that the effect mode in which the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (shortened)" is executed is executed, so that the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds is executed. At the time of execution of, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", when the jackpot is not won and the number of reserved balls is small, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table) in which a relatively long fluctuation pattern is easily selected is easily selected. 202d1) may be configured to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the fluctuation effect is being executed by the third symbol display device 81 even in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The situation in which the variation effect is not performed is unlikely to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of loss, and FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 10A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95" to "95". It is set to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is set not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98,99". In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is set not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. Further, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

Therefore, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively long variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1. The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode between the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are set to be the same.

In this way, when the lottery result of the loss is extracted, the effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the variation effect on hold. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, it is easy to select the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times the variable effect is executed is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small, the variable effect time is longer than in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64. Make it easier to select a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode. As a result, it is possible to perform "non-reach (normal)", which has a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected. By increasing the possibility that a new start winning prize will be generated during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to maintain the situation in which the variation effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11A, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is "40" to "40" to "". It is set to "99". In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "special variation" effect mode, and the "special variation" effect mode is set not to be selected. Further, since the C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “special variation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the other "reach display". Therefore, the stop type selected when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won is set to always be the "special variation" effect mode. Since the D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set so that the "normal reach" effect mode is 5%, the "super reach" effect mode is 35%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 60%. Further, in the D table 202d4, the "special variation" effect mode is set so that the selection ratio is 100%.

Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode, and in the variable production at the time of loss, the "normal reach" production mode> The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, it is highly possible that the jackpot display result will appear in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode for the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of each "reach display". It is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation for the jackpot according to the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy the uplifting feeling of the big hit according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed by the player.

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of the loss, but the first ball entrance The determination of the variation effect based on the entry of the ball into 64 and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry of the ball are configured so that substantially the same effect mode is selected. .. Specifically, in the case of the variable effect of loss, either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode or the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is the same, and is assigned to another effect mode. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected or the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. The same production mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially different even when the game state changes (for example, from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state"). The same production mode is selected. As a result, even if a look-ahead notice such as "hold change notice" is given based on the effect mode selected at the time of starting prize, the content of the look-ahead notice is included in the variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead notice. On the other hand, it is possible to perform an effect that does not cause a discrepancy.

Based on the above, the game is being performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect at that time. By shortening the execution time of the variation effect and increasing the number of executions of the variation effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variation effect.

When "reach display" is selected when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is large (for example, "4"), the stop pattern in which the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" of each "reach display" is shortened. A table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the variation element of the “low speed variation” is omitted in each effect mode. Further, a stop pattern table 202d in which the selection rate of each effect mode is completely different may be provided according to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of the pre-reading notice execution decision and the said The number of reserved balls at the time of executing the variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead notice may differ. In such a case, a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect is required, which complicates the process.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 199", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "199"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the variation pattern. The determination of the variation pattern is specifically the determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare the command of the total variation pattern of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. Increase the freedom of choice. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 whose game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. In the pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table 202e, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1 used at the time of a jackpot and a loss fluctuation pattern table 202e2 used at the time of loss are prepared. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 is divided into groups based on the selected production mode. Specifically, as the production mode, "E5: for normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" production mode is determined, and "E6: super" referred to when the "super reach" production mode is determined. "E7: Special Reach", which is referred to when the "reach" and "special reach" production modes are determined, and "E8: special variation", which is referred to when the "special variation" production mode is determined. It is divided into those for use. Then, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot value (big hit random number value), the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area and the start winning time The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state in the above and the number of reserved balls at the time of the start winning, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the above stop pattern table 202d are set. The production mode is selected based on this. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Will be done.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E5: Normal reach" includes "normal reach only" with a total fluctuation time of 20 seconds, "pseudo-gase + normal reach" with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and total fluctuation time. 40 seconds of "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach", 30 seconds of total fluctuation time of "normal reach + re-variation", and 40 seconds of total fluctuation time of "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation". Six fluctuation patterns of "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation" with a time of 50 seconds are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 14, each fluctuation element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the effect time for each variable element of the variable effect. The variable element constitutes a part of the variable effect of 1, and each variable element is combined to form the variable effect of 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as fluctuation elements, "high-speed fluctuation", "low-speed fluctuation", "pseudo-gase", "pseudo-ream 1", "pseudo-ream 2", "normal reach", "super reach", "Special reach", "re-variation" and "movie" are provided.

The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player. When the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for 3 seconds at the beginning of the variable effect (see FIG. 14), except for "non-reach (shortened)". When the effect mode of the variable element (for example, “non-reach (normal)”) is selected, the effect is performed for 7 seconds at the beginning of the variable effect (see FIG. 14). When the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" ends, the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed), or the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is a fluctuation that starts after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element for 7 seconds and scrolls the third symbol visually to show whether or not "reach display" is generated. It is an element. The variable element of this "low speed fluctuation" is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, and the effect mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode (for example, "non-reach (normally)" effect mode is not executed. ) "Effect mode) is selected, it is performed for 3 seconds after the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation ". That is, in the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm does not pass through the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop). When the variable element of this "low-speed fluctuation" ends, whether the variable element of "pseudo-gase" described later is started (executed) or the variable element of "normal reach" described later is started (executed). Alternatively, the variation effect is configured to end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 7 seconds and a fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds. A variable effect is composed. Further, in the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, the variation effect is configured by the variation pattern of only the variation elements of the "high-speed variation" for 3 seconds.

The variable elements of the "pseudo-gase" are the variable elements of the "pseudo-ream 1" or the variable elements of the "pseudo-ream 2" (hereinafter, the variable elements of the "pseudo-ream 1" and the variable elements of the "pseudo-ream 2", which will be described later. Is a variable element that does not generate the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", although it is produced whether or not the "variable element of the" pseudo-ream "is generated).

The "pseudo-ream" variable element is a variable element in which the start of the variable effect occurs a plurality of times (pseudo-stop occurs once or more) in one variable effect. Specifically, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81 and switched to the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", and then in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The unit effect of ending the variation effect and displaying a predetermined stop result (for example, the pseudo-continuous chance eye “677”) is a variation element that is performed a plurality of times during one variation effect. The variable element of this "pseudo-ream" is that the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" starts again from the stop result when the predetermined stop result is stopped at least once after the variable element of the "low-speed fluctuation". The effect is executed as if the variable effect had been started once again.

In the variable element of the "pseudo-gase", an effect of whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of the variable element of the "low-speed fluctuation" (for example, the symbol forming the predetermined stop result is the effective line L1 (FIG. FIG. 4 (A)) The effect of whether or not to stop by reciprocating on the top. (Hereinafter, referred to as "pseudo-variation") is performed, and the above-mentioned predetermined stop result does not appear in the "pseudo-variation". It is a variable element that does not develop into a variable element of "pseudo-ream". Therefore, the variable element of this "pseudo-gase" develops into the variable element of "normal reach" after the end of the variable element of the "pseudo-gase", or "missing display" appears (for example, "687"). ) And the fluctuation production ends as it is.

As for the variable element of "pseudo-ream 1", a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of "pseudo-variation" after the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", and the variable element of the second "high-speed fluctuation" is executed again. In the second "pseudo-variation" after that, the predetermined stop result does not appear again, and it is a fluctuation element that develops into a fluctuation element of "normal reach". That is, as for the variable element of "pseudo-ream 1", a pseudo-variable stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop") in which the pseudo-ream chance is displayed is performed once, and then a predetermined stop result is obtained in the pseudo-stop. Is the variable element that appears and starts the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" again. Therefore, after the end of the variable element of "pseudo-ream 1", it develops into the variable element of "normal reach", or the variable effect ends as it is.

As for the variable element of "pseudo-ream 2", a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of "pseudo-variation" after the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", the variable element of the second "high-speed fluctuation" is executed again, and then. The predetermined stop result appears again in the second "pseudo-variation" of the above, the variable element of the third "high-speed fluctuation" is executed, and then the variable element develops into the "normal reach" variable element. That is, the "pseudo-ream 2" is a fluctuation element in which the pseudo-stop is performed twice in total, a predetermined stop result appears in each pseudo-stop, and the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is started again. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable element of the "pseudo-ream 2" is set to the maximum number of pseudo-variables among the variable elements of the "pseudo-ream". Therefore, after the end of the variable element of "pseudo-ream 1", it always develops into the variable element of "normal reach".

Therefore, the variable element of the "pseudo-gase" is an effect in which the pseudo-continuous chance eye does not stop after the variable element of the first "low-speed fluctuation", and is performed for a total of 10 seconds. As for the variable element of "pseudo-ream 1", the pseudo-ream chance eye is stopped after the first "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, and then "pseudo-variation" is performed. It is a production in which the reach formation symbol appears without any, and is performed for a total of 20 seconds. As for the variable element of "pseudo-ream 2", the first pseudo-ream chance is stopped after the first "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, and then the first "pseudo-variation" is performed, and the first "pseudo-ream" is performed. The pseudo-variation stops the pseudo-continuous chance again, and then the "pseudo-variation" is performed again to reveal the reach-forming symbol, which is performed for a total of 30 seconds (see FIG. 14).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of the "pseudo-gase", the pattern in which the "missing display" is displayed as it is without displaying the predetermined stop result and the predetermined stop are displayed. There is a pattern in which the reach formation symbol stops and a variable element of "normal reach" occurs, although the result is not displayed. In addition, after the execution of the variable element of "pseudo-ream 1", the pattern of displaying the "missing display" as it is without displaying the predetermined stop result and the predetermined stop result are displayed as in the case of the variable element of "pseudo-gase". There is a pattern that does not appear, but the reach formation symbol stops and a variable element of "normal reach" occurs. Further, after the execution of the variable element of the "pseudo-ream 2", the "loss display" does not appear directly, the reach forming symbol is stopped, and a pattern in which the "normal reach" is generated is prepared.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable element of the "pseudo-ream 2" is configured to be selected only when the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode is selected. ing. Therefore, when the variable element of "pseudo-ream 2" is performed, it is confirmed that the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is subsequently generated via the variable element of "normal reach". To do.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is from the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation effect to before the execution of the "reach display", that is, the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation". , "Before reach" execution timing is provided, in which the execution symbol changes during execution of the "slow fluctuation" variable element or the "pseudo-ream" variable element, but the "pseudo-ream" variable element is executed. As a result, the period of "before reach" is extended, so the player feels as if the execution timing of "pending change notice" has increased, and is a big hit based on the execution of "pseudo-ream". Since you can enjoy the hobby that increases the reliability and the hobby that the possibility that the "pending change notice" is executed has increased, you can enhance the hobby of the game.

It should be noted that a variable element of the "pseudo-ream" in which the number of pseudo-stops (the number of pseudo-ream chances) is 3 or more may be provided. Further, it may be configured so that a predetermined stop result is displayed in the variable element of the "low speed fluctuation" without executing the "pseudo-variation" to develop the effect related to the variable element of the "pseudo-ream".

The variable elements of "normal reach" are the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", the variable element of "pseudo-gase", the variable element of "pseudo-ream 1" or the variable element of "pseudo-ream 2" (hereinafter, "low-speed fluctuation"). The left symbol in the variable element, the variable element of "pseudo-gase", the variable element of "pseudo-ream 1" or the variable element of "pseudo-ream 2" may be collectively referred to as the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation, etc.") This is a variable element that indicates whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the fluctuation result of the middle symbol row Z2 when the reach forming symbol is stopped and displayed in the row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. This "normal reach" fluctuation element is performed for 10 seconds after the fluctuation element such as "low speed fluctuation" (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, the pattern of directly displaying "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying "big hit display", and the pattern of "super reach" There are a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "special reach", and a pattern that executes the variable element of "re-variation" after the "loss display" appears once.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is continued, and the "battle" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "directing". This "super reach" variable element is performed for 10 seconds after execution of the "normal reach" variable element (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays "loss display", a pattern that directly displays "big hit display", and a pattern that temporarily displays "loss display" are displayed. There is a pattern that executes the variable element of "re-variation" after the "" appears.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is continued, and the "competition" is performed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "directing". This "special reach" variable element is performed for 20 seconds after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, the pattern that directly displays the "loss display", the pattern that directly displays the "big hit display", and the "loss display" are once displayed. There is a pattern that executes the variable element of "re-variation" after the "" appears.

It should be noted that, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", it is configured to develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". When the reach formation symbol is stopped later, it may be configured to suddenly develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without going through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "loss display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for 10 seconds after any "reach display" (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only the pattern in which the “big hit display” appears after the execution of the fluctuation element of the “re-variation” is prepared. That is, when the "re-variation" is executed, the "big hit display" always appears after that.

The variable element of the "movie" is a variable element that is performed after the execution of the "low speed fluctuation" when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, and the "big hit display" corresponding to the "2R probability variation jackpot" appears. .. The variable element of this "movie" is performed for 40 seconds after the "slow fluctuation" (see FIG. 14), and produces an effect in which a specific character symbol (for example, a premier character) speaks a predetermined message in the entire main display area Dm. Execute (not shown).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only the pattern in which the "big hit display" corresponding to the "2R probability variation big hit" appears after the execution of the variable element of the "movie" is prepared. That is, when the "movie" is executed, the "big hit display" of the "2R probability variation big hit" always appears after that.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" with respect to "normal reach only (01H)", and "pseudo-gase + normal reach (pseudo-gase + normal reach). "10-19" for "02H)", "20-59" for "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach (03H)", "60-79" for "normal reach + revariation (04H)", "pseudo" It is "80 to 99" for "Gase + normal reach + revariation (05H)", and "100 to 199" for "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + revariation (06H)".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach only (01H)" is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + normal reach (02H)" is 5%, and "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach (03H)". The fluctuation pattern of "" is 20%, the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + re-variation (04H)" is 10%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (05H)" is 10%, "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation". The fluctuation pattern of "variation (06H)" is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of big hit, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation element of "re-variation" is easily selected (70% of the total), and in particular, "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation) The variation pattern of "06H)" is easy to select (50% of the total). However, by configuring so that "normal reach only (01H)" and "pseudo-gase + normal reach (02H)" that do not include the fluctuation element of "re-fluctuation" are also selected, a game in which a big hit can be expected from any fluctuation pattern. Can provide sex.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E6: Super Reach" includes "Super Reach Only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds and "Pseudo Gase + Super Reach" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds. 02H) ”,“ Pseudo-ren 1 + Super Reach (03H) ”with an overall fluctuation time of 50 seconds, and“ Pseudo-ren 2 + Super Reach (04H) ”with an overall fluctuation time of 60 seconds. 40 seconds of "super reach + re-variation (05H)", 50 seconds of total fluctuation time of "pseudo-gase + super reach + re-variation (06H)", and 60 seconds of total fluctuation time of "pseudo-ream 1 +" Eight fluctuation patterns of "super reach + re-variation (07H)" and "pseudo-ream 2 + super reach + re-variation (08H)" with a total fluctuation time of 70 seconds are prepared for each variation pattern. The value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: Super Reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 9” for “Super Reach Only (01H)” and “Pseudo-Gase +”. "10-19" for "Super Reach (02H)", "20-59" for "Pseudo-Ream 1 + Super Reach (03H)", "60-" for "Pseudo-Ream 2 + Super Reach (04H)" "99", "100-119" for "super reach + re-variation (05H)", "120-139" for "pseudo-gase + super reach + re-variation (06H)", "pseudo-ream 1 + super reach" It is "140 to 169" for "+ revariation (07H)" and "170 to 199" for "pseudo-ream 2 + super reach + revariation (08H)".

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of "super reach only (01H)" is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + super reach (02H)" is 5%, and "pseudo-ream 1 + super". 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "reach (03H)", 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream 2 + super reach (04H)", 10% of the fluctuation pattern of "super reach + re-variation (05H)", "pseudo-gase +" The fluctuation pattern of "super reach + re-variation (06H)" is 10%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream 1 + super reach + re-variation (07H)" is 15%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream 2 + super reach + re-variation (08H)" The fluctuation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 15%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of jackpot, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation element of "re-variation" and the fluctuation pattern not including the fluctuation element of "re-variation" are equally selected (50% of each other). It has become so. In addition, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream 2" is easily selected (35%). However, by configuring so that "super reach only (01H)" and "pseudo-gase + super reach (02H)" that do not include the variable element of "re-variation" and the variable element of "pseudo-ream 2" are also selected. , It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E7: Special Reach" includes "Special Reach Only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds and "Pseudo Gase + Special Reach" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds. 02H) ”,“ Pseudo-ren 1 + Special Reach (03H) ”with an overall fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and“ Pseudo-ren 2 + Special Reach (04H) ”with an overall fluctuation time of 70 seconds. 50 seconds of "special reach + re-variation (05H)", total fluctuation time of 60 seconds "pseudo-gase + special reach + re-variation (06H)", and total fluctuation time of 70 seconds "pseudo-ream 1 +" Eight fluctuation patterns of "special reach + re-variation (07H)" and "pseudo-ream 2 + special reach + re-variation (08H)" with an overall fluctuation time of 80 seconds are prepared for each variation pattern. The value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "special reach only (01H)" and "pseudo-gase +". "10-19" for "Special Reach (02H)", "20-39" for "Pseudo-Ream 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "40-" for "Pseudo-Ream 2 + Special Reach (04H)" "99", "100-109" for "special reach + re-variation (05H)", "110-119" for "pseudo-gase + special reach + re-variation (06H)", "pseudo-ream 1 + special reach" It is "120 to 139" for "+ revariation (07H)" and "140 to 199" for "pseudo-ream 2 + special reach + revariation (08H)".

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of "special reach only (01H)" is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + special reach (02H)" is 5%, and "pseudo-ream 1 + special". The fluctuation pattern of "reach (03H)" is 10%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream 2 + special reach (04H)" is 30%, the fluctuation pattern of "special reach + re-variation (05H)" is 5%, and "pseudo-gase +". The fluctuation pattern of "special reach + re-variation (06H)" is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream 1 + special reach + re-variation (07H)" is 10%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream 2 + special reach + re-variation (08H)" The fluctuation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of big hit, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation element of "re-variation" and the fluctuation pattern not including the fluctuation element of "re-variation" are equally selected (50% of each other). It has become so. Further, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream 2" is easily selected (60%). However, by configuring so that "special reach only (01H)" and "pseudo-gase + special reach (02H)" that do not include the variable element of "re-variation" and the variable element of "pseudo-ream 2" are also selected. , It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, only one fluctuation pattern of the "movie (01H)" having a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds is prepared for "E8: special fluctuation". In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 199" with respect to "movie (01H)", and "movie". (01H) ”is set to be selectable. That is, when the stop type of the jackpot is "2R probability variation jackpot", "movie (01H)" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

When the "movie (01H)" is selected by the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "movie (01H)". In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the “movie (01H)”, for example, while displaying characters such as “chicken” or “girl” in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol due to a fluctuation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol (for example, "341"), lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, or the like. Fluctuation patterns and the like are included.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or "reach display" before or during the fluctuation effect may be determined by another fluctuation type counter, or when the reach is established. , The number of symbols to be shifted and stopped (for example, front-rear loss by one symbol) may be determined by another variable type counter.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, a group dedicated to "2R probability variation jackpot" was provided, but in this pachinko machine 10, when "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, only the variation pattern of "movie (01H)" is provided. Is selected, a group dedicated to "2R probability variation jackpot" is not provided, and in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern when "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" is obtained Only the association may be specified. In this case, when the jackpot type is "2R probability variation jackpot", the "movie (01H)" may be determined as the fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1.

Further, in this pachinko machine 10, only "movie (01H)" is selected when "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, but one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is selected when "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained. The variation pattern may be selected. In this case, even in a group dedicated to "2R probability variation jackpot" such as the group of "15R jackpot common", the variation type counter CS1 is supported for the variation pattern selected when "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain hold area may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the hold area.

Next, the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 13, the loss variation pattern table 202e2 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode, when "E0: non-reach (shortened)" and "non-reach (normal)", which are referred to when "non-reach (shortened)" is determined, are determined. Referenced "E1: Non-reach (normal)", "E2: Normal reach" referred to when "Normal reach" is determined, and "E3" referenced when "Super reach" is determined. : It is divided into "Super Reach" and "E4: Special Reach" which is referred to when "Special Reach" is decided. Then, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in a certain hold area is not a jackpot value (big hit random number value), that is, a lost value, the game state at that time and the time point The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the above, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group to be referred to in the loss variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for loss, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Will be done.

In the loss variation pattern table 202e2, only one variation pattern of "non-reach (shortening) only" with an overall variation time of 3 seconds is prepared for "E0: non-reach (shortening)". In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (shortening)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 199” with respect to “non-reach (shortening) only (01H)”. ", And only" non-reach (shortened) only (01H) "is set to be selectable. That is, when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e2, "non-reach (shortened)" is applied to all the values ("0 to 199") that the variable type counter CS1 can take. Only (01H) ”is associated. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)" is always selected as the variation pattern.

In the loss variation pattern table 202e2, "E1: non-reach (normal)" includes "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" with an overall variation time of 10 seconds and "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" with an overall variation time of 20 seconds. Three fluctuation patterns are available, which are "pseudo-gase + non-reach (normal) (02H)" and "pseudo-ream 1 + non-reach (normal) (03H)" with an overall fluctuation time of 30 seconds. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (normal)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 179” with respect to “non-reach (normal) only (01H)”. , "Pseudo-counter + non-reach (normal) (02H)" is "180 to 189", and "pseudo-ream 1 + non-reach (normal) (03H)" is "190-199". ..

That is, in the variation effect of "non-reach (normal)" at the time of loss, the variation pattern of "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" is 90%, and the variation of "pseudo-gase + non-reach (normal) (02H)". The pattern is set to be selected at a ratio of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream 1 + non-reach (normal) (03H)" is selected at a ratio of 5%. Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" variation effect selected at the time of loss, the "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" variation pattern is easily selected (90%).

In the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss, "E2: normal reach" includes "normal reach only (01H)" with an overall variation time of 20 seconds and "pseudo-gase + normal reach (02H)" with an overall variation time of 30 seconds. And three fluctuation patterns of "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49" for "normal reach only (01H)", and "pseudo-gase + normal reach (pseudo-gase + normal reach). "02H)" is "50 to 149", and "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach (03H)" is "150 to 199".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach only (01H)" is 25%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + normal reach (02H)" is 50%, and "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach (03H)". The fluctuation pattern of "" is set to be selected at a rate of 25%. Therefore, in the variation effect including the variation element of "normal reach" selected at the time of loss, the variation pattern of "pseudo-gase + normal reach (02H)" is easily selected (50%).

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for loss, "E3: Super Reach" includes "Super Reach Only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds and "Pseudo-Gase + Super Reach" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds. There are four fluctuation patterns: "02H)", "pseudo-ream 1 + super reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, and "pseudo-ream 2 + super reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds. It is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: Super Reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 49” for “Super Reach Only (01H)” and “Pseudo-Gase +”. "50-99" for "Super Reach (02H)", "100-179" for "Pseudo-Ream 1 + Super Reach (03H)", "180-" for "Pseudo-Ream 2 + Super Reach (04H)" 199 ”.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "super reach only (01H)" is 25%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + super reach (02H)" is 25%, and "pseudo-ream 1 + super". The fluctuation pattern of "reach (03H)" is set to be selected at a ratio of 40%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream 2 + super reach (04H)" is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%. Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of loss, the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream 1 + super reach (03H)" is easily selected.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for loss, "E4: Special reach" includes "special reach only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds and "pseudo-gase + special reach" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds. There are four fluctuation patterns: "02H)", "pseudo-ream 1 + special reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and "pseudo-ream 2 + special reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 70 seconds. It is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 79” for “special reach only (01H)” and “pseudo-gase +”. "80-159" for "Special Reach (02H)", "160-179" for "Pseudo-Ream 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "180-159" for "Pseudo-Ream 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 199 ”.

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "special reach only (01H)" is 40%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + special reach (02H)" is 40%, and "pseudo-ream 1 + special". The fluctuation pattern of "reach (03H)" is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream 2 + special reach (04H)" is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%. Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "special reach only (01H)" and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + special reach (02H)" are evenly selected (40% of each other). It is easy to be done.

In this way, when a jackpot is won, by configuring it so that a relatively long fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, the entertainment of the game is improved by enhancing the production content of the fluctuation production in which the jackpot occurs. be able to. In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if there is a loss, by configuring the configuration so that a relatively short fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, the effect content of the variation effect at the time of loss can be shortened and the variation effect can be achieved. Can be digested efficiently.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination and selected (presence or absence of a notice display or the like is selected).

Returning to FIG. 7, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 250", reaches the maximum value (that is, "250"), and then returns to "0". Has been done. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4.

In the first embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Acquired when detected. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the acquired value of the random number counter C4 for the second hit is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined to be a hit, and the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the stop symbol (second symbol). Along with the lighting display, the electric accessory of the first ball entry port 64 is activated, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 250"), and is used for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and dynamics in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting the display and the variation effect, and drawing the display result in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and input / output devices. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as input / output (hereinafter, abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 26) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on. The non-maskable interrupt (Non-Mascapable Interrupt; hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU201 is designed so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further has at least a hold ball number counter 203a, a hold ball storage area 203b, and a hold ball execution area 203c.

The reserved ball number counter 203a enters the first ball entry port 64 (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize") detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the above), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the dynamic display (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to four times. The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (S613 in FIG. 25) after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (see S203 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 22).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 21). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the dynamic display (variation effect) held by the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the dynamic display (variation effect) is held without accessing the main control device 110. Further, every time a start winning prize is detected, the main control device 110 sends a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 to hold the dynamic display (variation effect) managed by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if the number of balls deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the number of reserved balls command to be received next will be used. , The deviation can be corrected.

The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 each time the hold ball number managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, only the value of the hold ball number counter 203a added by 1 in the hold ball number command is used. The first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) due to the start winning that triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a start prize, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the main control device 110 are changed. , It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is changed based on the respective values. It pre-reads before the effect is executed, and determines what happens to the variable effect (whether it is a big hit, what happens to the variable time, etc.) before executing the variable effect. Then, based on the judgment result by the look-ahead, it is possible to decide the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect contents and the execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice".

It should be noted that the hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls of the fluctuation effect and the command indicating the value of the random number counter C1 or the like per first may be separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the random number counter C1 or the like for the first hit, which is different from the hold ball number command, the hold ball number command is generated at the time when the ball enters the first entry port 64, and the hold ball number command is generated for the entry. A command similar to the variation pattern command and the stop type command based on the command (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, with respect to the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) when a start winning prize is detected. It is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are calculated from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The hold ball storage area 203b has four hold areas (holds 1st to 1st) so that data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to 4 times. It has 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c is data (counters C1 to C3, CS1) to be referred to in processing such as a jackpot lottery, dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and setting of fluctuation effect. It is a memory for storing the value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as a jackpot lottery, dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and setting of the variation effect. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize (counters C1 to C3, CS1 values) stored in the above-mentioned reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one start winning prize is used in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Shift to. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described with reference to FIG. 7 again. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a jackpot lottery, dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, setting of variation effect, and the like. Used by.

For the big hit lottery and the setting of the dynamic display and the fluctuation effect of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery and the first used for determining the big hit type. A hit type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning).

The holding ball storage area 203b is composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), the first random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 for storing the value are stored. A per-type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In the first embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are stored as one reserved ball. Although it is provided in the area 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) can be stored up to four times. Data is stored, but in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas). .. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the old start winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize in time is stored in the reserved first area.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. Similar to the hold ball storage area 203b, the hold ball execution area 203c stores the values of the first random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2. The first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203b is transferred to the hold ball. Each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c is shifted. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 23), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the hold first area is transferred to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the hold ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random value of the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , The random value of the variable type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203c4.

Then, when the data shift to the hold ball execution area 203c is completed, the hold first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the hold ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed into the area (first to third) that is one smaller than the area number. In the present embodiment, the data is shifted only in the holding area (1st to 4th) in which the data is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203b.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. To do. In this state, when the data in the hold 1st area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203c and the hold 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to each area. Shift to the area with the number 1 smaller (1st to 3rd). That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Further, for example, if the value of the hold ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the hold second area to the hold first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the hold areas (third to fourth) where the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the hold area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the hold areas (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, a variation effect, and continuous operation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or the "supermarket" can be changed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect mode such as "reach", and the display control device 114 is instructed.

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the effect mode of "super reach", a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the frame button operation command, the display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, with reference to FIG. 15, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 15 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221 as fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, and a hold change table 222e, the scenario table 222f is stored at least. Of these tables 222a to 222f, the tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is there.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3, which are acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. The look-ahead process is executed based on each value of the variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of effect the pending variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead processing will be as a result (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) will be the variable effect. Is determined before the execution of, and the execution of various effects is determined, and the effect content and execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice" are determined. The details of the pending change table 222e and the scenario table 222f will be described later.

The RAM 223 is provided with at least a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-holding ball number counter 223b, a holding change counter 223c, a scenario counter 223d, a holding information storage area 223e, and an execution information storage area 223f.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation effect should be started in the ON state. The fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1207 in FIG. 29). Then, it is turned off when the variation effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1401 in FIG. 31). The MPU 221 performs a variation effect process (see FIG. 31) for executing the standby variation effect when there is a standby variation effect when the variation start flag 223a is turned on.

The sub-holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (dynamic display) performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), similarly to the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub-held ball number counter 223b manages the number of reserved balls. There is.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is added by entering the first ball entry port 64 and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, hold in the main control device 110). The number of reserved balls of the variable effect) is stored in the sub-held ball number counter 223b (see S1301 in FIG. 30).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted by the main control device 110, and the third symbol is accompanied by the reception. When the mode of the variation effect in the display device 81 is set, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is subtracted by 1 (see S1411 in FIG. 31). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the hold ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b, so that the hold of the main control device 110 is held. The value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the ball number counter 203a.

The value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the holding symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, or the sub-reserved ball number in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is sent to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b after storage or updating. It is transmitted (see S1313 in FIG. 30 or S1412 in FIG. 31).

Further, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is referred to in order to determine the timing of executing the "holding change notice" in the case of performing the "holding change notice" described later. Specifically, when it is determined to execute the "hold change notice" in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30) described later, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f described later. At the time of determination, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is referred to, and the number of holding balls of the fluctuation effect at that time is determined.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Is controlled to be displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variation effect is reserved.

The hold change counter 223c is a counter that draws lots for whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" in the hold symbol and the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as described above, as the "holding change notice", the display colors of the holding symbol and the execution symbol are changed from the normal display mode of white to the blue display mode of "blue" and the red display mode. It is configured to be changeable to "red" or "rainbow" in a rainbow-colored display mode.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110. The look-ahead process can be executed based on the value and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead processing, the effect mode of the variation effect indicated by the hold ball number command is grasped, and based on the effect mode, whether or not to perform the "hold change notice" is drawn by the hold change counter 223c and the hold change table 222e. ..

The pending change counter 223c is sequentially added by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the maximum value is increased. (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the hold change counter 223c is updated (for example, 1 addition) once for each loop of the main process (see S1111 in FIG. 28). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the hold change counter grasps the effect mode of the variation effect indicated by the hold ball number command, and the hold change counter is based on the effect mode. With reference to the value of 223c and the pending change table 222e, whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed and the display mode are determined (see S1303 in FIG. 30).

Here, the pending change table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the pending change table 222e. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the hold change table 222e based on the value of the hold change counter 223c at that time, and performs "hold change notice". Whether or not, and the display mode of the "pending change notice" are determined. As shown in FIG. 16, the pending change table 222e is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, for the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss, for the "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of loss, for the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, and "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss. For "super reach" production mode, for "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, for "normal reach" production mode at the time of big hit, for "super reach" production mode at the time of big hit, and "special reach" at the time of big hit It is divided into one for the production mode and one for the "special variation" production mode at the time of a big hit. Then, the possible values of the pending change counter 223c are associated with each of the divided groups.

In the hold change table 222e, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode at the time of loss, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to "none", which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and blue. Two display modes, "blue" and "blue", are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. In the first embodiment, when "None" is selected in which the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol does not change, the "pending change notice" is not executed.

In addition, as the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "red" in which the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol changes to red and "rainbow" in which the color changes to rainbow color is not selected. As described above, the value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is "red" in the "pending change notice", the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is "super". This is to confirm that the "reach or higher" effect mode is executed. In addition, when the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol is "rainbow" in the "hold change notice", in order to confirm that the "big hit display" appears in the variation effect indicated by the hold symbol or the execution symbol. Is. Therefore, in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode in which "super reach or higher" and "big hit display" do not appear, "red" or "rainbow" of "pending change notice" is set not to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode at the time of loss is “0 to 98” with respect to “none”. It is "99" for "blue". Since no values are assigned to "red" and "rainbow", they are written as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 99%, the display mode of "blue" is 1%, and "red". The display mode of "" and "rainbow" is set to be selected at a ratio of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected at the time of "non-reach (shortening)" at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is easily selected (99%), and the "hold change notice" itself occurs. It is a difficult setting.

In the hold change table 222e, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of loss, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to "none", which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and blue. Two display modes, "blue" and "blue", are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. In the "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of loss, "super reach or higher" and "big hit display" do not appear as in the case of "non-reach (shortened)" at the time of loss. Therefore, the value of the hold change counter 223c is associated so that the display mode of "red" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to red and "rainbow" in which the color changes to rainbow color is not selected. Absent.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode at the time of loss is “0 to 98” with respect to “none”. It is "99" for "blue". Since no values are assigned to "red" and "rainbow", they are written as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 99%, the display mode of "blue" is 1%, and "red". And the display mode of "rainbow" is set to be selected at a ratio of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is easily selected (99%), and the "hold change notice" itself is It is a setting that is unlikely to occur.

In the hold change table 222e, the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss includes "none" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" in which the color changes to blue. Two display modes are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. In the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, "super reach or higher" and "big hit display" do not appear as in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss. Therefore, the value of the hold change counter 223c is associated so that the display mode of "red" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to red and "rainbow" in which the color changes to rainbow color is not selected. Absent.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss is changed from “none” to “0 to 79” and “blue”. On the other hand, it is "80 to 99". Since no values are assigned to "red" and "rainbow", they are written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 80%, the display mode of "blue" is 20%, and "red" and "rainbow". The display mode of is set to be selected at a ratio of 0%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is easily selected (80%), but the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode at the time of loss and the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode and The setting (1% → 20%) makes it easier to select the “blue” display mode than the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode at the time of loss.

In the hold change table 222e, the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss includes "none" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" in which the color changes to blue. And "red" that changes to red are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. In the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the "big hit display" does not appear as in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode at the time of loss, so the color of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol becomes rainbow. The value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated so that the display mode of the changing "rainbow" is not selected. On the other hand, since the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss executes the variable element of "super reach", the hold change counter 223c is selected so that the "red" display mode suggesting "super reach or higher" is selected. The value of is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of loss is “0 to 19” and “blue” with respect to “none”. On the other hand, it is "20 to 89", and for "red", it is "90 to 99". Since no value is assigned to "rainbow", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 20%, the display mode of "blue" is 70%, and the display mode of "red". Is set to be selected at a ratio of 10% and the display mode of "rainbow" is selected at a ratio of 0%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "blue" is set to be easier to select than the display mode of "none" (70%). In addition, the display mode of "red", which has a higher expectation of big hit than the display mode of "blue", is also set to be selectable.

In the hold change table 222e, in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to "none (white)" which does not change, "blue" which changes to blue, and red. Three display modes of "red" are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. In the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "big hit display" does not appear as in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss, so the color of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol becomes rainbow. The value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated so that the display mode of the changing "rainbow" is not selected. On the other hand, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, since the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, the hold change counter 223c is selected so that the "red" display mode suggesting "super reach or higher" is selected. The value of is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of loss is “0 to 9” and “blue” with respect to “none”. It is "10-49" for "10-49", and "50-99" for "red". Since no value is assigned to "rainbow", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 40%, and the display mode of "red". Is set to be selected at a ratio of 50% and the display mode of "rainbow" is selected at a ratio of 0%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "red" is set to be easier to select than the display mode of "blue" or "none" (50%). ing.

In the hold change table 222e, the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit includes "none" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" in which the color changes to blue. And three display modes of "rainbow" that changes to rainbow color are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the hold change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. In addition, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, since "super reach or higher" does not appear, the hold change counter is used so that the display mode of "red" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to red is not selected. The value of 223c is not associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of a big hit is changed from “none” to “0-9” and “blue”. On the other hand, it is "10 to 89" and "90 to 99" for "rainbow". Since no value is assigned to "red", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 80%, and the display mode of "red" is. The display mode of 0% and "rainbow" is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "normal reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the display mode of "blue" is easily selected (80%), and the display mode of "rainbow" is also selected. Since it is (10%), it is set so that a "pending change notice" is likely to occur.

In the hold change table 222e, the "super reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit includes "none" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" in which the color changes to blue. , "Red" that changes to red, and "rainbow" that changes to rainbow color are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of a big hit is “0 to 9” and “blue” with respect to “none”. It is "10 to 39" for "red", "40 to 89" for "red", and "90 to 99" for "rainbow".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 30%, and the display mode of "red". Is set to be selected at a ratio of 50% and the display mode of "rainbow" is selected at a ratio of 10%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "super reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the "red" display mode is easily selected (40%), and the "blue" display mode is also easy to be selected (blue). 30%), and further, since the display mode of "rainbow" is also set to be selected (10%), it is set so that "pending change notice" is likely to occur.

In the hold change table 222e, the "special reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit includes "none" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" in which the color changes to blue. , "Red" that changes to red, and "rainbow" that changes to rainbow color are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of a big hit is “0 to 9” and “blue” with respect to “none”. It is "10 to 19" for "red", "20 to 89" for "red", and "90 to 99" for "rainbow".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 10%, and the display mode of "red". Is set to be selected at a ratio of 70% and the display mode of "rainbow" is selected at a ratio of 10%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the "red" display mode is easily selected (70%), and the "blue" display mode is also selected (10). %) Furthermore, since the display mode of "rainbow" is also set to be selected (10%), it is set so that "pending change notice" is likely to occur.

In the hold change table 222e, the "special variation" effect mode at the time of a big hit includes "none" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" in which the color changes to blue. , "Red" that changes to red, and "rainbow" that changes to rainbow color are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “special change” effect mode at the time of a big hit is “0 to 69” and “blue” with respect to “none”. It is "70 to 79" for "red", "80 to 89" for "red", and "90 to 99" for "rainbow".

That is, when the "special variation" effect mode at the time of jackpot is selected (when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won), 70% of the display modes are "no hold change notice" and "blue" is displayed. The mode is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%, the display mode of "red" is 10%, and the display mode of "rainbow" is 10%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "special variation" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the display mode of "none" is easily selected (70%), and "blue", "red" or "rainbow". Since the display modes of are also set to be selected evenly (10%), it is difficult for the "pending change notice" to occur, but when it does occur, it is set to be selected almost evenly.

Therefore, the appearance probability of the "holding change notice" at the time of loss is, for example, when the number of holding balls in the "normal game state" is the first, that is, when the effect mode is selected by the A table 202d1. The "pending change notice" is selected at a ratio of 91.05% for "none", 7.65% for "blue", and 1.3% for "red". Further, the appearance probability of the "holding change notice" at the time of a big hit is, for example, when the "15R probability change big hit" is won, that is, when the production mode is selected by the C table 202d3, the "holding change notice" is set. The ratio of "none" that does not change is 10%, "blue" is 20.5%, "red" is 59.5%, and "rainbow" is 10%. Therefore, when the big hit lottery of the third symbol is won, it is easy to select "red" or "rainbow" from the "pending change notice", and it is difficult to select "none" or "blue", while the big hit lottery. If you lose, "None" or "Blue" is easy to select, and "Red" is hard to select ("Rainbow" is not selected at the time of loss).

In this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the propriety and effect mode of the variable effect indicated by the hold ball number command, and is based on the propriety and effect mode. It is configured to determine whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed and the display mode. With this configuration, the result of the variation effect is suggested to the player by the reserved symbol before the variation effect is executed, and the variation effect held by the player until the variation effect is executed is generated. By predicting whether or not it will be a big hit, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The hold change information of the "hold change notice" determined (selected) based on the values of the hold change table 222e and the hold change counter 223c is the hold information storage area 223e described later indicated by the value of the sub-hold change counter 223b. It is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 (see FIG. 19). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "hold change notice" is executed in the hold symbol or the execution symbol based on the hold change information stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 and the scenario data described later.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The scenario counter 223d is a counter for determining the execution timing of the determined "pending change notice". As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" and the display mode based on the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the execution of the "hold change notice" is decided, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f.

The scenario counter 223d is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the maximum value (see S1111 in FIG. 28) is added. For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the scenario counter 223d is updated (for example, 1 addition) once for each loop of the main process (see S1111 in FIG. 28). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the effect mode of the variable effect indicated by the hold ball number command is grasped, and "hold" is performed based on the effect mode. Whether or not the "change notice" can be executed and the display mode are determined. Then, when the execution of the "hold change notice" is determined, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is determined by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f (see S1305 in FIG. 30).

Here, the scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f when the execution of the “hold change notice” is determined. , Determine the execution timing of the "pending change notice". In this case, even if the same "hold change notice (for example," blue ")" is used, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" at the time of loss and the execution timing of the "hold change notice" at the time of a big hit are different. Therefore, the jackpot expectation is configured to differ depending on the execution timing of the "pending change notice". FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario table 222f1.

In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of FIG. 17, each of the number of reserved balls (4 patterns of the number of reserved balls "1" to "4") of the fluctuation effect at the time when the vertical row determines the "hold change notice" Each of the number of reserved balls is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns, which are divided according to the display mode of the "pending change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). In addition, as the timing for the row to execute (start) the "hold change notice", four patterns at the time of displaying or shifting to each hold ball number (hold ball number "1" to "4") and the hold ball There are a total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (at shift)", "before reach", "after reach", or "after hold deletion" when the number is "0" (during the variable effect execution). Each is divided. Then, the possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with each of the divided groups.

In the "holding change notice" in the first embodiment, the display mode of the determined "holding change notice" is executed (appearing) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each of the above situation patterns. It is set to do.

Specifically, for example, when the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "0" for the number of held balls and "at the start" is selected, the variation effect that determines the "hold change notice" starts. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing when the change is made. If the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "0" for the number of reserved balls and "before reach" is selected, the change effect in the change effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is in progress. The "hold" is performed before the "reach display" appears (for example, when the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed, or when the left symbol column Z1 is stopped while the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is being executed, etc.). "Change notice" is executed. If the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "0" for the number of reserved balls and "after reach" is selected, the change effect in the change effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is in progress. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing when the "reach display" is being executed (for example, the variable element of the "normal reach" is being executed). In addition, when the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "0" for the number of held balls and "after erasing the hold" is selected, the change effect in the change effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is in progress. At the timing when the cockpit display area Db after the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is redisplayed (the timing before the execution of the variable element of "re-variation"), the "pending change notice" Is executed.

Further, for example, when the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is selected as the number of hold balls "1", the hold symbol indicating the variation effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is the first hold symbol display area Db1. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing displayed in or at the timing of the shift. When the number of reserved balls "2" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", the hold symbol indicating the variation effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Db2. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing of the shift or the timing of the shift. When the number of reserved balls "3" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", the hold symbol indicating the variation effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is displayed in the third hold symbol display area Db3. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing of the shift or the timing of the shift. When the number of reserved balls "4" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", the hold symbol indicating the variation effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is displayed in the fourth hold symbol display area Db4. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing of the change.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the voice lamp A lottery for the "holding change notice" is performed in the control device 113, and it is determined whether or not to execute the "holding change notice". When the execution of the "holding change notice" is decided, first, the number of held balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "holding change notice" are grasped. Then, when the fluctuation effect indicated by the hold ball number command is a big hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "hold change notice" at the time of the big hit is referred to by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the big hit scenario table 222f1. ) Is determined.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, situation patterns of the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” and each display mode of the “hold change notice” are prepared, and each is prepared. The value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the status pattern.

First, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “1” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated, the reserved symbols of "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls is "1" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "2" to "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 17).

First, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" of "0" reserved balls and "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "5-9", "10-14" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "15-49" for "after erasing hold" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved balls It is "50 to 99" for the number "1".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 5% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after erasing the hold" is 35% and the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is displayed) is 50%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the jackpot is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue". The timing at the time of display is most easily selected (50%), and then the timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is erased by the variable element of "super reach" or the like is easy to be selected (35). %) Is set.

In the first embodiment, when the execution timing of the "pending change notice" is determined, the effect mode of the corresponding variation effect is not determined. Therefore, for example, even when the execution timing of "after erasure of hold" is selected, when the variation effect is the "normal reach" effect mode, the "notice of change of hold" is issued at the execution timing of "after erasure of hold". There can be situations where you cannot do it. However, in such a case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the "holding change notice" cannot be performed at the determined execution timing, another execution timing that can be executed can be executed. (For example, "after reach") is configured to change (see FIG. 32). Therefore, when the execution lottery of the "holding change notice" is won, the "holding change notice" can be surely executed at any timing. Therefore, when determining the execution timing of the "hold change notice", even if the execution timing is decided without grasping the effect mode of the variation effect, the "hold change notice" can be surely executed, and the game can be played. It can enhance the interest. The details of change control will be described later.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" of the number of reserved balls "0" and "before reach" of the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 89" for "after erased" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved balls It is "90 to 99" for the number "1".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after erasing the hold" is 60% and the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is displayed) is 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is "super reach" when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "red". It is set so that it is most easily selected (60%) at the timing of redisplay after the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is erased.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" of "0" reserved balls and "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "5-9", "10-49" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, and "50-99" for "after erasing hold" with "0" number of reserved balls. There is. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" in the "holding change notice" does not appear in the holding symbol, but can appear only in the execution symbol, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, the number of reserved balls is "1". The value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 40% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after erasing the hold" is 50% and the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is displayed) is 0%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is "super reach" when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow". The timing for redisplaying the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is most likely to be selected (50%), and then the timing during execution of "reach display" is most likely to be selected (40%). ) Is set. The display mode of the "rainbow" in the "holding change notice" at the time of a big hit is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of holding balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice". Therefore, the description of the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "pending change notice" at the time of a big hit in the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is omitted.

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “2” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated, the reserved symbols of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls is "2" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "3" or "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 17).

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for "start" of "0" number of reserved balls and "5-5" for "before reach" of "0" number of reserved balls. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”of“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-39 ”for“ after erasing hold ”of“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-39 ”for“ after erasing hold ”, number of reserved balls“ It is "40 to 49" for "1" and "50 to 99" for "2" of reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 5% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio of "after erasing the hold" is 25%, the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of hold balls "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is displayed) is 50%. It is set to be.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the hold symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue". It seems that the timing at the time of display is most easily selected (50%), and then the timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is erased by "super reach" or the like is easy to be selected (25%). Is set to.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" of the number of reserved balls "0" and "before reach" of the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 79" for "after erased" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved balls It is "80 to 89" for the number "1" and "90 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "2".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio of "after erasing the hold" is 50%, the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of hold balls "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is displayed) is 10%. It is set to be.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the jackpot is "super reach" when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "red". The timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is erased is set so as to be most easily selected (50%).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “3” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated, the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, at the time when the number of reserved balls is "3" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d is against the number of reserved balls "4" when the "hold change notice" is executed. The value of is not assigned (see FIG. 17).

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for "start" of "0" number of reserved balls and "5-5" for "before reach" of "0" number of reserved balls. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”of“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-29 ”for“ after erasing hold ”of“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-29 ”for“ after erasing hold ”, number of reserved balls“ It is "30 to 39" for "1", "40 to 49" for "2" of reserved balls, and "50 to 99" for "3" of reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 5% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After erasing the hold" is 15%, the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of hold balls is "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of hold balls is The selection ratio of "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to 50%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the hold symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue". The timing at the time of display is most likely to be selected (50%), and then the timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is erased by "super reach" or the like is easy to be selected (15%). Is set to.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" of the number of reserved balls "0" and "before reach" of the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 69" for "after erased" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved balls The number is "70 to 79" for the number "1", "80 to 89" for the number of reserved balls "2", and "90 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "3".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After erasing the hold" is 40%, the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of hold balls "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the hold symbol " "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is "super reach" when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "red". The timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is erased is set so as to be most easily selected (40%).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “4” will be described.

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for "start" of "0" number of reserved balls and "5-5" for "before reach" of "0" number of reserved balls. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-19 ”for“ after erasing hold ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-19 ”for“ after erasing hold ”, number of reserved balls“ "20-29" for "1", "30-39" for "2" reserved balls, "40-49" for "3" reserved balls, "4" for reserved balls It is "50 to 99" for each piece.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 5% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After erasing the hold" is 5%, the number of hold balls is "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of hold balls is "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is shift) is 10%, and the number of hold balls is The selection ratio is set so that "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10% and "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 50%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is the hold symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (50%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" of the number of reserved balls "0" and "before reach" of the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 59" for "after erased" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved balls "60-69" for the number "1", "70-79" for the number of reserved balls "2", "80-89" for the number of reserved balls "3", the number of reserved balls " It is "90 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After erasing the hold" is 30%, the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of hold balls "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the hold symbol " The selection ratio is set so that "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is "super reach" when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "4" and the display mode is "red". The timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is erased is set so as to be most easily selected (30%).

In this way, when performing "hold change notice" in the hold symbol and the execution symbol indicating the fluctuation effect that generates the jackpot, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db by "super reach" or the like is displayed. The "pending change notice" can be displayed (executed) at the timing when the execution symbol of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after being erased and the effect of the "super reach" is completed. As a result, when the notice target (change target. In the first embodiment, the execution symbol) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or when the notice target is newly displayed. Compared with the case of notifying, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target. By making the object to be announced invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the discomfort is recognized as being directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot). As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

In addition, by allocating a lot of execution timing of the "hold change notice" to the latter half of the fluctuation effect ("after reach" or "after the hold is deleted"), the expectation of a big hit increases even in the latter half of the change effect. It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting the occurrence (appearance) of the "pending change notice". Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game while expecting a big hit until the latter half of the variable effect, the player can be given a hobby for a long period of time.

Next, the loss scenario table 222f2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a loss scenario table 222f2. In the loss scenario table 222f2 of FIG. 18, as in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, each number of reserved balls (4 patterns of 1 to 4 reserved balls) of the fluctuation effect at the time when the vertical row determines the “hold change notice”. ), Each of the number of reserved balls is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns, which are divided according to the display mode of the "pending change notice" (3 patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). There is. In addition, as the timing for the row to execute (start) the "hold change notice", four patterns at the time of displaying or shifting to each hold ball number (hold ball number "1" to "4") and the hold ball There are a total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (at shift)", "before reach", "after reach", or "after hold deletion" when the number is "0" (during the variable effect execution). Each is divided. Then, the possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with each of the divided groups.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the loss scenario table 222f2, a situation pattern of the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” and each display mode of the “hold change notice” is prepared, and each is prepared. The value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the status pattern. The "rainbow" in the display mode of the "pending change notice" suggests the occurrence of a big hit when the display mode of the "rainbow" appears, and is not selected at the time of loss. Therefore, in the situation pattern of "rainbow" in the scenario table 222f2 for loss, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to any of the number of pending fluctuation effects at the time when the "pending change notice" is determined. Is omitted.

First, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “1” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated, the reserved symbols of "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this loss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls is "1" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "2" to "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 18).

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "10 to 10" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "19", "20-29" for "after reach" of "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for "after erasing hold" of "0" number of reserved balls, "1" for the number of reserved balls It is "30 to 99" for each piece.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after erasing the hold" is 0% and the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is displayed) is 70%.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the reserved symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the reserved symbol. The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (70%).

In the loss scenario table 222f2, the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing of "after the hold is deleted" for the number of held balls "0". This is because, in order to perform the "hold change notice" at the execution timing of "after erasing the hold", it is necessary to perform some effect such as a variable element of "re-variation" after the effect of "reach display" is executed. is there. In the first embodiment, after the "reach display" is performed, the effect of the variable elements of the "re-variation" is not performed except in the case of a big hit, and the "loss display" is fixed. Therefore, in the variable effect of loss, the variable element of "re-variation" in which the jackpot is fixed is not performed after the effect of "reach display", so that the execution symbol (pending symbol) is redisplayed after "reach display". If the "pending change notice" is executed at the timing of, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, in order to prevent such an event from occurring, the scenario counter 223d is set not to be allocated to the execution timing "after hold deletion".

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "starting" of "0" reserved balls and "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "20-39", "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for "after erasing hold" with "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for the number of reserved balls " It is "60 to 99" for 1 "piece.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 20% of "start", 20% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 20% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after erasing the hold" is 0% and the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is displayed) is 40%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “2” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated, the reserved symbols of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this loss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls is "2" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "3" or "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 18).

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "10 to 10" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "19", "20-29" for "after reach" of "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for "after erasing hold" of "0" number of reserved balls, "1" for the number of reserved balls It is "30 to 39" for the number of balls and "40 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "2".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio of "after erasing the hold" is 0%, the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of hold balls "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is displayed) is 60%. It is set to be.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (60%).

Next, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 18 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing and scenario of the "holding change notice" Correspondence with the value of the counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "20 to 39" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. , "40-59" for "after reach" of "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for "after erasing hold" of "0" number of reserved balls, "1" number of reserved balls It is "60 to 69", and it is "70 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "2".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 20% of "start", 20% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 20% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio of "after erasing the hold" is 0%, the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of hold balls "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is displayed) is 30%. It is set to be.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (30%).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “3” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated, the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this loss scenario table 222f2, at the time when the number of reserved balls is "3" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d is against the number of reserved balls "4" when the "hold change notice" is executed. The value of is not assigned (see FIG. 18).

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "10 to 10" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "19", "20-29" for "after reach" of "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for "after erasing hold" of "0" number of reserved balls, "1" for the number of reserved balls It is "30 to 39" for the number of balls, "40 to 49" for the number of reserved balls "2", and "50 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "3".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After erasing the hold" is 0%, the number of hold balls is "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of hold balls is "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is shift) is 10%, and the number of hold balls is The selection ratio of "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to 50%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (50%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "starting" of "0" reserved balls and "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "20-39", "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for "after erasing hold" with "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for the number of reserved balls " It is "60 to 69" for "1", "70 to 79" for "2" of reserved balls, and "80 to 99" for "3" of reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 20% of "start", 20% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 20% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After erasing the hold" is 0%, the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of hold balls "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the hold symbol " The selection ratio of "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to 20%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "red". The timing at the time of display and "at the start", "before reach" or "after reach" of the fluctuation effect are set so as to be easily selected (20% each).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “4” will be described.

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "10 to 10" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "19", "20-29" for "after reach" of "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for "after erasing hold" of "0" number of reserved balls, "1" for the number of reserved balls "30-39" for "30-39", "40-49" for "2" reserved balls, "50-59" for "3" reserved balls, "4" for reserved balls On the other hand, it is "60 to 99".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After erasing the hold" is 0%, the number of hold balls is "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of hold balls is "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is shift) is 10%, and the number of hold balls is The selection ratio is set so that "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10% and "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 40%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "starting" of "0" reserved balls and "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "20-39", "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for "after erasing hold" with "0" number of reserved balls, "-" for the number of reserved balls " "60-69" for "1", "70-79" for "2" reserved balls, "80-89" for "3" reserved balls, "4" for reserved balls It is "90 to 99" for each piece.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 20% of "start", 20% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 20% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After erasing the hold" is 0%, the number of hold balls "1" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of hold balls "2" (that is, when the hold symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the hold symbol " The selection ratio is set so that "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation effect is the change effect when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "4" and the display mode is "red". "At the start", "Before reach" or "After reach" is set so that it is easy to select (20% each).

In this way, even if the same "hold change notice (for example," blue ")" is used when the fluctuation effect is lost and when the jackpot is hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) is different, so that the "hold change notice" is given. The jackpot expectation level can be different depending on the display mode of "" and the timing at which the display mode appears. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the suggestion content of the jackpot expectation degree by the "hold change notice" depending on the display mode and the appearance timing of the "hold change notice", and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The hold information storage area 223e is information for performing look-ahead processing, that is, the first random number counters C1 and 1 that are acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning and transmitted by the hold ball number command. Each value of the hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, the hold change information indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice", the scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "hold change notice", and the change. This is an area for storing hold-erasing information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the effect and re-variation information indicating whether or not "re-variation" is performed in the variation effect.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform a look-ahead process (hold display setting process (hold display setting process (hold display setting process)). (See FIG. 30)) is executed. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold change information storage area 223e5, the scenario data storage area 223e6, and the hold change information storage area 223e5 of the hold information storage area 223e to store the hold change information, the scenario data, the hold erase information, and the revariation information obtained by the look-ahead processing. It is stored in the hold erase information storage area 223e7 and the revariation information storage area 223e8, respectively, and the "hold change notice" is executed based on the values stored in each area 223e5 to 223e8.

The execution information storage area 223f is the information for performing the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, that is, the first information acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 with the start winning and transmitted by the hold ball number command. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, the hold change information indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice", and the execution timing of the "hold change notice". To store scenario data indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variation effect, and re-variation information indicating whether or not "re-variation" is performed in the variation effect. Area.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, it is stored in the first hold information storage area of the above-mentioned hold information storage area 223e in order to execute the setting of the variation effect and the like. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the like) for performing the fluctuation effect is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f.

Here, the details of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. The hold information storage area 223e has four areas, the hold information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, the first hit random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are stored, respectively. The type counter storage area 223e2 per unit, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, the variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored, and "hold change". The hold change information storage area 223e5 that stores the hold change information indicating the display mode of the "notice", the scenario data storage area 223e6 that stores the scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "hold change notice", and the cockpit display in the variation effect. Hold erase information storage area 223e7 for storing hold erase information indicating whether or not the area Db is erased, and revariation information for storing revariation information indicating whether or not "revariation" is performed in the variation effect. A storage area 223e8 is provided at least.

The execution information storage area 223f contains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed, the hold change information indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice", and the execution timing of the "hold change notice". The scenario data indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variation effect, the hold erase information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variation effect, and the re-variation information indicating whether or not "re-variation" is performed in the variation effect are stored. Area for.

Further, in each of the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the up to four reserved fluctuation effects and the hold indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice" are shown. Change information, scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "hold change notice", hold deletion information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the variation effect, and whether "re-variation" is performed in the variation effect. This is an area for storing re-variation information indicating whether or not it is present.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223f is an area corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed, and the hold information storage first area is the first change held in time among the hold change effects. The area corresponding to the effect, the reserved information storage second area is the area corresponding to the second oldest reserved variable effect in terms of time among the reserved variable effects, and the reserved information storage third area is This is the area corresponding to the 3rd oldest reserved fluctuation effect among the reserved variation effects, and the 4th area for storing the hold information is the 4th oldest reserved variation effect in terms of time. It is an area that corresponds to the variable production.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1. Extract from the ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command in the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively. It is stored in the random number counter storage area 223e1, the first hit type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the variation type counter storage area 223e4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the number of variable effects held at that time is X, and the reserved ball number command is used. Since the values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the fluctuation effect held at the Xth position in time among the reserved fluctuation effects, each counter storage area in the hold information storage X area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to 223e1 to 223e4 are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the hold X area of the hold ball storage area 203b. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold X area of the main control device 110 are stored in the hold information storage X area.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a look-ahead process (hold display setting process (see FIG. 30)) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223e1 to 223e4 in the hold information storage X area, and this look-ahead process is performed. The hold change information, scenario data, hold erase information, and revariation information generated based on the processing result are stored in the respective storage areas 223e5 to 223e8 of the same hold information storage X area, respectively. That is, in each hold information storage X area, whether or not the "hold change notice" is executed in each change effect, the execution timing when the "hold change notice" is executed, and the cockpit display area Db in each change effect are set. It is memorized whether or not the effect to be erased is included, and whether or not "re-variation" is performed in each variation effect.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the shift process in the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. That is, the reserved variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variation effect in time is started. Therefore, the reserved information storage first area corresponding to the first reserved variation effect is started. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed. Let me.

Further, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage second area are transferred to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage first area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage third area are moved and stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage second area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage fourth area are moved to each storage area 223e1 to the hold information storage third area. Move to 223e8.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f. Further, in the hold information storage first to fourth areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 are stored, respectively. Will be done. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the hold information storage area 223e. To.

The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) held from the sub-held ball number counter 223b when performing the look-ahead processing (hold display setting process (see FIG. 30)). Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas where the fluctuation effect is reserved among the hold information storage first to fourth areas are pre-read, and in the fluctuation effect. Whether or not it will be a big hit, the fluctuation time, etc. are judged. For example, if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is "1", the number of holding balls for the fluctuation effect is one, so that the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage first area The value is read ahead and the judgment is made. Further, if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is "4", the number of holding balls for the fluctuation effect is four times. Therefore, for the holding information storage fourth area, each of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 The value is read ahead and the judgment is made.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 accesses RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a hold information storage area 223e, and stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect held by the main control device 110 in the voice lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, the pre-reading process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e. That is, when the reserved variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect. The voice lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of various effects and control the execution mode and execution timing of the "pending change notice".

The shift process described above in the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f is updated based on the number of balls held when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received (the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received. Data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the reserved fluctuation effects among the reserved information storage first to fourth areas (values of the sub-held ball count counter 223b) before the command.

For example, the value of the sub-holding ball count counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "4", and the entire area of the hold information storage area 223e (hold information storage first to fourth areas). ) Suppose that the data is stored. In this case, the data in the hold information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, the data in the hold information storage second area is shifted to the hold information storage first area, and the data in the hold information storage third area is held. The information storage second area is shifted, and the data in the hold information storage fourth area is shifted to the hold information storage third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-holding ball count counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the hold information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f. , The data in the hold information storage second area is shifted to the hold information storage first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the hold information storage third and fourth areas where the fluctuation effect is not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved information storage first to fourth areas is shifted to an area in which the area number is one smaller (execution information storage area 223f or hold information storage first to third areas). It may be configured as follows. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in each of the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, so that the program can be easily created.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect or continuous in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the advance notice production. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. There is.

A voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command indicating the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device 113. Receive from. An MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, and an image controller 237 are also connected to the input port 238 via a bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231.

The character ROM 234 includes a character storage area 234a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 234a, the above image data is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the first embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 234a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frames of frame buffer area for storing an image of one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list and writes it to one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and also writes the image data for one frame written to the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) defined in the drawing list from the character storage area 234a in the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and then draws the image data. Processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written to one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236 at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

Writing one frame of image data to one frame buffer area and reading one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. Then, when the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame written earlier from the one frame buffer area is subsequently read, and during that time, the other frame buffer area is read. Image data for the next frame is written to the frame buffer area of.

In this way, by alternately writing the image data and reading the image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 20 to 26. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 25) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 26) that is executed after the start-up process, and a periodic (first execution). In the embodiment, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is activated (at a cycle of 4 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and the main process will be described.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, commands and the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, and the like are generated based on various processes and temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 21) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 22) and the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 23), which is one of the fluctuation processing, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball launch signal set when launching a ball in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 Variable display is performed at. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch 208 is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“250” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value random number is cleared. The updated value of the counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. When (in the first embodiment, "899", "99", "99", "198", and "250", respectively) are reached, they are cleared to "0", respectively. When the first per random number counter C1 or the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first per random number counter C1 or It is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for performing dynamic display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first input is performed. The start winning process accompanying the winning of the ball mouth 64 is executed (S110). The details of the variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

After executing the start winning process (S110), the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether or not a ball has entered the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Execute (hold) processing. In addition, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S110), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) into the first entry port 64, which is read in the switch reading process (S106 of FIG. 20). The ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes.

When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (there was a start winning prize) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of balls N) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the number of pending balls N <4 (S202: No). , Return to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entry slot 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (number of reserved balls N) is set. 1 is added (S203). Then, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the reserved first to fourth areas, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the hold ball counter 203a. It is held (stored) in 203b3 and the variation type counter storage area 203b4, respectively (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved first area. Further, if the value of the reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "2", it is in each storage area of the reserved second area, and if the value of the reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "3", it is in the reserved third area. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each storage area of the above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the holding fourth area.

Next, the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (number of reserved balls N) after the addition by the processing of S203, and the first random number counter C1 stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S204, the first hit. A command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203 for transmitting a hold ball number command including each value of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. When the process of S205 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the processing of S205, the values themselves read from the counter buffer in the processing of S204 may be used, or the holding ball storage area may be used in the processing of S204. The value stored (held) in 203b may be read out and used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). The variation processing (S109) controls the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation processing (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed. If it is not (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. it can.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (dynamic display (variation) held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N) in the production) is larger than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number N) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, and first, the value of the hold ball counter 203a is determined. (Number of reserved balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variable start processing (S307) starts the execution of one of the reserved variable effects, so that the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203b toward the hold ball execution area 203c, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold ball execution area 203c from the hold first area to the hold ball execution. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 203c, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S306, the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the hold ball execution area 203c by the data shift processing. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number N) is "0" (S304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, whether or not it is being demoed (S308). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is larger than "0". It is determined that the period until is being demoed.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S101 of FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S309 when the second predetermined time elapses after the execution and the fluctuation stop. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can be shown the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S310). The display time during dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time is determined. If it has not elapsed (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

In the first embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the dynamic display until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is displayed. Turn off the LED and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. A display mode is set in which the LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The variation processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches "100". , Change the lighting color of the LED. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to "0" when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. 23. In the fluctuation start processing, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the processing of S306, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter C2 Depending on the value of, the symbol that becomes "15R probability variation jackpot" after the jackpot, the symbol that becomes "2R probability variation jackpot", or the symbol that becomes "15R normal jackpot" is determined.

In the first embodiment, the blue LED is lit when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is reached after the jackpot, the red LED is lit when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is reached, and the "15R normal jackpot" is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are lit. If there is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The lighting of each LED is released when the next dynamic display is started, but the LED may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation, the confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a definite manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a variation start process (S307), which is one process of the variation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S307). This fluctuation start processing (S307) performs a big hit or loss lottery (big hit lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, and also performs the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. The dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variation effect performed in 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing (S307), first, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B). A jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state (“normal game state” or “time reduction state”), “7,307”. , 582 ”is defined as a jackpot random number value. Further, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298, "322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892" is defined as the jackpot random number value.

In the processing of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. , Determined to be a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8B). Based on (see), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds after the jackpot "probability fluctuation". "15R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to "state", "15R normal jackpot" that shifts to "time reduction state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds, or "probability fluctuation state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds It is determined whether or not the "2R probability variation jackpot" shifts to "". Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (“15R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “15R normal jackpot”) is used as the stop type as it is. By setting, the display mode at the time of a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the effect mode is selected based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time. Then, the variation time of the variation effect is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 11A or 11B) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

When "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the selected stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3). The effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, in this case, one of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode is selected (see FIG. 11A).

When the "normal reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "E5: normal reach" group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12). Select the variation pattern associated with the value of. That is, in this case, "normal reach only", "pseudo-gase + normal reach", "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach", "normal reach + re-variation", "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation" or "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation" Any of the fluctuation patterns of is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

When the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "E6: super reach" group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12). The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "super reach only", "pseudo-gase + super reach", "pseudo-ren 1 + super reach", "pseudo-ren 2 + super reach", "super reach + revariation", "pseudo-gase + super reach +" Either "re-variation", "pseudo-ream 1 + super reach + re-variation" or "pseudo-ream 2 + super reach + re-variation" is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

When the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "E7: special reach" group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12). The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "special reach only", "pseudo-gase + special reach", "pseudo-ren 1 + special reach", "pseudo-ren 2 + special reach", "special reach + revariation", "pseudo-gase + special reach +" Either "re-variation", "pseudo-ream 1 + special reach + re-variation" or "pseudo-ream 2 + special reach + re-variation" is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

Further, when "2R probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, in the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4), the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c Select the effect mode associated with the value. That is, when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, the "special variation" is selected without exception. Then, with reference to the selected effect mode and the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. In the first embodiment, in this case, only the "movie" is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the hold ball number counter 203a stored in the hold ball execution area 203c are set. As the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of and the current gaming state, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, and a "normal reach" effect mode , "Super reach" production mode or "special reach" production mode is set. In the first embodiment, as described above, each effect depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “probability fluctuation state”, the “time shortening state”, or the “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the embodiment is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "normal gaming state", the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a ( Either FIG. 10 (a) or FIG. 10 (b)) is selected. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "time reduction state" or the "probability fluctuation state", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time. Alternatively, either B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10 (a) or FIG. 10 (b)) is selected.

Then, when the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S404, the reserved ball execution area 203c is set in the “E0: non-reach (shortened)” group of the loss variation pattern table 202e2. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, "only non-reach (shortening)" is selected, and no other variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S404, the reserved ball execution area 203c is set in the “E1: non-reach (normal)” group of the loss variation pattern table 202e2. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, "non-reach (normal) only", "pseudo-gase + non-reach (normal)" or "pseudo-ream 1 + non-reach (normal)" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "normal reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S402, the variation type counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "E2: normal reach" group of the loss pattern table 202e2. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of CS1. That is, in this case, "normal reach only", "pseudo-gase + normal reach", or "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S402, the variation stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "E3: super reach" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e2. The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "super reach only", "pseudo-gase + super reach", "pseudo-ream 1 + super reach" or "pseudo-ream 2 + super reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S402, the variation stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "E4: special reach" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e2. The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "special reach only", "pseudo-gase + special reach", "pseudo-ream 1 + special reach" or "pseudo-ream 2 + special reach" are selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

In this way, the effect mode and fluctuation pattern setting process at the time of big hit and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Therefore, the program can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

In the process of S406, the variation that notifies the display control device 114 of the variation time according to the variation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405. Set the pattern command (S406). Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won and a 30-second fluctuation pattern of "super reach only" is selected, "E601H" is set as the fluctuation pattern command. Further, if the jackpot is lost and the 30-second fluctuation pattern of "super reach only" is selected, "E301H" is set as the fluctuation pattern command. In this way, even if the variation effect has the same variation time, by setting the variation pattern command together with the propriety of the variation effect and the content of the rough variation pattern, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the effect mode including the result. It is possible to grasp the content and the fluctuation time of the above, and to determine the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect in detail based on the information.

Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S407), and the variation processing (see FIG. 22) is performed. Return. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R probability variation jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.) is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "15R probability variation jackpot". If the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R normal jackpot", the "15R normal jackpot" is not specified and the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" symbol, etc.) is not specified. Set the stop type command that indicates that. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787") is not specified, and the "super reach" effect mode is not specified. A stop type command is set to indicate that the "super reach" effect mode (so-called front-back loss). Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the "normal reach" at the time of loss is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737"). A stop type command is set to indicate that the mode is an effect mode (so-called loss other than front and back). Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258") is not specified, and the "non-reach" effect mode is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" effect mode (so-called complete loss). In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure and makes them. It is possible to determine the stop result of the variation effect in detail based on the information of.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command or a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command, and transmits the display type command to the display control device 114.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S501) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the first embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process shifts to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S611 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S611 even in such a case.

As will be described in S706 of FIG. 26, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S612, S613) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S612, S613) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S612, S613) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to “0” (S612), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S60: No). S607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S610, interrupts are permitted (S610). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 26) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power off process are roughly classified.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S702 and S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899”, “250” in the first embodiment). , Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 20) (S703), and the process shifts to the process of S701.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 20 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (4 milliseconds in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, execution is performed to control the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a, and if the ball passes through the second entry opening 67, the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is performed. Will be done. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the jackpot random number value to be compared with the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is determined depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. The numbers will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. .. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C2 that use these as the initial value of the update are updated. Can be given randomness.

Further, in the process of S701, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 24 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S705). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S706), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S701 is executed at a timing at the end of one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and at the timing when the updates of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are completed, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cut-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process (see FIG. 25) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S601) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S701 can be started. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the first embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although the case has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening / closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch, which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment. A part or all of the reading process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main process, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each of them is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 32, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process (see FIG. 27) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 28) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1115 (see FIG. 28) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1112 in FIG. 28), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1115. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1115 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1115 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1115 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the data shifts to S808.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1115, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1115 is executed (see S1114 of FIG. 28). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1115 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1115 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1101: No). , The process shifts to the process of S1109 without performing the process of S1102 to S1108. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process S1102 to S1108 in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) to determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas the variation effect processing of S1109 This is because the command determination process of or S1110 is preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S1109 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 27, the process proceeds to the process of S1102 as it is.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1106 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without being notified by the power on notification process.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1105). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the "high-speed fluctuation" period, the stage is changed and the back surface of the display control device 114 is replaced with the frame button operation command. Set the image change command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation effect, the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation for the jackpot can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display". The effect may be changed to give a feeling, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1105 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1105) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1106), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1107, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1108), and the process proceeds to the process of S1109. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1106 is executed based on the time set by the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1107 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time.

In the process of S1109, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect process is a process for starting the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. To execute. Details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. Then, after the variation effect processing, a command determination process for performing processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1110), and the process proceeds to the process of S1111. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In S1111, a counter update process for updating the hold change counter 223c and the scenario counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1111). Specifically, the pending change counter 223c and the scenario counter 223d are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (both in the first embodiment, "99".
"), Clear each" 0 ". As described above, the counters 223c and 223d updated in this way are used for the execution of the "hold change notice" and the selection of the display mode, and the scenario counter 223d is the "hold change notice". It is used to select the execution timing of.

When the processing of S1111 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1112). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1112 (S1112: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1114), and the power-off process is executed (S1115). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1116), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1112 (S1112: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1113), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1113: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1113: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1110). This command determination process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1110), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is read from the main control unit 110. Is determined (S1201). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1201: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1202). The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on the variation pattern, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern is set (S1203). , Return to the main process (see FIG. 28).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1102 in FIG. 28) of the main process. .. As a result, the display control device 114 executes the process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation effect of the variation pattern determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1203: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205). The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on the stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect is set (S1206), and the variation start. The flag 223a is set to on (S1207), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1102 in FIG. 28) of the main process. .. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect executed by the display variation pattern command set by the process of S1206 is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is set. To do.

The stop type command indicates the stop type of the variation effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command when the variation effect is started. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the variation start flag 223a to ON by the process of S1206, the variation of the variation effect extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the hold ball number command in the variation effect process executed later. It is determined whether or not the pattern matches the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. In addition, whether or not the stop type of the variation effect extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the hold ball number command matches the stop type of the variation effect extracted from the received stop type command. Is judged. As a result of these judgments, when the fluctuation pattern based on the hold ball number command and the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command do not match in the fluctuation effect of 1, or the stop type and stop type command based on the hold ball number command If the stop type based on is not the same, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, a display error command indicating the abnormality is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (See FIG. 31).

When it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1204 (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1208). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1208: Yes), the hold display setting process is performed (S1209), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). In this hold display setting process (S1209), control regarding "hold change notice" is performed based on various information included in the received hold ball number command (for example, the value of the random number counter C1 per first). Details of this hold display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1208 (S1208: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1210). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1210: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1211), and the main process (FIG. 28).

The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1002 in FIG. 28). .. By receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and corresponds to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command. By displaying the stop symbol, it is confirmed and displayed.

If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1210 (S1210: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1212), the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 28). For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114. The demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1212, is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then is the command output process of the main process (FIG. FIG. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by (see S1002 of 28).

Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the hold display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process (S1209). In this hold display setting process (S1209), first, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the received hold ball number command (that is, the hold ball number of the held fluctuation effect) is extracted. This is stored in the sub-holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1301).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), the process of S1301 is performed every time there is a starting winning. , The value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning prize The value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b can be modified to match the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Next, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received hold ball count command is extracted, and the hold information of the hold information storage area 223e is extracted. Among the first to fourth storage areas (see FIG. 19), the storage is stored in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls extracted from the reserved ball number command by the process of S1301 (S1302). That is, when the number of reserved balls is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), each value of the extracted first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1. Are stored in the first hit random number counter storage area 223e1, the first hit type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the variation type counter storage area 223e4, respectively, in the hold information storage X area.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize). When the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X, it is a value stored in the reserved X area of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110. That is, the same information (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as the hold ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 is stored in the hold information storage area 223e of the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e. That is, when the reserved variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect. The voice lamp control device 113 is controlled to determine the execution of various effects, determine whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" and the display mode, and determine the execution (start) timing of the "hold change notice". Can be executed.

Next, in the process of S1303, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the hold ball number command received this time (S1303). As described above, the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" is based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the hold information storage X area, and the number of hold balls. The propriety of the variation effect indicated by the command and the effect mode are extracted. Then, based on the extracted pass / fail and the effect mode, the value of the hold change counter 223c at that time and the hold change table 222e (see FIG. 16) are referred to, and whether or not the “hold change notice” can be executed and displayed. Determine the aspect.

As a result of the processing of S1303, if the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), the hold indicating the display mode (for example, "blue") which is the execution lottery result of the "hold change notice" is held. The change information is stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 of the hold information storage X area (S1304). As a result, it is possible to store whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" for each hold information storage X area.

Next, in the process of S1304, in order to determine the execution timing of the "hold change notice", that is, the display timing in which the "hold change notice" is reflected in the execution symbol or the hold symbol, the value of the scenario counter 223d at that time is determined. And the scenario table 222f, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is determined, and the scenario data indicating the determined execution timing is stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the hold information storage X area ( S1305). As a result, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" can be stored for each hold information storage X area.

Next, in the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect indicated by the reserved ball number command received this time includes a fluctuation element of "super reach or more" (S1306). As described above, in the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach", or the variable element of "special variation", the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the execution of the variable element. The symbol and the reserved symbol are deleted. Therefore, in the case of a fluctuation effect including a fluctuation element of "super reach", a fluctuation element of "special reach", or a fluctuation element of "special fluctuation", "after pending deletion" is included as the execution timing of "hold change notice". It is feasible even if it is. Therefore, whether or not the fluctuation effect includes a fluctuation element of "super reach or more" based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 in the hold information storage X area. To determine.

As a result of the processing of S1306, if it is a variation effect including a variation element of "super reach or more" (S1306: Yes), the pending deletion indicates that the execution symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are deleted by the variation effect. The information is stored in the hold erase information storage area 223e7 of the hold information storage X area (S1307), and the process shifts to S1309. On the other hand, if the variation effect does not include the variation element of "super reach or higher" (S1306: No), the execution symbol and the hold symbol in the cockpit display area Db are not erased in the variation effect, so that the hold information storage area X Data indicating that no information is stored (blank) is stored in the hold erase information storage area 223e7 (hereinafter referred to as "Null data") (S1308), and the process is shifted to S1309. In the process of S1308, by writing the Null data to the hold erasure information storage area 223e7, for example, it is possible to prevent the duplicate use of the hold erasure information related to the "hold change notice" stored in the hold information storage X area before writing. be able to.

In the process of S1309, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect indicated by the hold ball number command received this time includes the fluctuation element of "re-variation" (S1309). Even if the cockpit display area Db is erased due to a variable element of "super reach" when "after pending deletion" is selected as the execution timing of the "pending change notice", the "super" is used. If there is no effect after the variable element of "reach", there is no point in giving "hold change notice" after "hold deletion".

Specifically, for example, even if the variable element of "super reach" is executed and the "big hit display" is confirmed and then the "pending change notice" of the execution symbol is executed, the player is given any interest. It is not possible to do it, but rather it is awakened by a meaningless production. Also, for example, even if the "Holding change notice" of the execution symbol is executed after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed and the "Loss display" is confirmed, the "Loss display" is confirmed as it is, and the next variation effect is produced. If is started, the player will be distrustful of the game due to the discrepancy in the production. Therefore, it is determined whether or not there is a variable element of "re-variation" which is a variable element executed after the variable element of "super reach", and "hold change notice" is executed "after hold deletion". Check if it is possible.

As a result of the processing of S1309, if it is a variation effect including "re-variation" (S1309: Yes), the re-variation information indicating that the variation element of "re-variation" is performed in the variation effect is stored in the hold information storage X. The area is stored in the re-variation information storage area 223e8 (S1310), and the process shifts to S1313. On the other hand, if it is a variation effect that does not include the variation element of "re-variation" (S1309: No), the Null data is stored in the re-variation information storage area 223e8 of the reserved information X area (S1311), and the process is sent to S1313. Transition. By the processing of S1307 and S1310, it can be recognized that the "holding change notice" can be executed at the execution timing of "after holding and erasing". Further, in the process of S1311, by writing the Null data to the revariation information storage area 223e8, for example, it is possible to prevent the duplicate use of the revariation information stored in the hold information storage X area before the writing.

In the process of S1303, if the execution lottery of the "pending change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "holding change notice" is not executed. Null data is stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5, the scenario data storage area 223e6, the hold erase information storage area 223e7, and the revariation information storage area 223e8 in the information storage X area (S1312), and the process shifts to S1313. In the process of S1312, by writing the Null data to each storage area 223e5 to 223e8, for example, it is possible to prevent the duplicate use of the information related to the "hold change notice" stored in the hold information storage X area before writing. It is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production (for example, a "rainbow" in the "pending change notice" despite the variable production of the "missing display").

In the process of S1313, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b updated by the process of S1301 is set (S1313), and the process shifts to S1314. In the process of S1314, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is the display time of the hold symbol (acquired hold change timing) in the fluctuation effect indicated by the hold ball number command received this time (S1314). In this determination, when the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the hold information storage area X is the same as the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is the hold symbol. Is determined to be displayed.

As a result of the determination in S1314, if the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is when the hold symbol is displayed (S1314: Yes), the determined display mode of the "hold change notice" is performed at the timing when the hold symbol is displayed. A display hold change command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is set (S1315), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is not when the hold symbol is displayed (S1314: No), the process of S1315 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

The display hold ball number command and the display hold change command set in S1313 and S1315 are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (S1102 in FIG. 28). Is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display hold ball number command executes a process so that the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the hold ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the display control device 114 that has received the display hold change command at the time of lighting performs display control so as to display the hold symbol in the determined "hold change notice" display mode when displaying the hold symbol. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variation effect processing (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this variation effect processing (S1109).

This variation effect process (S1109) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and first, in order to confirm whether or not the variation effect is normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the hold information storage area Various information stored in the hold information storage first area of 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and the information stored in the hold information storage areas 2 to 4 is shifted to the hold information storage first to third areas. Perform the processing to be performed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, a display error command is generated and this command is displayed and controlled. Performs the process of setting for transmission to the device 114. Further, when it is the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in the execution symbol and the hold symbol, various commands related to each execution timing of the "hold change notice" are generated, and these commands are transmitted to the display control device 114. Perform the process to set to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 performs display processing related to the variation effect based on the commands. It is configured to wait for a predetermined time (for example, 1 millisecond) whether or not a command indicating a change in the variation effect such as the above-mentioned display error command is transmitted without starting immediately. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the audio lamp control device 113 and immediately executes the display process related to the variation effect based on the command, the display control device 113 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. If a display error command is subsequently transmitted from, the display process related to the above variation effect must be stopped and replaced with a display corresponding to the error based on the display error command (for example, default variation). Therefore, even when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 does not immediately execute the display process related to the variation effect based on the command, and displays from the voice lamp control device 113. Waits for the execution of the display process related to the variation effect based on the command for a predetermined time when the error command may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the display control device 114 can prevent a processing load due to executing unnecessary processing in the display processing related to the variation effect.

In the first embodiment, 1 millisecond is exemplified as a predetermined time in which the display control device 114 may transmit a display error command from the voice lamp control device 113, but this standby time is the display control device 114. Anything may be used as long as the display processing in is not delayed. Specifically, for example, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display processing and drawing processing for one frame every 20 milliseconds, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to perform the above-mentioned. After executing the command determination process (see FIG. 29), the variation effect process (see FIG. 31) is configured to be executed within a few milliseconds. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 generates and transmits a display error command in the variation effect processing after transmitting the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command. It is possible to surely generate and send a display error command within a time of at least several milliseconds. Therefore, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to receive the display error command if there is a display error command by waiting for at least several milliseconds after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. There is. Therefore, by waiting for a time shorter than the time required for the display processing and drawing processing for one frame (20 milliseconds), it is possible to execute the display processing related to the variation effect without delay. Therefore, the third symbol display device. It is possible to prevent an event in which the display processing of the variation effect to 81 is clearly delayed.

In the variation effect processing (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. Therefore, this fluctuation effect processing Is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off in order to start the fluctuation effect. (S1402) Then, the data included in the hold information storage first area provided in the hold information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f (S1403), and further, the hold provided in the hold information storage area 223e. The data included in the information storage second to fourth areas is shifted to the reserved information storage first to third areas (S1404), and the processing is shifted to S1405.

That is, in this case, the reserved variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variation effect in time is started. Therefore, the hold information No. 1 corresponding to the first reserved variation effect is started. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of one area are stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the fluctuation effect during execution. Move to. Further, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage second area are transferred to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage first area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage third area are moved and stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage second area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the hold information storage fourth area are moved to each storage area 223e1 to the hold information storage third area. Move to 223e8.

As a result, in the execution information storage area 223f, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored, and the hold information storage first to first. In each of the four areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 are stored.

Next, in the process of S1405, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f (S1405). Then, the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) match. It is determined whether or not the command is used (S1406). If the information related to the fluctuation effect indicated by the variation pattern command received this time and the information related to the variation effect stored in the execution information storage area 223f (hold information storage area 223e) before that are different, some abnormality (noise, etc.) ), It is not possible to execute a normal fluctuation effect (fluctuation pattern). Therefore, by this discrimination process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is discriminated, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal fluctuation effect can be executed.

If, as a result of the determination in S1406, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 223 do not match (S1406: No), there is some abnormality in the fluctuation effect to be executed. Is generated, a display error command for notifying the display control device 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1407), and the process shifts to S1408.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 28) of the main process. .. By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some abnormality has occurred in the fluctuation effect, and switches the third symbol display device 81 to the display corresponding to the error (for example, the default fluctuation). , Start the display control of the error display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 223 match (S1406: Yes), there is an abnormality regarding the fluctuation effect to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1407 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1408.

Next, in the process of S1408, the stop type of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f (S1408). Then, the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) match. It is determined whether or not the command is performed (S1409). If the information related to the fluctuation effect indicated by the stop type command received this time and the information related to the fluctuation effect stored in the execution information storage area 223f (hold information storage area 223e) before that are different, some abnormality (noise, etc.) ), It is not possible to execute a normal fluctuation effect (stop type). Therefore, by this discrimination process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is discriminated, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal fluctuation effect can be executed.

If, as a result of the determination in S1409, it is determined that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the stop type stored in the RAM 223 do not match (S1409: No), there is some abnormality in the variation effect to be executed. Is generated, a display error command for notifying the display control device 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1410), and the process shifts to S1411.

In the first embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command do not match, a display error command is generated and transmitted, and execution information is executed. When the stop type based on the value stored in the storage area 223f and the stop type indicated by the stop type command do not match, a display error command is generated and transmitted, and a maximum of 2 display error commands are transmitted. It is configured in. Instead of this, if the fluctuation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command do not match, or stop based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f. When the type and the stop type indicated by the stop type command do not match, or when either one of them does not match, the display error command of 1 may be transmitted. With this configuration, the number of commands transmitted can be reduced, so that the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 28) of the main process. .. By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some abnormality has occurred in the fluctuation effect, switches the third symbol display device 81 to an error display (for example, default fluctuation), and causes the error. Start display control of the display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, if it is determined that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the stop type stored in the RAM 223 match (S1409: Yes), there is an abnormality regarding the variation effect to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1411.

The display control device 114 is configured to wait for a predetermined time to determine whether or not a display error command is received after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, and then start the variation effect. May be good. With this configuration, error display can be performed immediately without preparing for display control (character symbol expansion processing, etc.) related to the variation effect, so that the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Next, in the process of S1411, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is consumed according to the start of the variation effect (that is, the variation effect corresponding to the hold ball is set). Is reduced by 1 (S1411), a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the hold ball number indicated by the value of the updated sub hold ball number counter 223b is set (S1412), and processing is performed. To S1413.

Next, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the execution timing is such that the "pending change notice" appears in the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (S1413). This determination confirms the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the execution information storage area 223f, and the scenario data has "0" reserved balls, "at the start", and "before reach". , "After reach" or "After erasure on hold" (hereinafter, abbreviated as "at the start" to "after erasure on hold").

As a result of the determination in S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is the number of reserved balls "0" and indicates any of "at the start" to "after the hold is deleted". If it is data (S1413: Yes), the execution symbol change processing is performed (S1414) in order to execute the "pending change notice" in the execution symbol, and the processing is shifted to S1415.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, the number of scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "0", and any of "at the start" to "after the hold is deleted" is selected. If it is not the data shown (S1413: No), the process of S1414 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1415. The execution symbol change processing of S1414 will be described later in FIG. 32.

Next, in the process of S1415, it is determined whether or not the execution timing is such that the "hold change notice" appears in the hold symbols displayed in the first to third hold symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 (S1415). This determination determines each scenario data stored in the scenario data storage areas 223e6 provided in the hold information storage first to third areas of the hold information storage area 223e. That is, whether or not each scenario data in each scenario data storage area 223e6 is the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in the hold symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 after the shift (for example, shift to the hold information storage first area and store it). Whether or not the scenario data stored in the saved scenario data storage area 223e6 is data indicating the number of reserved balls "1") is determined.

As a result of the processing of S1415, if the hold information storage areas 1 to 3 for storing the scenario data corresponding to the execution timing exist (S1415: Yes), the display stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 in the corresponding hold symbol. In order to execute the "hold change notice" in the mode, a display shift hold change command including the information of the corresponding hold symbol is set toward the display control device 114 (S1416), and the main process (see FIG. 28). Return to.

Specifically, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the hold information storage first area is data indicating the number of holds "1", the hold change information storage area 223e5 of the hold information storage first area Generates and sets a display shift hold change command that notifies that the "hold change notice" is to be executed in the display mode stored in. Further, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the hold information storage second area is data indicating the number of holds "2", it is stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 of the hold information storage second area. Generates and sets a display shift hold change command that notifies that the "hold change notice" is to be executed in the display mode. Further, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the hold information storage third area is data indicating the number of holds "3", it is stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 of the hold information storage third area. Generates and sets a display shift hold change command that notifies that the "hold change notice" is to be executed in the display mode.

The display shift hold change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be sent. The display control device 114 that has received the display shift hold change command performs display control so that when the hold symbol is shift-displayed, the corresponding hold symbol is displayed in the determined "hold change notice" display mode. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1415, if the scenario data corresponding to the execution timing is not stored in the scenario data storage areas 223e6 of the hold information storage first to third areas of the hold information storage area 223e (S1415: No), The process of S1416 is skipped and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

In this way, at the time of shift display of the execution symbol and the hold symbol accompanying the start of execution of the variation effect, the scenario data stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the hold information storage area 223e are confirmed, respectively, and the "hold change notice" is displayed. When the scenario data corresponding to the execution timing exists, it is possible to display the "hold change notice" when the hold symbol and the shift display of the execution symbol are displayed. As a result, the timing at which the "pending change notice" appears can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the execution symbol change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this execution symbol change processing (S1414).

This execution symbol change processing (S1414) is executed in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 31) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28), and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. It is performed to execute the "pending change notice" in the execution symbol. In this execution symbol change processing, first, the change timing of the execution symbol, that is, the execution timing at which the "pending change notice" appears in the execution symbol is determined (S1501). This determination is made by checking the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f.

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is the number of reserved balls "0" and indicates "at the start" (S1501: "Start". Time ”), at the timing of displaying (shifting) the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0, to the display control device 114 in order to execute the“ hold change notice ”in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5. The display start change command is set (S1502), the execution symbol change process is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 31).

The display start change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be done. When the display control device 114 that has received the display start change command shifts and displays the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0, the display control device 114 displays so that the execution symbol is displayed in the determined display mode of the "pending change notice". Take control.

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is the number of reserved balls "0" and indicates "before reach" (S1501: "reach"). "Before"), at the timing before the "reach display" of the fluctuation effect appears (for example, when the left symbol column Z1 is stopped in the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" or in the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation"). , In order to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a display pre-reach change command is set toward the display control device 114 (S1503). , Return to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 31).

The display pre-reach change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be done. The display control device 114 that has received the display pre-reach change command has a timing (for example, "high-speed fluctuation") before the "reach display" of the variation effect appears with respect to the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. In the variable element of "" or in the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", the execution symbol is changed to the determined display mode of "pending change notice" (for example, "normal (white)". ) ”To“ blue ”).

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is the number of reserved balls "0" and indicates "after reach" (S1501: "reach"). After "), in order to confirm whether or not the" pending change notice "can be executed at the timing after the" reach display "of the variation effect appears (for example, during the execution of the variation element of" normal reach "), the variation effect In (S1504), it is determined whether or not the "reach display" appears. This determination is performed by discriminating the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29).

If, as a result of the determination of S1504, it is determined that the "reach display" appears in the variation effect (S1504: Yes), the timing after the initially set "reach display" of the variation effect appears (for example, "" It is possible to execute the "pending change notice" during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach". Therefore, in order to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a post-reach change command for display is set toward the display control device 114 (S1505). ), Return to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 31).

The post-reach change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be done. The display control device 114 that has received the post-reach change command for display receives the timing (currently appearing) after the "reach display" of the variation effect appears (during appearance) with respect to the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. For example, when the variable element of "normal reach" is being executed, the display control is changed so that the execution symbol is changed (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") to the determined display mode of "pending change notice". Do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1504, when it is determined that the "reach display" does not appear in the variation effect (S1504: No), the "hold change notice" is set to "pending change notice" because the "reach display" does not exist in the variation effect. Cannot be executed "after reach". Therefore, in order to change the "pending change notice" set to "after reach" to "before reach", which is an executable timing, the process is shifted to S1503 for display toward the display control device 114. The pre-reach change command is set (S1503), and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 31).

With this configuration, even if the initially set "after reach" "hold change notice" cannot be executed, the execution timing can be changed to "before reach" and the "hold change notice" can be executed. Can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the "hold change notice" is not executed even though the lottery is won, the execution rate of the "hold change notice" can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even when the lottery process of the "pending change notice" and the lottery process of the variable effect are performed by different systems, it is possible to adjust so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the effect. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a program of a separate system, it is possible to facilitate the design of each program and to execute a consistent production.

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is the number of reserved balls "0" and indicates "after pending deletion" (S1501: " After erasing the hold "), this determination determines the revariation information stored in the revariation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f based on the processing of S1309 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30). Do.

As a result of the determination in S1506, if the revariation information is stored in the revariation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: Yes), the variation in which "revariation" is executed after "reach display". Since it is an effect, next, at the timing after the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variation effect (for example, after the execution of the variation element of "super reach" or after the execution of the variation element of "special reach"), "hold". In order to confirm whether or not the "change notice" can be executed, it is determined whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased by executing the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" in the variable effect ( S1507). In this determination, in the process of S1307 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30), the hold erase information stored in the hold erase information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f is determined.

As a result of the determination in S1507, if the hold erase information is stored in the hold erase information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: Yes), the "hold change notice" can be executed "after hold deletion". Therefore, in order to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a display change post-erasure command is set toward the display control device 114 ( S1508), the process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 31).

The display change post-erasure command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be done. The display control device 114 that has received the change command after erasing for display has a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" of the variation effect with respect to the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. After the end, at the timing before the execution of the variable element of "re-variation", the execution symbol is changed to the determined display mode of "pending change notice" (for example, "normal (white)" to "blue". ) Is displayed.

With this configuration, when the "hold change notice" is performed in the hold symbol and the execution symbol indicating the fluctuation effect that generates the jackpot, the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is caused by the fluctuation element of the "super reach" and the like. The "pending change notice" appears at the timing when the execution symbol displayed in is erased, the variable element of the "super reach" ends, and the execution symbol of the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. (Executable) Configure to be possible. As a result, when the notice target (change target. In the first embodiment, the execution symbol) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or when the notice target is newly displayed. Compared with the case of notifying, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target. By making the object to be announced invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the discomfort is recognized as being directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot). As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Further, the display of the cockpit display area Db and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db are always displayed except during the execution of the variation element of "super reach or higher", and the player is in the current variation. It notifies the execution suggestion of the effect and the presence or absence of the variable effect on standby. Further, even if the cockpit display area is erased due to the execution of the variable element of "super reach or higher", it is configured to be immediately redisplayed as soon as the variable element of "super reach or higher" is completed. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the redisplay. That is, the player recognizes that the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db should be originally displayed as the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, and this is an exceptional event (“super reach or higher”. Even if it is erased due to the execution of ""), it is recognized that it will immediately return to its original form when the exceptional event ends. Then, in the first embodiment, by subtly changing the display mode of the execution symbol from before erasing at the timing of returning to the original appearance, the change is intentionally made difficult to notice, and it is unexpected when the change is noticed. Gender increases surprises. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Furthermore, by allocating the execution timing of the "hold change notice" to the latter half of the fluctuation effect ("after reach" or "after the hold is deleted"), the expectation of a big hit increases even in the latter half of the change effect "hold". It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting the occurrence (appearance) of the "change notice". Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game while expecting a big hit until the latter half of the variable effect, the player can be given a hobby for a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the process of S1506, when it is determined that the revariation information is not stored in the revariation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), the variation element of "revariation" in the variation effect. Since it does not include, there is no point in executing the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion". Specifically, for example, even if the "pending change notice" of the execution symbol is executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed and the "big hit display" is confirmed, the variable element of "super reach" is followed. Since no production occurs, the player cannot be given any interest, but rather is awakened by a meaningless production. Also, for example, even if the "Holding change notice" of the execution symbol is executed after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed and the "Loss display" is confirmed, the "Loss display" is confirmed as it is, and the next variation effect is produced. If is started, the player will be distrustful of the game due to the discrepancy in the production.

Further, in the process of S1507, if it is determined that the hold erase information is not stored in the hold erase information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: No), the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variation effect. Since the effect is not performed, it is not possible to execute the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion".

Therefore, when it is determined in S1506 that the revariation information is not stored in the revariation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), or in the processing of S1507, the execution information storage area 223f If it is determined that the hold erasure information is not stored in the hold erasure information storage area 223f7 (S1507: No), the "hold change notice" cannot be executed "after the hold erasure", so the "hold change notice" is executed. The process shifts to S1504 in order to confirm the possible timing.

With this configuration, even if the initially set "after hold deletion" "hold change notice" cannot be executed, the execution timing ("after reach" or "before reach") can be executed. You can change it and execute "pending change notice". Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the "hold change notice" is not executed even though the lottery is won, the execution rate of the "hold change notice" can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even when the lottery process of the "pending change notice" and the lottery process of the variable effect are performed by different systems, it is possible to adjust so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the effect. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a program of a separate system, it is possible to facilitate the design of each program and to execute a consistent production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an execution example of the “holding change notice” of “after holding and erasing” will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a situation in which a “holding change notice” of “after holding and erasing” is performed in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, FIG. 33A is a diagram showing a state just before the “reach display” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 33 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 33 (a) and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 33 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the cockpit display area Db is erased from the state of FIG. 33 (b) and the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 33 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect suggesting that a “loss display” appears in the variable element of the “super reach” is executed from the state of FIG. 33 (c). FIG. 33 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. 33 (d) and the “loss display” appears in the main display area Dm. is there. FIG. 33 (f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "re-variation" is executed from the state of FIG. 33 (e) and the "big hit display" appears. In FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted.

In FIG. 33A, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. Further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and "high-speed fluctuation" is shown. Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a warning mode suggesting that the "reach display" appears. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is supporting. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times.

In FIG. 33 (b), from the state of FIG. 33 (a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. Is confirmed, and indicates a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol during stop display is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is visibly changed at a low speed (for example). , "5" symbol is scrolled slowly to "6" symbol).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the variable element of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds is invisible. As described above, the sub-display area Ds mainly has a function of suggesting whether or not "reach display" occurs in the fluctuation effect in the main display area Dm, and the "reach display" in the main display area Dm. This is because the significance of existence of the sub-display region Ds is diminished when "" occurs. Further, the player pays attention to whether or not the result of the "reach display" becomes the "big hit display" or the "missing display" when the "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm. Therefore, attention to the display content of the sub-display area Ds, which suggests the occurrence of "reach display", is diminished. Therefore, when "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content of the main display area Dm is enlarged in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the content of the "reach display" that the player pays attention to. The sub-display area Ds is erased as the image is enlarged.

In the state of FIG. 33 (b), in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the first to fourth reserved symbols are displayed as in the display state of FIG. 33 (a). The reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 33A, the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is four times. Shown.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the display of the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed without being erased during the variable element of the “normal reach”. This is because the variable element of the "normal reach" is often out of the jackpot lottery in the variable effect of only the variable element of the "normal reach", and there is a high possibility that a "missing display" will appear. Then, when the variable element of "normal reach" becomes "missing display", the next variable effect is started immediately, so it is necessary to suggest to the player whether or not the next variable effect is suspended. is there. Therefore, during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the display of the cockpit display area Db is maintained (continuous display), and it is configured to suggest to the player how many reserved balls of the variable effect exist. ing.

Further, since the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the sub-display area Ds, even if it is continuously displayed at the time of executing the variable element of the "normal reach", the effect of the variable element of the "normal reach" is not hindered. Therefore, there is no actual harm even if the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed while the variable element of "normal reach" is being executed.

Further, the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the above-mentioned "hold change notice", and even in the execution symbol suggesting the content of the variation effect during execution, the "hold change notice" is said. It is configured to inherit (inherit) the display mode of the reserved symbol changed by ". That is, it is configured so that the player can be suggested to the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect during execution depending on the display mode of the execution symbol. Therefore, by having the player confirm the display mode of the execution symbol during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach", the variable element of the "normal reach" being executed develops into the variable element of the "super reach" and becomes a big hit. Whether or not it is determined in a predictable manner for the player, and the interest based on the prediction is given.

FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 33 (b). In the variable element of the "super reach", the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol displayed by the variable element of the "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in FIG. 33 (c), a “battle effect” in which a plurality of character symbols compete for victory or defeat using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (“competition effect” in the variable element of “special reach”). Is displayed. In this "battle effect", an effect (in the first embodiment, kickboxing) in which the character symbol on the player side (for example, the left character symbol) and the character symbol on the enemy side (for example, the right character symbol) fight is executed. .. In the "battle production", if the character symbol on the player side wins, it becomes a big hit, and the "big hit display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, in the "battle effect", if the character symbol on the enemy side wins, it becomes a loss, and the "loss display" is set to appear as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", and instead, the third symbol display is displayed. A numerical symbol (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is newly displayed on the upper left of the display area of the device 81.

When a variable element of "super reach" that has a higher expectation for a jackpot than the variable element of "normal reach" occurs in the variable effect during execution, the player determines how many variable effects are on hold (standby). Also, we are paying attention to whether the fluctuation effect during execution is "big hit display" or "missing display". For this reason, we are not paying attention to the reserved symbols that indicate the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. Rather, if the reserved symbol is displayed by the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", the player cannot concentrate on the production of the variable element of "super reach", and the player cannot concentrate on the production of the variable element of "super reach". You may find it annoying to display the reserved symbol.

Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db have no direct relationship with the variation effect during execution. Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 are processed in a system different from the display control of the variation effect being executed (in the voice lamp control device 113, the reserved display setting process (FIG. The display is controlled by (see 30)). During the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", many additional effects are executed for many sprites by displaying various character symbols and displaying many effects on each character symbol. Therefore, the processing load of display control is increasing. In such a situation, if the display control of a plurality of reserved symbols that are not directly related to the fluctuation effect during execution is performed, the display control of the entire third symbol display device 81 is related to the number of sprites of each reserved symbol. The processing load increases, and there is a risk that display abnormalities such as so-called dropped frames may occur.

Further, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db inherits (inherits) the display mode of the hold symbol changed by the "hold change notice", and is executing in that display mode. In order to show the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation effect, it has a direct relationship with the variation effect being executed. However, the "pending change notice" suggests the appearance expectation of the "big hit display" and the appearance expectation of the "reach display". For this reason, when "super reach" appears, it is in a state of fulfilling the suggestion of the appearance expectation of "reach display" as "pending change notice". In addition, when "Super Reach" appears, the "Super Reach", which has a high expectation of big hits, is executed to give a certain degree of suggestion of the expected appearance of "Big Hit Display" (for example, half). ) It is in a satisfied state. Furthermore, as described above, when the "super reach" appears, the player is paying attention to the production content of the "super reach", and the interest in the display mode of the "pending change notice" in the execution symbol is diminished. There is.

Therefore, during the execution of "Super Reach", the player is made "Super Reach" by erasing the reserved symbols and the execution symbols that are not attracting the attention of the player and mainly executing the effect of "Super Reach" on the display screen. You can pay attention (concentrate) to the production of. In addition, by erasing the reserved symbols and the executed symbols that are not attracting the attention of the player in advance, the burden on the display control is removed in advance, so that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort regarding the game, and frames are dropped. It is possible to prevent a display abnormality from occurring.

In the state of FIG. 33 (c), the reach forming symbol of the “7” symbol, which is the cause of the “super reach”, is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. There is. The effect of "super reach" indicates whether the variable effect being executed is "big hit display" or "missing display", but it has a direct relationship with the display mode of the third symbol. Since it is performed by a character symbol that does not exist, if only the character symbol in "super reach" is focused on when the third symbol is not displayed at all, it is recognized whether or not the effect is "reach display". There are cases where it cannot be done (for example, it may be mistaken for a "demo screen"). In addition, since the production of "super reach" is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the player may forget which third symbol caused "reach display" during "super reach". is there. On the other hand, if the reach formation symbol is displayed large during the execution of "Super Reach", the production of "Super Reach" becomes difficult to see, and the production of "Super Reach" itself is hindered by the third symbol. There is a risk.

Therefore, in the "super reach", the reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which is the cause of the "super reach", is displayed in a small size on the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is suggested to the player that the "reach display" is generated without hindering the production of the "super reach", and the type of the third symbol that generated the "reach display" is displayed. It can be clearly suggested to the player.

Further, in the state of FIG. 33 (c), in the upper left of the display area (lower side of the "reach display") of the third symbol display device 81, a numerical symbol indicating the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect (in the first embodiment). , "4") is displayed. As described above, since the display of the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of "super reach", the player may not be able to recognize the number of fluctuation effects held by the display content of the cockpit display area Db. is there.

Therefore, instead of erasing the cockpit display area Db during the execution of "super reach", a numerical symbol indicating the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. .. With this configuration, during the production of the "super reach", the player can be shown the number of times the variable production is held without disturbing the production of the "super reach".

In FIG. 33 (d), from the state of FIG. 33 (c), the character symbol on the player side (left character symbol) becomes the character symbol on the enemy side (right character symbol) in the “battle effect” in “super reach”. The losing state is displayed. Therefore, when the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 33 (d), the character symbol on the player side loses in the "battle production" of the "super reach", and thus the "big hit display" is displayed in the "super reach". "Is not appearing, but it is predicted that" loss display "will appear.

Further, in FIG. 33 (d), as in FIG. 33 (c), since the “super reach” is being executed, the cockpit display area Db is maintained in the erased state.

In FIG. 33 (e), from the state of FIG. 33 (d), the effect of "super reach" is lost (the character symbol on the enemy side wins), and the "loss display (787)" is displayed in the main display area Dm. Appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds and the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are visible again. The character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "loss display". That is, in the main part of the third symbol display device 81, a state in which the chance is down is displayed.

In FIG. 33 (e), the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db has changed from the display mode (“white”; see FIG. 33 (b)) before being erased by the execution of “super reach”. It is displayed in the display mode (“red”). That is, the "hold change notice" is performed at the execution timing of "after the hold is deleted". That is, in the portion of the third symbol display device 81 that is not the main portion (that is, the non-main portion), the state in which the chance is increased is displayed. Therefore, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, there is a chance down in the main part (main display area Dm and sub display area Ds) and a chance up in the non-main part (cockpit display area Db). The status is displayed at the same time.

When the player first saw the state of FIG. 33 (e), he lost due to the fact that the "loss display (787)" appeared in the main display area Dm and the "battle production" in the "super reach". Based on the impression of this, as predicted at the time of FIG. 33 (d), it is presumed that the "big hit display" does not appear in this fluctuation effect, the "loss display" appears, and the "loss display" is confirmed as it is. , I am in a state where my interest is shifting to the next fluctuation production. Then, when the player sees the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db in order to pay attention to the content of the next variation effect, a "hold change notice" is performed in the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0 indicating the current variation effect. , Recognize that the execution symbol has changed to "red".

At this point, the player who first saw the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the hold" noticed the difference in the display mode of the execution symbol from before the execution of the "battle production" of "super reach". Feel something is wrong. Then, he recognizes that the root of the sense of incongruity is the "red" execution pattern. Then, based on his own memory, he examines when the "pending change notice" of the "red" execution symbol was performed. As a result of the examination, it is understood that the "pending change notice" was not executed before the execution of the "super reach", but was executed after the execution of the "super reach". At this moment, the player predicts that some event will occur due to the "red" execution symbol in the variable effect being executed.

FIG. 33 (f) shows a state in which "re-variation" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 33 (e). In this "re-variation", the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is erased, and the "loss display" which was stopped and displayed as "787" in each display area Dm1 to Dm3 is changed again. Is started, and finally it is stopped and displayed at "777" which is a "big hit display". The player was surprised that the "re-fluctuation" had occurred, and as inferred at the stage of FIG. 33 (e), the variation effect developed without being confirmed by the "loss display", and the "big hit display" was displayed. You can get a sense of happiness and satisfaction for the appearance of.

In addition, a player who has once experienced the "pending change notice" of "after erasing the hold" will assume that "missing display" appears in the "super reach" from the next time. Also, it is confirmed whether or not the execution symbol has been changed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db to be redisplayed. Therefore, it is expected that the "big hit display" will appear until the variable effect is confirmed and displayed, creating the interest of confirming the display mode of the execution symbol that is redisplayed even after the execution of "Super Reach". You can play games while playing. Therefore, the interest of the game can be maintained until the variable effect is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is executed in the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db. In this case, first, an effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db (for example, "super reach") is performed. Then, the "hold change notice" is executed at the timing of redisplaying the cockpit display area Db after the execution of the effect, and at the timing of redisplaying the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. After that, when the "pending change notice" is executed at the time of redisplay, the "revariation" is configured so that the "loss display" changes to the "big hit display". With this configuration, the player was surprised that the jackpot was given in the fluctuation effect that was initially predicted to be lost, and as expected at the stage of recognizing the change in the execution pattern, the variation effect was achieved. It is possible to get a sense of happiness and satisfaction for the appearance of the "big hit display" by developing without being confirmed by the "loss display". As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, a player who has once experienced the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" will be "lost" in the effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db from the next time (for example, "super reach"). Even if "display" appears, it is confirmed whether or not the execution symbol has been changed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db to be redisplayed. Therefore, the interest of confirming the display mode of the execution symbol that is redisplayed even after the execution of the above effect is born, and the game is expected to appear "big hit display" until the variable display is confirmed and displayed. It can be performed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be maintained until the variable effect is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the hold" is performed in the execution symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is deleted. The "pending change notice" can be displayed (executed) at the timing when the execution symbol of is redisplayed. As a result, when the notice target (change target. In the first embodiment, the execution symbol) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or when the notice target is newly displayed. Compared with the case of notifying, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target. By making the object to be announced invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the discomfort is recognized as being directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot). As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Further, the display of the cockpit display area Db and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db are always displayed except during the execution of the variation element of "super reach or higher", and the player is in the current variation. It notifies the execution suggestion of the effect and the presence or absence of the variable effect on standby. Further, even if the cockpit display area is erased due to the execution of the variable element of "super reach or higher", it is configured to be immediately redisplayed as soon as the variable element of "super reach or higher" is completed. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the redisplay. That is, the player recognizes that the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db should be originally displayed as the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, and this is an exceptional event (“super reach or higher”. Even if it is erased due to the execution of ""), it is recognized that it will immediately return to its original form when the exceptional event ends. Then, in the first embodiment, by subtly changing the display mode of the execution symbol from before erasing at the timing of returning to the original appearance, the change is intentionally made difficult to notice, and it is unexpected when the change is noticed. Gender increases surprises. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Furthermore, by allocating the execution timing of the "hold change notice" to the latter half of the fluctuation effect ("after reach" or "after the hold is deleted"), the expectation of a big hit increases even in the latter half of the change effect "hold". It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting the occurrence (appearance) of the "change notice". Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game while expecting a big hit until the latter half of the variable effect, the player can be given a hobby for a long period of time.

Further, when the execution of the "hold change notice" is decided and the execution timing is "after the hold is deleted", it is confirmed whether or not the "hold change notice" can be executed at the execution timing, and it is determined that the execution cannot be performed. If this is the case, the execution timing is changed to a feasible execution timing (“after reach” or “before reach”), and the “pending change notice” is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the "hold change notice" is not executed even though the lottery is won, and the execution rate of the "hold change notice" can be increased. Can be improved. In addition, even if the lottery process of "pending change notice" and the lottery process of variable effect are performed by different (different system) processes, adjustments are made so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of each effect. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a different (separate system) program, it is possible to facilitate the design of each program and to execute a consistent production.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is executed, the variation that can execute the "hold change notice" at the initially set execution timing ("after hold deletion"). If it is a variable effect that can be executed by determining whether or not it is an effect, the "hold change notice" is performed at the execution timing ("after pending deletion") as originally set, but if the variable effect cannot be executed. Is configured to change the execution timing of the initially set "hold change notice", determine when the "hold change notice" can be executed, and then execute the "hold change notice". There is.

However, even when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" can be executed (including "re-change") in the fluctuation effect. If not, even though the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected, it is difficult to execute the "hold change notice" at that timing, and the conventional "hold change notice" frequently occurs. , There is a risk that the interest of the game cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is executed, whether or not the change effect can execute the "hold change notice" at the initially set execution timing. If it is a variable effect that cannot be executed, change the content so that the "pending change notice" of "after erasing the hold" can be executed in the variable effect, and "hold" of the initial "after erasing the hold". It is configured to execute "change notice".

Specifically, when "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected in the change effect, "hold change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing of "after hold erase" in the change effect. When it is determined to be an effect mode (variable element), the variable element of "pseudo-gase" or the variable element of "pseudo-ren 1" (hereinafter, the variable element of "pseudo-gase" or the variable element of "pseudo-ren 1" is generically referred to. It is determined whether or not there is a variable element related to (sometimes referred to as a variable element of "pseudo-effect"). Then, when it is determined that the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is included, all (or a part) of the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is deleted from the cockpit display area Db of the "super reach". Convert to a variable element or a variable element of "special reach".

To change this fluctuation element, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 determines only the rough fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect, transmits the determined content to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the voice lamp. Since the device 113 determines the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect based on the rough variation pattern and the variation time of the variation effect received from the main control device 110, the apparatus 113 is configured to be changeable. That is, if the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a fluctuation effect that can be consistent within the fluctuation time determined by the main control device 110, the fine fluctuation elements and the like are free on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is configured so that it can be selected and determined. Specifically, for example, in the voice lamp control device 113, when trying to change the fluctuation element of the fluctuation effect, for example, when there are two fluctuation elements of the same fluctuation time, one fluctuation element is changed to the other fluctuation element. Even if it is changed to an element, the consistency of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation production can be obtained. Therefore, there is no problem even if the fluctuation element is changed in the voice lamp control device 113 so as to correspond to the fluctuation time determined by the main control device 110, and an appropriate fluctuation within the fluctuation time determined by the main control device 110. The production can be executed.

In the second embodiment, when "after hold deletion" is initially selected as the execution timing of "hold change notice", and there is no change element for erasing the cockpit display area Db, the change of "pseudo effect". The cockpit display area Db can be erased by changing the portion corresponding to the element to a variable element for erasing the cockpit display area Db (for example, a variable element of "super reach"). Therefore, by adding a variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db, it is possible to execute the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion". With this configuration, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the "hold change notice" at the execution timing of the "after hold deletion". Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the second embodiment. In the configuration of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the second embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment is that the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f have "pseudo-effects", respectively. It is a point that pseudo-effect information storage areas 223e9 and 223f9 for storing pseudo-effect information indicating that the operation is executed are provided. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 receives a look-ahead process (hold display setting process (see FIG. 36)) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223e1 to 223e4 in the hold information storage X area when the hold ball number command is received. ), And the hold change information, scenario data, hold erase information, revariation information, and pseudo-effect information generated based on the result of this look-ahead processing are stored in the respective storage areas 223e5 to 223e9 of the same hold information storage X area, respectively. Store.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the shift process in the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. That is, the reserved variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variation effect in time is started. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed. Let me.

In addition, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the hold information storage second area are transferred to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the hold information storage first area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the hold information storage third area are moved and stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the hold information storage second area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the hold information storage fourth area are moved to each storage area 223e1 to the hold information storage third area. Move to 223e9.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f. Further, in the hold information storage first to fourth areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 are stored, respectively. Will be done. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the hold information storage area 223e. To.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a pre-change variation effect that includes a “pseudo-effect” and does not erase the cockpit display area Db, and a pre-change variation effect that has the same variation time and a cockpit display area Db. The post-change variation effect will be described. FIG. 35 (a) is a time chart showing the relationship between "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)", and FIG. 35 (b) is a time chart showing the relationship. It is a time chart which showed the relationship between "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" and "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)".

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), both "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)" are composed of a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds. There is. Specifically, "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" is a 7-second "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, a 3-second "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, and a 10-second "pseudo-gase". The fluctuation element of the above, the fluctuation element of "normal reach" for 10 seconds, and the fluctuation element of "re-variation" for 10 seconds are combined in order, and the fluctuation pattern is performed for 40 seconds in total. Therefore, in "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)", the fluctuation element of "pseudo-gase", which is the fluctuation element of "pseudo-effect", is executed, but the "super reach" that erases the cockpit display area Db Variable elements etc. are not executed. Therefore, this "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" is a variation pattern in which the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" cannot be executed.

On the other hand, "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)" is a 7-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, a 3-second "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, and a 10-second "normal reach" variable element. It is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation element of "super reach" for 10 seconds and a fluctuation element of "re-variation" for 10 seconds are sequentially combined and performed for 40 seconds in total. Therefore, in "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)", the fluctuation element of "pseudo-effect" is not included, but the fluctuation element of "super reach" which is the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation element of "pseudo-gase". Is included, and the cockpit display area Db is erased by executing the variable element of the "super reach". Therefore, this "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)" is a variation pattern that can execute the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion".

As a result, "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)" have different fluctuation elements, but the overall fluctuation time is the same (40 seconds). Even if one fluctuation pattern is replaced with the other fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113, consistency is obtained. As a result, even if there is a command (for example, a confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 later, there is no problem in the control timing of the command. That is, "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)" are fluctuation patterns that can be replaced with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), both "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" and "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)" are configured with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds. Has been done. Specifically, "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" is a 7-second "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, a 3-second "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, and a 20-second "pseudo-ream 1". The variable element of "", the variable element of "normal reach" for 10 seconds, and the variable element of "re-variation" for 10 seconds are combined in order, and the variation pattern is performed for 50 seconds in total. Therefore, in "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)", the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream 1" which is the fluctuation element of "pseudo-effect" is executed, but "super reach" that erases the cockpit display area Db. Fluctuation factors etc. are not executed. Therefore, this "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" is a variation pattern in which the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" cannot be executed.

On the other hand, "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)" is a 7-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, a 3-second "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, and a 10-second "normal reach" variable element. , A 20-second "special reach" variation element and a 10-second "re-variation" variation element are sequentially combined to form a variation pattern that is performed for a total of 50 seconds. Therefore, in "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)", the fluctuation element of "pseudo-effect" is not included, but the fluctuation of "special reach" which is the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream 1". The element is included and the cockpit display area Db is erased by the "special reach". Therefore, this "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)" is a variation pattern that can execute the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion".

Therefore, "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" and "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)" have different fluctuation elements, but the total fluctuation time is the same (50 seconds). Even if one fluctuation pattern is replaced with the other fluctuation pattern in the lamp control device 113, consistency is obtained. As a result, even if there is a command (for example, a confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 later, there is no problem in the control timing of the command. That is, "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" and "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)" are fluctuation patterns that can be replaced with each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the hold display setting process (S1209) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, it performs this hold display setting process, and when it is decided to execute the "hold change notice", the hold change information and the scenario data. , Hold erase information and revariation information are stored in each storage area 223e5 to 223e8 of the hold information storage X area indicated by the hold ball number command. Further, in the hold display setting process, it is determined whether or not the change element of the "pseudo effect" is included in the change effect indicated by the hold ball number command. As a result of the determination, when the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is included, the pseudo-effect information indicating the execution of the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223e9. There is.

Specifically, in the process of S1303 of the hold display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the hold ball number command received this time (. S1303). As a result of the determination, if the execution lottery of the "pending change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "holding change notice" is not executed. All data is stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5, the scenario data storage area 223e6, the hold erase information storage area 223e7, the revariation information storage area 223e8, and the pseudo effect information storage area 223e9 in the X area (S1354), and the processing is performed. Move to S1313.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), the processes of S1304 to S1311 are performed as in the first embodiment, and the hold change information, scenario data, and hold The erase information or the revariation information is stored in each storage area 223e5 to 223e8 of the hold information storage X area indicated by the hold ball number command, and the process shifts to S1351.

In the process of S1351, it is determined whether or not the variation effect indicated by the reserved ball number command received this time includes the variation element of the "pseudo effect" (S1351). As a result of the determination, if the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is included (S1351: Yes), the hold ball number command issues pseudo-effect information indicating that the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is performed in the variable effect. It is stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223e9 of the indicated hold information storage X area (S1352), and the process shifts to S1313. By the process of S1352, it can be recognized that the variable element of "pseudo-effect" can be replaced with the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". If it is determined in the process of S1351 that the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is not included (S1351: No), the Null data is stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223e9 of the hold information storage X area. (S1353), the process shifts to S1313. In the process of S1353, by writing the Null data to the pseudo-effect information storage area 223e9, for example, the duplicate use of the pseudo-effect information regarding the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" stored in the hold information storage X area before writing is performed. Can be prevented.

Next, the execution symbol change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an execution symbol change process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment. This execution symbol change processing is executed in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 31) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28), and the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. It is done to execute "pending change notice" in.

In the execution symbol change processing (S1414) of the second embodiment, as a result of the determination of S1501, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "0", and the number of reserved balls is "0". If the data indicates "after hold deletion" (S1501: "after hold deletion"), "re-release" in the change effect to confirm whether or not "hold change notice" can be executed after "reach display" of the change effect. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation element of "variation" is executed (S1506). This determination is based on the process of S1309 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30), and the revariation information stored in the revariation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f is determined.

In the process of S1506, when it is determined that the revariation information is not stored in the revariation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), the variation element of "revariation" is included in the variation effect. Therefore, there is no point in executing the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion". Specifically, for example, even if the variable element of "super reach" is executed and the "big hit display" is confirmed and then the "pending change notice" of the execution symbol is executed, the player is given any interest. It is not possible to do it, but rather it is awakened by a meaningless production. Also, for example, even if the "Holding change notice" of the execution symbol is executed after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed and the "Loss display" is confirmed, the "Loss display" is confirmed as it is, and the next variation effect is produced. If is started, the player will be distrustful of the game due to the discrepancy in the production.

Therefore, in S1506, when it is determined that the re-variation information is not stored in the re-variation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), the "hold change notice" is executed "after the hold is deleted". Since it cannot be performed, the process is shifted to S1504 in order to confirm the executable timing of the "pending change notice".

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S1506, when the revariation information is stored in the revariation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: Yes), the variation element of "revariation" after "reach display". Is the variable effect to be executed, so next, the timing after the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect (for example, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or the execution of the variable element of "special reach" Whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased by executing the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" in the variable effect in order to confirm whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed in (later). (S1507). In this determination, in the process of S1307 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30), the hold erase information stored in the hold erase information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f is determined.

As a result of the determination in S1507, if the hold erase information is stored in the hold erase information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: Yes), the "hold change notice" can be executed "after hold deletion". Therefore, in order to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a display change post-erasure command is set toward the display control device 114 ( S1508), the process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 31).

The display change post-erasure command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be done. The display control device 114 that has received the change command after erasing for display is after the "super reach" or "special reach" of the variation effect is completed for the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. , The display control is performed so as to change the execution symbol (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") to the determined display mode of the "pending change notice" at the timing before the execution of the "revariation".

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, when it is determined that the hold erase information is not stored in the hold erase information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: No), the "reach display" performed in the variation effect is Since it is "normal reach" and the effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db is not performed, the "hold change notice" of "after hold erasure" cannot be executed. Therefore, the process shifts to S1551 in order to change the variable element of the variable effect and confirm whether or not the "pending change notice" of "after pending deletion" can be executed.

In the process of S1551, it is determined whether or not the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is selected in the variable effect (S1551). In this determination, in the process of S1352 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 36), the pseudo effect information stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f is determined.

As a result of the determination in S1551, if the pseudo-effect information is not stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1551: No), this execution symbol is not set without setting the command to change the execution symbol. The change processing (S1414) is finished, and the process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 31). That is, in the case of the "re-variation", "super reach or higher", and the variation effect in which the "pseudo-effect" is not performed when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected, the execution symbol Configure not to execute "pending change notice". By configuring in this way, if the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is not appropriate, the effect content may be inconsistent by not executing the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol. It is possible to provide the player with a consistent effect.

When it is determined in the processing of S1551 that the pseudo-effect information is not stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1551: No), for example, the process proceeds to S1504. It may be configured to determine whether or not there is an execution timing for which the "hold change notice" can be given to the execution symbol. With this configuration, the selected "pending change notice" can be reliably executed at any execution timing, so the case where the selected "holding change notice" is not executed even though the execution lottery is won. Can be reduced, the execution rate of the "pending change notice" can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1551, if the pseudo-effect information is stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1551: Yes), a variable element to be changed according to the content of the "pseudo-effect". In order to confirm, it is determined whether or not the "pseudo-effect" stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223f9 is a "pseudo-gase" (S1552). As a result of the determination, if "pseudo-gase" is stored as the pseudo-effect information stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223f9 (S1552: Yes), the display variation pattern command that has been transmitted to the display control device 114 at the present time. In order to perform a variation effect that can cancel the "pseudo-gase" variable element and change the "pseudo-gase" variable element to the "super reach" variable element and execute the "pending change notice" of "after pending deletion" of "pseudo-gase" A pseudo-gase change super command that changes the variable element and executes the variable element of "super reach" is set toward the display control device 114 (S1553), and the process shifts to S1508.

When the display control device 114 receives the pseudo-gase change super command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 replaces the received display change pattern command with the pseudo-gase change super command, and executes the display control of the variation effect. It is configured to do. As described above, when the display control device 114 receives the display change pattern command and the display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not immediately start the display process related to the variation effect based on the command. It is configured to wait for a predetermined time (for example, 1 millisecond) whether or not a command indicating a change in the variation effect such as the above-mentioned display error command or pseudo-gase change super command is transmitted.

When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the audio lamp control device 113 and immediately executes the display process related to the variation effect based on the command, the display control device 113 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. If a display error command is transmitted after that, the display process related to the above variation effect must be stopped and replaced with the variation display based on the pseudo-gase change super command or the like. Therefore, even when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 does not immediately execute the display process related to the variation effect based on the command, and displays from the voice lamp control device 113. Waits for the execution of the display process related to the variation effect based on the command for a predetermined time when the error command, the pseudo-gase change super command, etc. may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the display control device 114 can prevent a processing load due to executing unnecessary processing in the display processing related to the variation effect.

In the second embodiment, 1 millisecond is exemplified as the predetermined time at which the display control device 114 may transmit the pseudo-gase change super command from the voice lamp control device 113, but this standby time is the display control device. Any range may be used as long as the display processing in 114 is not delayed. Specifically, for example, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display processing and drawing processing for one frame every 20 milliseconds, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to perform the above-mentioned. After executing the command determination process (see FIG. 29), the execution symbol change process (S1414) in the variation effect process (see FIG. 31) is configured to be executed within several milliseconds.

Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a pseudo-gase change super command in the execution symbol change process after transmitting the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command. It is possible to reliably generate and transmit the pseudo-gase change supercommand if there is a time of at least several milliseconds before transmission. Therefore, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to receive the pseudo-gase change super command if there is a pseudo-gase change super command by waiting for at least several milliseconds after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. ing. Therefore, by waiting for a time shorter than the time required for the display processing and drawing processing for one frame (20 milliseconds), it is possible to execute the display processing related to the variation effect without delay. Therefore, the third symbol display device. It is possible to prevent an event in which the display processing of the variation effect to 81 is clearly delayed.

Further, in the processing of S1552, if "pseudo-gase" is not stored as the pseudo-effect information stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223f9 (S1552: No), "pseudo-ream 1" is stored as the pseudo-effect information. Therefore, the display fluctuation pattern command that has been sent to the display control device 114 at the present time is canceled, the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream 1" is changed to the fluctuation element of "special reach", and "after pending deletion". A pseudo-ream 1 change special command for changing the "pseudo-ream 1" and executing the "special reach" is set toward the display control device 114 in order to execute a variation effect capable of executing the "pending change notice" (S1554). , The process shifts to S1508.

The pseudo-gase change super command or pseudo-ream 1 change special command set in the process of S1553 or S1554 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 28). ) Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

The display control device 114 that received the pseudo-gase change super command initially tried to execute the variation effect of "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" indicated by the display variation pattern command, but the pseudo-gase change super command By receiving the command, the "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" is changed (replaced) to "super reach + re-variation (C605H)" to perform display control.

Further, the display control device 114 that has received the pseudo-ream 1 change special command initially tried to execute the variation effect of "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" indicated by the display variation pattern command. By receiving the continuous 1 change special command, the "pseudo continuous 1 + normal reach + revariation (C506H)" is changed (replaced) to "special reach + revariation (C705H)" to perform display control.

In the second embodiment, the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" can be changed to another variable element composed of the same variable time (for example, "super reach" for "pseudo-gase"). There is. The variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is performed in the first half of the variable effect, and the "big hit display" does not appear. On the other hand, "super reach" and "special reach" are variable elements that can cause "big hit display" to appear. Therefore, the player tends to pay attention to "super reach" and "special reach" among the variable elements of the variable effect, and does not pay attention to the display result for the "pseudo effect", and any "pseudo effect". Just pay attention to whether or not "is executed. That is, regarding the importance of directing, it can be said that the importance of "pseudo-directing" is low, and the importance of "super reach" and "special reach" is high.

Then, as in the second embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" cannot be executed by the initially selected variation effect. At that time, it is confirmed whether or not there is a less important "pseudo-directing". Then, if a "pseudo-effect" exists, it can be changed to "super reach" or "special reach", which is more important than the "pseudo-effect", and the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" can be executed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, by changing the less important effect to the more important effect, the player is made to pay attention to the result of the variable effect, and the "hold change notice" of "after the hold is deleted" is performed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, diversify the effect, and enhance the interest of the game.

The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 in the command determination process (see S1110 in FIG. 28) in the main process, and then the variation effect process in the next main process (FIG. 28). In (see S1109), a pseudo-gase change super command or a pseudo-ream 1 change special command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Further, even when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, as described above, the display control device 114 performs the display control of the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command for a predetermined time (for example, 1). It is configured to wait (milliseconds) so that the third symbol display device 81 does not immediately perform the display based on the display variation pattern command. Further, the display control device 114 is configured so that the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-ream 1 change special command can be received within the predetermined time after receiving the display variation pattern command. Therefore, after receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 changes the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-ream 1 before starting the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command on the third symbol display device 81. You can receive special commands. Therefore, in the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect can be executed without making the player recognize that the variation element has been changed. As a result, it is possible to execute a smooth variation effect without causing the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

It should be noted that the variation effect processing of the main processing (see S1109 in FIG. 28) may be configured to be executed after the processing of the command determination processing (S1110 in FIG. 28) of the main processing. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 immediately transmits the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-ream 1 change special command to the display control device 114 after transmitting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, the display control device 114 can immediately receive the pseudo-similar Gase change super command or the pseudo-ream 1 change special command immediately after receiving the display variation pattern command, and can change the content of the variation effect at an early stage. Can be recognized. As a result, the display control after the change can be performed without performing the display control of the variation effect before the change, so that the burden of the display control of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Further, in the second embodiment, the execution symbol change process (see FIG. 37) that generates the pseudo-gase change super command and the pseudo-ream 1 change special command is the display variation pattern command and the display in the command determination process (see FIG. 29). It is configured to generate a stop type command and execute it after turning on the fluctuation start flag 223a. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 should not transmit the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-ream 1 change special command only after the display change pattern command and the display stop type command have been transmitted to the display control device 114. It is configured. Therefore, for example, the display control device 114 does not receive the pseudo-gase change super command without receiving the display change pattern command, and the display control device 114 can easily create the display control program. can do.

In the process of S1508, since the "hold change notice" can be executed "after the hold is deleted" based on the process of S1507, S1553 or S1554, the display stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f. In order to execute the "pending change notice" in the embodiment, a change command after erasing for display is set toward the display control device 114 (S1508), and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 31).

The display change post-erasure command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be done. The display control device 114 that has received the change command after erasing for display is after the "super reach" or "special reach" of the variation effect is completed for the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. , The display control is performed so as to change the execution symbol (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") to the determined display mode of the "pending change notice" at the timing before the execution of the "revariation".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected in the change effect, "after hold erase" is selected in the change effect. When it is determined that the "pending change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing, first, a variable element that can be changed to a variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db (for example, "pseudo effect"). Determine the presence or absence of variable factors). Then, when it is determined that the variable element that can be changed (for example, the variable element of the "pseudo-effect") is included, the changeable variable element (for example, all or a part of the "pseudo-effect") is displayed in the cockpit. The region Db is converted into a variable element of a variable element (eg, "super reach") that eliminates it.

Therefore, by adding a variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db, it is possible to execute the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion". With this configuration, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the "hold change notice" at the execution timing of the "after hold deletion". Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

In addition, when "pending change notice" of "holding deletion" is selected and the "holding change notice" of "holding change notice" cannot be executed in the initially selected variation effect, the variable element of low importance is selected. Check if (for example, "pseudo-effect") exists. Then, when there is a variable element of low importance (for example, "pseudo-effect"), a variable element of higher importance (for example, "super effect") than the variable element of low importance (for example, "pseudo-effect") is present. Change to "reach" or "special reach") so that the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the hold" can be executed. With this configuration, the less important variable element is changed to the more important variable element, and the high importance variable element causes the player to pay attention to the result of the variation effect. By performing a "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" after the end of the variable element, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, diversify the effect, and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 in the command determination process (see S1110 in FIG. 28) in the main process, and then the variation effect process in the next main process (see S1110 in FIG. 28). In (see S1109 of FIG. 28), it is configured to transmit a pseudo-gase change super command or a pseudo-ream 1 change special command to the display control device 114. Further, even when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 uses the display variation pattern command for a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds) in the third symbol display device 81 due to preparation for the display control process or the like. It is configured so that the display based on it cannot be performed. Further, the display control device 114 is configured so that the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-ream 1 change special command can be received within the predetermined time after receiving the display variation pattern command. Therefore, after receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 changes the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-ream 1 before starting the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command on the third symbol display device 81. You can receive special commands. Therefore, in the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect can be executed without making the player recognize that the variation element has been changed. As a result, it is possible to execute a smooth variation effect without causing the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effect as the first embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 52. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected in the fluctuation effect, the "hold change notice" is given at the execution timing of "after hold erase" in the change effect. When it is determined that the fluctuation element of the fluctuation element cannot be executed, it is configured to determine the presence or absence of the fluctuation element related to the fluctuation element of the "pseudo-effect". Then, when it is determined that the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is included, all (or a part) of the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is erased from the cockpit display area Db. It is converted into a variable element of "special reach".

However, in the variation effect, if the variation element that erases the cockpit display area Db does not include a changeable variation element, the variation element cannot be changed. Therefore, the variation element of the variation effect is not changed, and the variation element is not changed. It is configured so that "hold change notice" is not performed "after hold deletion". Specifically, when the variable effect does not include the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" that is the change source, the variable element of the "pseudo-effect" is changed to the variable element of "super reach" or the variable of "special reach". Since it cannot be replaced with an element, it is configured not to execute the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" in the execution symbol. Therefore, even though the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected, the "hold change notice" at that timing cannot be executed, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game cannot be improved. ..

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the cockpit display area Db cannot be visually recognized (difficult to see) by using a movable accessory capable of covering a part of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be driveable. Then, in a state where the cockpit display area Db is covered by the movable accessory, the "hold change notice" is executed in the execution symbol. After that, when the movable accessory returns from the state of covering the cockpit display area Db to the original state, the player becomes in a state where the execution symbol can be visually recognized again, and a "pending change notice" is issued in the execution symbol. It becomes possible to recognize that it is being executed.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a left movable accessory 87 (see FIG. 38) capable of reciprocating on the display screen is arranged on the left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, a right-side movable accessory 88 (see FIG. 38) capable of reciprocating on the display screen is arranged on the right side of the display screen. The left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 are configured so that the presence / absence of drive and the drive pattern are determined by a drive lottery in the variation effect. Further, the cockpit display area Db is configured so that any fluctuation element is always displayed during the execution of the fluctuation effect. Further, when the left movable accessory 87 is driven in a predetermined driving mode (in the third embodiment, a “strong pattern”; hereinafter, the predetermined driving mode is referred to as a “strong pattern”), the left movable accessory 87 The object 87 covers the cockpit display area Db, and the left movable accessory 87 makes the cockpit display area Db invisible to the player. Then, in the state where the left movable accessory 87 is driven by the "strong pattern", the "hold change notice" is executed by the execution symbol (hereinafter, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" at the time of the "strong pattern" is set. After "after driving a strong pattern"), when the left movable accessory 87 returns to its original position, the player can see the executed symbol for which the "hold change notice" has already been executed. Configure.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after driving the strong pattern" is selected in the variation effect, the "strong pattern" of the left movable accessory 87 is displayed in the variation effect. When it is not selected, it is determined whether or not the content of the variable effect in which the left movable accessory 87 can be driven by the “strong pattern” is determined. As a result of the determination, if the content (variable element) that can drive the left movable accessory 87 in the variation effect, the left movable accessory 87 is driven in a "strong pattern", and the left movable accessory 87 is moved to the cockpit display area Db. Cover. Then, in a state where the left movable accessory 87 is driven by the "strong pattern", that is, in a state where the left movable accessory 87 covers the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is "after the strong pattern is driven". "Hold change notice" is executed, and then when the left movable accessory 87 returns to its original position, the executed symbol for which "Hold change notice" has been executed can be visually recognized again by the player. Configure.

With this configuration, the notice target (change target. In the third embodiment, the execution symbol) that is always visible can be directly changed and notified, or a new notice target can be notified. It is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target, as compared with the case where the notice target is displayed and notified. By making the object to be announced invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the discomfort is recognized as being directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot). As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Further, when the execution symbol that is the execution target of the "pending change notice" is made invisible, the effect content (variable element) of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed, but is different from the third symbol display device 81. By changing the drive pattern of the movable accessory (left movable accessory 87), it is possible to make the execution symbol, which is the execution target of the "pending change notice", invisible. Therefore, to the display control device 114 that controls the third symbol display device 81, an additional command or the like is transmitted to make the execution symbol invisible without replacing the effect contents, and then the "pending change" is made. Since the "notice" can be given, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, diversify the effect, and enhance the interest of the game without increasing the control load of the display control device 114.

In the third embodiment, as a drive pattern other than the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88, a "weak pattern" drive pattern having a smaller drive range than the "strong pattern" drive pattern is provided. There is. Specifically, in the drive pattern of the "strong pattern", the movable accessories 87 and 88 are tilted from the standing state (90 °) at the initial position to the horizontal state (0 °), and the cockpit is provided by the left movable accessory 87. The display area Db is configured to be covered. On the other hand, in the "weak pattern" drive pattern, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are tilted from the standing state at the initial position to a slightly tilted state (60 °), and the cockpit display area is changed depending on the movable accessories 87 and 88. It is configured so that the Db is not covered.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment or the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 38, in the variation effect of the third embodiment, the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the variation element of "normal reach" and the variation element of "super reach" appear. explain.

FIG. 38A is a diagram showing a state just before (immediately before) when the “reach display (“normal reach”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 38 (b), the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable element is confirmed from the state of FIG. 38 (a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a figure which showed the state which is. FIG. 38 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which a variable element of “super reach” is generated from the state of FIG. 38 (b) and the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm. .. FIG. 38 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is redisplayed from the state of FIG. 38 (c) and the “loss display” of the third symbol appears in the main display area Dm.

First, in FIG. 38A, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the “7” symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm3. Immediately before the stop display is displayed, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible, indicating a state in which the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed. Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a warning mode suggesting that the "reach display" appears. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is supporting. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times.

Further, a left movable accessory 87 imitating a sword is arranged on the left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a right movable accessory 88 imitating a sword is also arranged on the right side of the display screen. It is arranged. The left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 (hereinafter, the left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 may be abbreviated as “each movable accessory 87, 88”) are set as initial positions in the normal state. It is located at the origin position and is arranged upright on both the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81.

At the initial positions of the movable accessories 87 and 88, the front side of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is visible to the player, and the third symbol display device 81 is almost covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is almost visible.

Each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is configured to be reciprocally driven on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by a drive motor (not shown) when the drive lottery in the variation effect is won. Specifically, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven, which is the initial position, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are held in an upright state (90 °) on both the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81, respectively. To.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the driving modes of the movable accessories 87 and 88 will be specifically described. FIG. 39 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a drive pattern of the left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 according to the “weak pattern” in the third embodiment, and FIG. 39 (b) is a diagram showing a drive pattern of the left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88. It is a figure which shows typically the drive pattern by the "strong pattern" of the accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88.

When the left movable accessory 87 is driven from the initial position (the left position of the third symbol display device 81; the upright state (90 °)), the third symbol is centered on the lower end of the left movable accessory 87. The display device 81 is rotationally driven to the right (clockwise) on the screen. In this rotational drive, in the "weak pattern" drive mode, the third symbol display device 81 rotates to a predetermined position (predetermined angle (60 °)), which is the central portion of the screen, and stops (see FIG. 39 (a)). ), In the driving mode of the "strong pattern", the third symbol display device 81 is rotated to the lower part (0 °) of the screen (see FIG. 39 (b)) and stopped, and the stopped state is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 1). (Seconds or 2 seconds) Keep. After that, the left movable accessory 87 stopped at each of the above stop positions is rotationally driven to the left (counterclockwise) on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 around the lower end of the left movable accessory 87. Then, it is configured to return to the initial position (the position on the left side of the third symbol display device 81. The upright state (90 °)).

When the right movable accessory 88 is driven from the initial position (the right position of the third symbol display device 81; the upright state (90 °)), the third symbol is centered on the lower end of the right movable accessory 88. The display device 81 is rotationally driven to the left (counterclockwise) on the screen. In this rotational drive, in the "weak pattern" drive mode, the third symbol display device 81 rotates to a predetermined position (predetermined angle (60 °)), which is the central portion of the screen, and stops (see FIG. 39 (a)). ), In the driving mode of the "strong pattern", the third symbol display device 81 is rotated to the lower part (0 °) of the screen (see FIG. 39 (b)) and stopped, and the stopped state is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 1). (Seconds or 2 seconds) Keep. After that, the right movable accessory 88 stopped at each of the above stop positions is rotationally driven to the right (clockwise) on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 around the lower end of the right movable accessory 88. , It is configured to return to the initial position (the position on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The upright state (90 °)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is configured to be driven by a drive pattern selected by lottery at the timing when any of the "reach display" is executed. There is. That is, at the stage where the "reach display" is being executed, the jackpot expectation is configured to differ depending on which drive pattern each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven by, and the player " During the execution of the "reach display", attention is paid to which drive pattern each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven, and the game is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 are configured to be driven at the same time regardless of the drive pattern of "weak pattern" or "strong pattern". Has been done. Therefore, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in a "strong pattern", the trajectories of the movable accessories 87 and 88 interfere with each other, but in the third embodiment, the left movable accessory 87 is the right movable accessory. It is driven slightly earlier than the object 88, and is driven and controlled so that they do not collide with each other.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In FIG. 38 (b), from the state of FIG. 38 (a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. Is confirmed, and indicates a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol during stop display is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is visibly changed at a low speed (for example). , "5" symbol is scrolled slowly to "6" symbol).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the variable element of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds is invisible. This expands the display content of the main display area Dm in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the content of the "reach display" that the player pays attention to when the "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is erased as the image is enlarged.

In the state of FIG. 38 (b), in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 as in the display state of FIG. 38 (a), and the first to fourth reserved symbols are displayed. The reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 38 (a), the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is four times. Shown.

Further, in FIG. 38 (b), as in FIG. 38 (a), the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven and are in a state of being stopped at the initial position (upright position), respectively.

FIG. 38 (c) shows a state in which the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 38 (b). In the variable element of the "super reach", the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol displayed by the variable element of the "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in FIG. 38 (c), a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character symbols compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this "battle effect", an effect in which the character symbol on the player side (for example, the left character symbol) and the character symbol on the enemy side (for example, the right character symbol) fight is executed. In the "battle production", if the character symbol on the player side wins, it becomes a big hit, and the "big hit display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, in the "battle effect", if the character symbol on the enemy side wins, it becomes a loss, and the "loss display" is set to appear as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

In the state of FIG. 38 (c), in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 as in the display states of FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), and the first The reserved symbols are displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), it is shown that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm by the execution symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect is increased by the four reserved symbols. It shows that it is 4 times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, since the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the sub display area Ds, the sub display area Ds is displayed even if the display continues to be displayed when the variable element of "super reach" is executed. It does not significantly hinder the production of variable elements of "super reach" compared to the case of continuing to do so. Therefore, the execution symbol of the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed during the execution of the variable element of "super reach".

Further, the reserved symbol and the executed symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the "pending change notice", and the execution symbol suggesting the content of the variation effect being executed is also subjected to the "pending change notice". It is configured to inherit (inherit) the display mode of the changed reserved symbol. That is, it is configured so that the player can be suggested to the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect during execution depending on the display mode of the execution symbol. Therefore, by having the player confirm the display mode of the execution symbol during the execution of the variable element of the "super reach", it is possible to predict whether or not the variable element of the "super reach" being executed is a big hit. It is composed of the above, and the interest based on the prediction is given.

Further, in FIG. 38 (c), as in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven and are stopped at the initial positions (upright positions), respectively. Is.

In the state of FIG. 38 (c), the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol that caused the occurrence of this "super reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. There is.

Further, in the state of FIG. 38 (c), in the upper left of the display area (lower side of the "reach display") of the third symbol display device 81, a numerical symbol indicating the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect (in the first embodiment). "4" is displayed) is not displayed. This is because the cockpit display area Db is always displayed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, so that the player can recognize the number of fluctuation effects by checking the display content of the cockpit display area Db. Is.

In FIG. 38 (d), from the state of FIG. 38 (c), the variable element of "super reach" is lost (the character symbol on the enemy side wins), and the "loss display" appears in the main display area Dm. At the same time, the sub-display area Ds is redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is visible again. The character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "loss display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the variation element of the "super reach" ends and the variation effect is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the display state of the third symbol display device 81 is the initial state, that is, the main state. The display area Dm, the sub-display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are each displayed. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the variation effect has been stopped (confirmed display), and when there is a pending (standby) variation effect, the next variation effect can be smoothly performed. It becomes possible to execute.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the display states of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are enlarged or reduced at each timing in the variation effect. By erasing or redisplaying, the display contents having high importance at each timing can be easily recognized by the player. Further, by constantly displaying the execution symbol and the reserved symbol on the cockpit display area Db, the player can clearly recognize how many variable displays are on hold.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, two types of drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are provided, a “weak pattern” and a “strong pattern”. The lottery ratios of the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" of the movable accessories 87 and 88 will be described later.

In the "weak pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88, the cockpit display area Db is not covered, and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol are in a visible state. Although not shown, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in a "weak pattern", the character symbol and the like are predetermined in the third symbol display device 81 in conjunction with the drive of the movable accessories 87 and 88. The first effect (for example, the effect of fighting while avoiding the movable characters 87 and 88) is configured to be performed. Therefore, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the "weak pattern", the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display weak pattern command to notify the display control device 114 of the driving mode. It is configured. When the display control device 114 receives the display weak pattern command, the display control device 114 recognizes that the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the "weak pattern", and the "weak pattern" of the movable accessories 87 and 88. It is configured to execute the display control of the first effect according to the timing of driving by.

In the "strong pattern" of the movable accessories 87 and 88, the cockpit display area Db is covered by the left movable accessory 87, and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol cannot be visually recognized. Although not shown, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in a "strong pattern", the character symbol and the like are predetermined in the third symbol display device 81 in conjunction with the drive of the movable accessories 87 and 88. The second effect (for example, the effect cut by the movable characters 87 and 88) is configured to be performed. Therefore, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern", the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display strong pattern command to notify the display control device 114 of the driving mode. It is configured. The display control device 114 recognizes that each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven by the "strong pattern" when the display strong pattern command is received, and recognizes that the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern" of the movable accessories 87 and 88. It is configured to execute the display control of the second effect according to the timing of driving by.

As described above, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is configured so that the drive pattern of the "weak pattern" is extended and driven to be the drive pattern of the "strong pattern". That is, the "strong pattern" drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven with the content including the "weak pattern" drive pattern. Therefore, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven, the player decides whether the drive pattern ends with a "weak pattern" or whether the drive is extended to a "strong pattern". Focusing on the drive patterns of objects 87 and 88, it is interesting to know which drive pattern the drive pattern will be.

The drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 may be provided with three or more types of drive patterns instead of two types of "weak pattern" and "strong pattern". Specifically, a "medium pattern" may be provided, and a three-stage drive pattern may be configured to suggest a jackpot expectation.

Further, the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 may be configured by completely different drive patterns. Specifically, it may be composed of a pattern in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 rotate around the tip of the sword and a pattern in which the tip of the handle rotates as an axis.

Further, the movable accessories 87 and 88 may be arranged in a position invisible to the player at the initial position. With this configuration, the initially invisible movable accessories 87 and 88 appear on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the appearance surprises the player and produces a powerful effect. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment stores a scenario table 222f different from the scenario table 222f of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and further, at least the accessory lottery table 222g is stored. It is stored.

Here, the scenario table 222f of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to be able to execute the "pending change notice" at the execution timing after being driven by the "strong pattern" with respect to the execution symbol. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to select the execution timing of "after driving the strong pattern" as the execution timing of the "hold change notice" for the execution symbol. Specifically, when the execution of the "hold change notice" is determined, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f, and executes the "after strong pattern drive" execution timing. The execution timing of 1 is determined from the execution timings of the "pending change notice" including. FIG. 41 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of the third embodiment.

In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of FIG. 41, in each of the number of reserved balls (4 patterns of the number of reserved balls "1" to "4") of the fluctuation effect at the time when the vertical row determines the "hold change notice", each Each of the number of reserved balls is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns, which are divided according to the display mode of the "pending change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). In addition, as the timing for the row to execute (start) the "hold change notice", four patterns at the time of displaying or shifting to each hold ball number (hold ball number "1" to "4") and the hold ball There are a total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (at shift)", "before reach", "after reach", or "after hold deletion" when the number is "0" (during the variable effect execution). Each is divided. Then, the value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the "holding change notice" in the third embodiment, the display mode of the determined "holding change notice" is executed (appearing) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each of the above situation patterns. It is set to do.

Specifically, for example, when "after strong pattern drive" is selected for the number of reserved balls "0" (during the execution of the fluctuation effect) as the timing for executing (starting) the "hold change notice", that is the case. A state in which the left movable accessory 87 is being driven in a "strong pattern" during the variation effect in which the "hold change notice" is determined, that is, the execution symbol of the cockpit display area Db by the left movable accessory 87. When the "hold change notice" of "after strong pattern drive" is executed in the execution symbol and then the left movable accessory 87 returns to the original position, the "hold change notice" is issued. The executed execution symbol is configured to be visible again by the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the "holding change notice" is a command for the number of holding balls transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. In this case, a lottery is performed in the voice lamp control device 113, and it is determined whether or not to execute the "pending change notice". When the execution of the "holding change notice" is decided, first, the number of held balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "holding change notice" are grasped. Then, when the fluctuation effect indicated by the hold ball number command is a big hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "hold change notice" at the time of the big hit is referred to by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the big hit scenario table 222f1. ) Is determined.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, situation patterns of the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” and each display mode of the “hold change notice” are prepared, and each is prepared. The value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the status pattern.

First, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “1” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated, the reserved symbols of "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls is "1" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "2" to "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 41).

As shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for "start" of "0" number of reserved balls and "5-5" for "before reach" of "0" number of reserved balls. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-49 ”for“ after strong pattern drive ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls, number of reserved balls It is "50 to 99" for "1" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 5% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after driving a strong pattern" is 35% and the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 50%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the jackpot is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue". The timing at the time of display is most easily selected (50%), and then after each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven by the "strong pattern" and the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become invisible. It is set so that the timing at which it becomes visible again can be easily selected (35%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" of the number of reserved balls "0" and "before reach" of the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 89" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "90 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after driving a strong pattern" is 60% and the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 10%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is each movable combination when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "1" and the display mode is "red". The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern" and become visible again after the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become invisible is set so as to be most easily selected (60%). There is.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" of "0" reserved balls and "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "5-9", "10-49" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, and "50-99" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls. ing. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" in the "holding change notice" does not appear in the holding symbol, but can appear only in the execution symbol, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, the number of reserved balls is "1". The value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 40% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after driving a strong pattern" is 50% and the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 0%. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" in the "holding change notice" does not appear in the holding symbol, but can appear only in the execution symbol, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, the number of reserved balls is "1". The value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is each movable combination when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow". The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern" and become visible again after the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become invisible is most likely to be selected (50%), and then " The timing during execution of "reach display" is set so that it is easy to select (40%). The display mode of the "rainbow" in the "holding change notice" at the time of a big hit is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of holding balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice". Therefore, the description of the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "pending change notice" at the time of a big hit in the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is omitted.

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “2” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated, the reserved symbols of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls is "2" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "3" or "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 41).

As shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for "start" of "0" number of reserved balls and "5-5" for "before reach" of "0" number of reserved balls. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-39 ”for“ after strong pattern drive ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls, number of reserved balls It is "40 to 49" for "1" and "50 to 99" for "2" of reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 5% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After strong pattern drive" is 25%, the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 50%. It is set to be a ratio.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the hold symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue". The timing at the time of display is most easily selected (50%), and then after each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven by the "strong pattern" and the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become invisible. It is set so that the timing at which it becomes visible again can be easily selected (25%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" of the number of reserved balls "0" and "before reach" of the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 79" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "80 to 89" for the number of balls "1" and "90 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "2".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls 50% for "after strong pattern drive", 10% for the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted), and 10% for the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed). It is set to be a ratio.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is each movable combination when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "2" and the display mode is "red". The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern" and become visible again after the execution symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become invisible is set so as to be most easily selected (50%). There is.

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “3” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated, the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, at the time when the number of reserved balls is "3" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d is against the number of reserved balls "4" when the "hold change notice" is executed. The value of is not assigned (see FIG. 41).

As shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for "start" of "0" number of reserved balls and "5-5" for "before reach" of "0" number of reserved balls. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-29 ”for“ after strong pattern drive ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls, number of reserved balls It is "30 to 39" for "1", "40 to 49" for "2" of reserved balls, and "50 to 99" for "3" of reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 5% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After strong pattern drive" is 15%, the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls is 10%. The number "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 50%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the hold symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue". The timing at the time of display is most easily selected (50%), and then after each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven by the "strong pattern" and the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become invisible. It is set so that the timing at which it becomes visible again can be easily selected (15%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" of the number of reserved balls "0" and "before reach" of the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 69" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "70 to 79" for the number of balls "1", "80 to 89" for the number of reserved balls "2", and "90 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "3". ..

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After strong pattern drive" is 40%, the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the reserved symbol is "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is each movable combination when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "3" and the display mode is "red". The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern" and become visible again after the execution symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become invisible is set so as to be most easily selected (40%). There is.

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “4” will be described.

As shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for "start" of "0" number of reserved balls and "5-5" for "before reach" of "0" number of reserved balls. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 15-19 ”for“ after strong pattern drive ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls, number of reserved balls "20-29" for "1", "30-39" for "2" reserved balls, "40-49" for "3" reserved balls, "4" for reserved balls It is "50 to 99" for "" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% of "start", 5% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 5% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After strong pattern drive" is 5%, the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls is 10%. The selection ratio is set so that the number "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number "4" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 50%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is the hold symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (50%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" of the number of reserved balls "0" and "before reach" of the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 59" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved "60-69" for the number of balls "1", "70-79" for the number of reserved balls "2", "80-89" for the number of reserved balls "3", the number of reserved balls It is "90 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After strong pattern drive" is 30%, the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the reserved symbol is The selection ratio is set so that "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10% and "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is each movable combination when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "4" and the display mode is "red". The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern" and become visible again after the execution symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become invisible is set so as to be most easily selected (30%). There is.

In this way, when the "hold change notice" is performed in the hold symbol and the execution symbol indicating the fluctuation effect that generates the jackpot, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern" to drive the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db. In addition, the "hold change notice" can be displayed (executed) at the timing when the hold symbol becomes visible again after it becomes invisible. As a result, when the notice target (change target. In the third embodiment, the execution symbol) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or when the notice target is newly displayed. Compared with the case of notifying, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target. In other words, by making the object to be announced invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot). By making them aware, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the loss scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the loss scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment. In the loss scenario table 222f2 of FIG. 42, as in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, each number of reserved balls (4 patterns of 1 to 4 reserved balls) of the fluctuation effect at the time when the vertical row determines the “hold change notice”. ), Each of the number of reserved balls is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns, which are divided according to the display mode of the "pending change notice" (3 patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). There is. In addition, as the timing for the row to execute (start) the "hold change notice", four patterns at the time of displaying or shifting to each hold ball number (hold ball number "1" to "4") and the hold ball There are a total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (at shift)", "before reach", "after reach", or "after hold deletion" when the number is "0" (during the variable effect execution). Each is divided. Then, the value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the loss scenario table 222f2, a situation pattern of the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” and each display mode of the “hold change notice” is prepared, and each is prepared. The value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the status pattern. The "rainbow" in the display mode of the "pending change notice" suggests the occurrence of a big hit when the display mode of the "rainbow" appears, and is not selected at the time of loss. Therefore, in the situation pattern of "rainbow" in the scenario table 222f2 for loss, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to any of the number of pending fluctuation effects at the time when the "pending change notice" is determined. Is omitted.

First, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “1” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated, the reserved symbols of "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this loss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls is "1" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "2" to "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 42).

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "10 to 10" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "19", "20-29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30-39" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, number of reserved balls It is "40 to 99" for "1" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after driving a strong pattern" is 10% and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 60%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (60%).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the scenario counter 223d was not assigned to "after hold deletion" in the loss scenario table 222f2, but in the loss scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment, the value of the scenario counter 223d was not assigned. The scenario counter 223d is set to be allocated to the execution timing of "after driving a strong pattern". This is because each movable accessory 87,88 can be executed even in a variable effect of loss, and even if the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 is executed, the "big hit display" is not fixed. Is.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "starting" of "0" reserved balls and "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "20-39", "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "60-69" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "70 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 20% of "start", 20% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 20% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls The selection ratio is set so that "after driving a strong pattern" is 10% and the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 30%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (30%).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “2” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated, the reserved symbols of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this loss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls is "2" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "3" or "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 42).

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "10 to 10" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "19", "20-29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30-39" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, number of reserved balls It is "40 to 49" for "1" and "50 to 99" for "2" of reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls 10% for "after strong pattern drive", 10% for the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted), and 50% for the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed). It is set to be a ratio.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (50%).

Next, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 42 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing and scenario of the "holding change notice" Correspondence with the value of the counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "20 to 39" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. , "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "60-69" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, "after strong pattern drive", number of reserved balls " It is "70 to 79" for "1" and "80 to 99" for "2" of reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 20% of "start", 20% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 20% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls 10% for "after strong pattern drive", 10% for the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted), and 20% for the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed). It is set to be a ratio.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "red". The timing at the time of display and "at the start", "before reach" or "after reach" of the fluctuation effect are set so as to be easily selected (20% each).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “3” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated, the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this loss scenario table 222f2, at the time when the number of reserved balls is "3" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d is against the number of reserved balls "4" when the "hold change notice" is executed. The value of is not assigned (see FIG. 42).

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "10 to 10" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "19", "20-29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30-39" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, number of reserved balls It is "40 to 49" for "1", "50 to 59" for "2" of reserved balls, and "60 to 99" for "3" of reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After strong pattern drive" is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the reserved balls are The number "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 40%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "starting" of "0" reserved balls and "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "20-39", "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "60-69" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "70 to 79" for the number of balls "1", "80 to 89" for the number of reserved balls "2", and "90 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "3". ..

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 20% of "start", 20% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 20% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After strong pattern drive" is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the reserved symbol is "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the loss is the change effect when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "3" and the display mode is "red". "At the start", "Before reach" or "After reach" is set so that it is easy to select (20% each).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “4” will be described.

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. Correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "start" of "0" reserved balls and "10 to 10" for "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "19", "20-29" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30-39" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, number of reserved balls "40-49" for "1", "50-59" for "2" reserved balls, "60-69" for "3" reserved balls, "4" for reserved balls It is "70 to 99" for "" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% of "start", 10% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After strong pattern drive" is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the reserved balls are The selection ratio is set so that the number "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number "4" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 30%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (30%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "starting" of "0" reserved balls and "before reach" of "0" reserved balls. "20-39", "40-49" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "50-59" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved "60-69" for the number of balls "1", "70-79" for the number of reserved balls "2", "80-89" for the number of reserved balls "3", the number of reserved balls It is "90 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 20% of "start", 20% of "0" reserved balls "before reach", 10% of "0" reserved balls "after reach", "0" reserved balls "After strong pattern drive" is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the reserved symbol is The selection ratio is set so that "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10% and "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation effect is the change effect when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "4" and the display mode is "red". "At the start" or "Before reach" is set so that it is easy to select (20% each).

In this way, even if the same "hold change notice (for example," blue ")" is used when the fluctuation effect is lost and when the jackpot is hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) is different, so that the "hold change notice" is given. The jackpot expectation level can be different depending on the display mode of "" and the timing at which the display mode appears. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the suggestion content of the jackpot expectation degree by the "hold change notice" depending on the display mode and the appearance timing of the "hold change notice", and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 40. In addition to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment includes at least a drive lottery counter 223 g, a normal weak flag 223h, a super weak flag 223i, and a super strong flag 223j. It is provided.

The drive lottery counter 223g is a counter that draws lots for the presence / absence of drive and the drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110. The look-ahead process can be executed based on the value and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead processing, the effect mode of the variable effect indicated by the hold ball number command is grasped, and based on the effect mode, the drive lottery counter 223 g and the accessory lottery table 222 g drive the movable accessories 87 and 88 and the drive pattern. Is drawn.

The drive lottery counter 223g is sequentially added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter update processing (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113, and the maximum value is added. (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the drive lottery counter 223g is updated (for example, 1 addition) once for each loop of the main process (see S1111 in FIG. 28). In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the effect mode of the variable effect indicated by the hold ball number command is grasped, and the drive lottery counter is based on the effect mode. With reference to the value of 223 g and the accessory lottery table 222 g, the presence / absence of drive and the drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are drawn (see S1363 in FIG. 48).

Here, the accessory lottery table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the accessory lottery table 222g. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the accessory lottery table 222g based on the value of the drive lottery counter 223g at that time, and each movable accessory 87, Whether or not the 88 is driven and the drive pattern are determined. As shown in FIG. 43, the accessory lottery table 222g is grouped based on the selected production mode.

Specifically, it is referred to when the "non-reach (shortened and normal)" production mode at the time of loss is determined, and when the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss is determined. For "normal reach: normal time" and for "super reach: normal time" and "super reach: for super time", which are referred to when the production mode of "super reach" at the time of loss is decided, and at the time of loss Refer to when the "special reach" production mode is determined in "Special reach: normal time" and "special reach: special time", and when the "normal reach" production mode in the jackpot is determined. For "normal reach: normal time" and for "super reach: normal time" and "super reach: for super time", which are referred to when the production mode of "super reach" at the time of big hit is decided, and at the time of big hit It is divided into "special reach: normal time" and "special reach: special time", which are referred to when the "special reach" production mode is determined, and "special variation" at the time of big hit. Then, possible values of the drive lottery counter 223 g are associated with each of the divided groups.

In the accessory lottery table 222g, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g is not assigned to the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss. This is because when each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is to be driven in a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern", a certain driving time is required from the start of the driving to the end of the driving in any of the driving patterns. .. The "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss is set so that the fluctuation time is relatively short (for example, 3 seconds in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode and 10 seconds in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode). This is because it does not have an effect width for driving each of the movable accessories 87 and 88.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the effect time for each variation element in the variation effect will be described. FIG. 44 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect time for each variable element of the variable effect, and FIG. 44 (b) shows the “weak pattern” and the “strong pattern” of the movable accessories 87 and 88. It is a figure which showed an example of the drive time. The variable element constitutes a part of the variable effect of 1, and each variable element is combined to form the variable effect of 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as the fluctuation elements, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "pseudo-gase", the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream 1", and the "pseudo-ream" The variable element of "2", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach", the variable element of "re-variation" and the variable element of "movie" are provided.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" of the third embodiment is performed for 3 seconds at the beginning of the variable effect when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, and " When an effect mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode (for example, a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode) is selected, the variable effect is performed for 7 seconds at the beginning.

The variable element of the "low speed fluctuation" of the third embodiment is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, and the effect mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode (for example, "" When the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode) is selected, it is performed for 3 seconds after the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation".

In the variable element of the "pseudo-gase" of the third embodiment, the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" is performed for 10 seconds after the variable element of the first "low-speed fluctuation", and the variable element of the "pseudo-ream 1" is 1. After the first "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element, it is performed for 20 seconds together with the "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element, and the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream 2" is "pseudo" after the first "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element. It is performed for 30 seconds together with the fluctuation element of "variation".

The "normal reach" variable element of the third embodiment is performed for 5 seconds after the "low speed variation and the like" variable element. Further, the variable element of the "super reach" of the third embodiment is performed for 10 seconds after the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach". Further, the variable element of the "special reach" of the third embodiment is performed for 20 seconds after the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach". Further, the variable element of the "re-variation" of the third embodiment is performed for 10 seconds after any "reach display". Further, the variable element of the "movie" of the third embodiment is performed for 40 seconds after the variable element of the "slow fluctuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the "weak pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven from the initial position (standing position) to the driving position (tilting position), and then again in the initial position (standing position). It is a drive pattern that takes 3 seconds to return to the position). Specifically, the "weak pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 is 1 second for moving from the initial position to the drive position, 1 second for maintaining the state of the drive position, and 1 second for moving from the drive position to the initial position. It is a drive pattern performed for a total of 3 seconds, which is seconds.

Further, the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 is driven from the initial position (standing position) to the driving position (tilting position), and then it takes 8 seconds to return to the initial position (standing position) again. It is a pattern. Specifically, the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 is 2 seconds for moving from the initial position to the driving position, 4 seconds for maintaining the state of the driving position, and 2 seconds for moving from the driving position to the initial position. It is a drive pattern performed for a total of 8 seconds, which is seconds.

Therefore, since the driving time of the "weak pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is as short as 3 seconds, each variation of the "normal reach" variable element and the "super reach" variable element shown in FIG. 44 (a). It can be executed on the element. On the other hand, since the driving time of the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 is as long as 8 seconds, it is executed in the variable element of "high speed fluctuation", the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", and the variable element of "normal reach". It is a drive pattern that cannot be done.

Here, with reference to FIG. 45, the drive patterns and drive timings of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the variation effect will be described. FIG. 45 is a time chart showing the drive time and drive timing of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in each variation effect, and FIG. 45 (a) shows each movement in the variation element of the “normal reach” in the third embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the relationship of the "weak pattern" of the accessory 87,88, and FIG. 45 (b) shows the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 in the variable element of "super reach". 45 (c) is a time chart showing the relationship with the “weak pattern” and the “strong pattern” of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the variable element of the “special reach”. Is.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), "normal reach only (" E201H "or" E501H ")" has "high-speed fluctuation" variable elements, "low-speed fluctuation" variable elements, and "normal reach" as variable elements. It is composed of variable elements of. The drive pattern and drive timing of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in this "normal reach only (" E201H "or" E501H ")" are only one type of the "weak pattern" at the time of executing the variable element of the "normal reach". It is provided. This is because the variable element of "normal reach" is executed only for 5 seconds in the variable effect of "normal reach only (" E201H "or" E501H ")", so that the "strong pattern (8 seconds)" of each movable accessory 87,88 is executed. This is because "" cannot be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), "super reach only (" E301H "or" E601H ")" has, as variable elements, a variable element of "high-speed fluctuation", a variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", and a variable element of "low-speed fluctuation". It is composed of a variable element of "normal reach" and a variable element of "super reach". Then, the drive patterns and drive timings of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in this "super reach only (" E301H "or" E601H ")" are the "weak pattern" at the time of executing the variable element of the "normal reach" and the "weak pattern". There are three types of "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" at the time of execution of the variable element of "super reach". This is because, in the variation effect of "super reach only (" E301H "or" E601H ")", the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 cannot be executed by the variation element of "normal reach". This is because, in the variable element of "super reach", since the variable element of "super reach" is performed for 10 seconds, the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), "special reach only (" E401H "or" E701H ")" has, as variable elements, a variable element of "high-speed fluctuation", a variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", and a variable element of "low-speed fluctuation". It is composed of a variable element of "normal reach" and a variable element of "special reach". The drive patterns and drive timings of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in this "special reach only (" E401H "or" E701H ")" are the "weak pattern" at the time of executing the variable element of the "normal reach" and the "weak pattern". There are three types of "special reach" variable elements, "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" at the time of execution. This is because, in the variation effect of "special reach only (" E401H "or" E701H ")", the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 cannot be executed by the variation element of "normal reach". This is because, in the variable element of the "special reach", since the variable element of the "special reach" is performed for 20 seconds, the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 can be executed.

Therefore, the "weak pattern" drive pattern of each movable accessory 87,88 can be driven at the time of execution of the "normal reach" variable element, the "super reach" variable element, and the "special reach" variable element. The "strong pattern" drive pattern is configured to be driveable only when the "super reach" variable element and the "special reach" variable element are executed.

In this way, since the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87,88 is completed in each variable element (initial position → drive position → initial position), the effect content of each variable element and each movable accessory 87,88 It is possible to execute an effect linked with the driving content, and it is possible to execute a powerful effect that is easy to understand with the third symbol display device 81 and each of the movable accessories 87 and 88.

A drive pattern may be provided in which the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are executed across the variable elements. With this configuration, it is possible to freely set the drive start of each movable accessory 87,88, making it difficult to predict when each movable accessory 87,88 will start moving, and providing an unexpected effect. Then, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. As described above, in the accessory lottery table 222g, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g is not assigned to the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are set not to be driven in the "non-reach" effect mode.

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, only "normal time" can be selected as the drive timing for the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence between the value of the drive lottery counter 223 g and the drive pattern in the “normal reach” effect mode is “0 to 89” for “none” and “weak pattern” for “normal”. On the other hand, it is "90 to 99". Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern", it is described as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, 90% of the patterns are "none" in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven, and 10 are the drive patterns of the "weak pattern" in the "normal state". %, The drive pattern of the "strong pattern" of "normal time" is set to be selected at a ratio of 0%. Therefore, in the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the "none" pattern in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is easily selected (90%). It has become.

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, "normal time" and "super time" can be selected as the drive timing for the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence between the value of the drive lottery counter 223 g and the drive pattern in the “super reach” effect mode is “0 to 69” for “none” and “weak pattern” for “normal”. On the other hand, it is "70 to 79", "80 to 89" for the "weak pattern" of "super time", and "90 to 99" for the "strong pattern" of "super time". Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" of "normal time", it is described as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, 70% of the "none" patterns in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven, and the "weak pattern" drive pattern of the "normal time" are 10%, "strong pattern" drive pattern in "normal time" is 0%, "weak pattern" drive pattern in "super time" is 10%, drive pattern of "strong pattern" in "super time" is 10% It is set to be selected in the ratio of ,. Therefore, in the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the "none" pattern in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is easily selected (70%). ).

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, "normal time" and "special time" can be selected as the drive timing for the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence between the value of the drive lottery counter 223 g and the drive pattern in the “special reach” effect mode is “0 to 49” for “none” and “weak pattern” for “normal”. On the other hand, it is "50 to 79", "80 to 89" for the "weak pattern" of "special time", and "90 to 99" for the "strong pattern" of "special time". Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" of "normal time", it is described as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the "none" pattern in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is 50%, and the "weak pattern" drive pattern in the "normal time" is 30%, "strong pattern" drive pattern in "normal time" is 0%, "weak pattern" drive pattern in "special time" is 10%, drive pattern of "strong pattern" in "special time" is 10% It is set to be selected in the ratio of ,. Therefore, in the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 selected in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the "none" pattern in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is easily selected (50%). ).

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, only "normal time" can be selected as the drive timing for the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence between the value of the drive lottery counter 223 g and the drive pattern in the “normal reach” effect mode is “0 to 29” for “none” and “weak pattern” for “normal”. On the other hand, it is "30 to 99". Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern", it is described as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, 30% of the "none" patterns in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven, and 70 are the "weak pattern" drive patterns of the "normal time". %, The drive pattern of the "strong pattern" of "normal time" is set to be selected at a ratio of 0%. Therefore, in the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the drive pattern in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "weak pattern" in the "normal state" is selected. It is set to be easy to do (70%).

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, "normal time" and "super time" can be selected as the drive timing for the "super reach" effect mode at the time of big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence between the value of the drive lottery counter 223 g and the drive pattern in the “super reach” effect mode is “0 to 19” for “none” and “weak pattern” for “normal”. On the other hand, it is "20 to 49", "50 to 69" for the "weak pattern" of "super time", and "70 to 99" for the "strong pattern" of "super time". Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" of "normal time", it is described as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of big hit is selected, 20% of the "none" patterns in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven, and the "weak pattern" drive pattern of the "normal time" are 30%, "strong pattern" drive pattern in "normal time" is 0%, "weak pattern" drive pattern in "super time" is 20%, drive pattern of "strong pattern" in "super time" is 30% It is set to be selected in the ratio of ,. Therefore, in the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the drive pattern is driven by the "weak pattern" in the "normal time" and the "strong" in the "super time". The drive pattern to be driven by "Pattern" is set so that it is easy to select (30% each).

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, "normal time" and "special time" can be selected as the drive timing for the "special reach" effect mode at the time of big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence between the value of the drive lottery counter 223 g and the drive pattern in the “special reach” effect mode is “0 to 9” for “none” and “weak pattern” for “normal”. On the other hand, it is "10 to 19", "20 to 49" for the "weak pattern" of "special time", and "50 to 99" for the "strong pattern" of "special time". Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" of "normal time", it is described as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of big hit is selected, the "none" pattern in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is 10%, and the "weak pattern" drive pattern in the "normal time" is 10%, "strong pattern" drive pattern in "normal time" is 0%, "weak pattern" drive pattern in "special time" is 30%, drive pattern of "strong pattern" in "special time" is 50% It is set to be selected in the ratio of ,. Therefore, in the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 selected in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of big hit, the drive pattern to be driven in the "strong pattern" at the "special time" is easily selected (50%). It has become.

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g is not assigned to the "special variation" effect mode at the time of big hit. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are set not to be driven in the "special variation" effect mode. This is because, in the "special variation" production mode, the variable element of the "movie" is executed, and the production of the variable element of the "movie" is the "battle production" or the "special reach" of the variable element of the "super reach". This is because it is not a production corresponding to the driving mode of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88, as in the "competitive production" of the variable element of. Therefore, when the "special variation" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven.

In this way, using the accessory lottery table 222 g and the drive lottery counter 223 g, the drive pattern and drive timing of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 can be selected from a plurality of preset patterns, and at the time of a big hit and a loss. By making the selection ratios different depending on the time, the suggested contents of the jackpot expectation by driving the movable accessories 87 and 88 are diversified according to the drive pattern and the drive timing of the movable accessories 87 and 88. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. The hold information storage area 223e is information for performing look-ahead processing, that is, the first random number counters C1 and 1 that are acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning and transmitted by the hold ball number command. Each value of the hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, the hold change information indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice", and the scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "hold change notice", respectively. This is an area for storing drive pattern information indicating the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform a look-ahead process (hold display setting process (hold display setting process (hold display setting process)). (See FIG. 48)) is executed. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold change information, the scenario data, and the drive pattern information obtained by the look-ahead processing in the hold change information storage area 223e5, the scenario data storage area 223e6, and the drive pattern information in the hold information storage area 223e. It is stored in each of the areas 223e10, and the "pending change notice" is executed based on the values stored in the areas 223e5, 223e6, and 223e10.

Here, with reference to FIG. 46, the details of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f according to the third embodiment. In the configuration of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the third embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment is that the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f are located in the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f, respectively. , 88 Drive pattern information storage areas 223e10, 223f10 for storing drive pattern information, and hold erase information storage areas 223e7, 223f7 and revariation information storage areas 223e8, 223f8 are provided. There is no point. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Since the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the third embodiment are not provided with the hold erase information storage areas 223e7, 223f7 and the revariation information storage areas 223e8, 223f8, the hold of the first embodiment is held. The storage capacity is reduced as compared with the information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b updated by the hold ball number command in the hold information storage first to fourth areas of the hold information storage area 223e. A look-ahead process (hold display setting process (see FIG. 48)) is performed based on each value of each counter storage area 223e1 to 223e4 in the hold information storage area X corresponding to the above, and is generated based on the result of this look-ahead process. The hold change information, the scenario data, and the drive pattern information are stored in the respective storage areas 223e5, 223e6, and 223e10 of the same hold information storage X area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the shift process in the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. That is, the reserved variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variation effect in time is started. Therefore, the reserved information storage first area corresponding to the first reserved variation effect is started. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 are stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed. , 223f10.

In addition, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 of the hold information storage second area are stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e1 of the hold information storage first area. Moved to 223e6, 223e10, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in each storage area 223e1 to 223e6, 223e10 of the hold information storage third area are stored in the hold information storage second area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 of the holding information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10, and the holding information is stored. It is moved to each storage area 223e1 to 223e6, 223e10 of the storage third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f. Further, in the hold information storage first to fourth areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 are stored, respectively. Will be done. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the hold information storage area 223e. To.

In the third embodiment, in the look-ahead process at the time of receiving the hold ball number command, the value of each counter C1 or the like indicated by the hold ball number command is determined, and based on the determination result, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 The drive pattern information is configured to be stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10. Instead of this, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the movable accessories 87 and 88 indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command are determined, and various processes are executed based on the determination result. It may be configured. With this configuration, it becomes impossible to store the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the look-ahead processing, but the drive pattern information storage area is stored in the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. It is not necessary to provide 223e10 and 223f10, and the storage capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 40. The normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, and the super strong flag 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment are flags indicating the drive timings of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the ON state. .. The normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, and the super strong flag 223j are set to off as initial values when the power is turned on.

In the third embodiment, when the hold ball number command is received, a drive lottery for each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is performed (see S1362 in FIG. 48), and when the drive lottery is won, a drive pattern indicating the drive pattern is shown. The information is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10 of the hold information storage X area indicated by the hold ball number command. Then, at the start of the variation effect, the winning drive timing is determined, and either the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, or the super strong flag 223j is turned on for each drive timing (S1453 to S1455 in FIG. 49). reference). Further, after driving each movable accessory 87,88 based on the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i or the super strong flag 223j, the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i or the super strong flag 223j is set to off. (See S1606, S1611, and S1615 in FIG. 51).

The voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment is executed in the variation effect in the accessory drive process (see S1151 in FIG. 28), which is executed in the main process at the time of executing the variation effect. The elements are confirmed with the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, or the super strong flag 223j, and the drive control of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is performed.

Specifically, a timer (not shown) is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the MPU 221 grasps the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect to be executed. Then, when the normal weak flag 223h is turned on, the MPU 221 is executing the fluctuation element of "normal reach" according to the grasped fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time (for example, 1 second from the start of the fluctuation element of "normal reach". Later), a value is set (for example, "11000") so that the timer times out. Then, the value of the timer is updated (subtracted) at the start of the fluctuation effect, and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in a "weak pattern" at the timing when the timer is timed up (for example, "0"). To do.

Further, when the super weak flag 223i is turned on, the MPU 221 is executing the fluctuation element of "super reach" or the fluctuation element of "special reach" depending on the grasped fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time (for example, "super reach"). A value is set (for example, "16000") so that the timer time-ups at the variable element of "" or "1 second after the start of the variable element of" special reach "). Then, the value of the timer is updated (subtracted) at the start of the fluctuation effect, and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in a "weak pattern" at the timing when the timer is timed up (for example, "0"). To do.

Further, when the super strong flag 223j is turned on, the MPU 221 is executing the fluctuation element of "super reach" or the fluctuation element of "special reach" depending on the grasped fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time (for example, "super reach"). A value is set (for example, "16000") so that the timer time-ups at the variable element of "" or "1 second after the start of the variable element of" special reach "). Then, the value of the timer is updated (subtracted) at the start of the fluctuation effect, and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in a "strong pattern" at the timing when the timer time-ups (for example, "0").

The drive start timings of the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the timing that has passed a predetermined time (for example, 1 second later) from the start of the variable element of each reach. However, instead of this configuration, the start timing may be different for each drive pattern. With this configuration, the player plays the game while expecting whether or not the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven at each timing, so that the chances of gaining interest can be increased.

The input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a left movable accessory 87, a right movable accessory 88, and the like. Each is connected.

The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 drives the left movable accessory 87 by a motor for the left accessory (not shown) according to the setting status of the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, and the super strong flag 223j. The right movable accessory 88 is driven by a motor for the right accessory (not shown).

As described above, the drive pattern of the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is configured to be executed only when the variable element of the "super reach" or the "special reach" is executed. With this configuration, for example, by allocating a large amount of execution timing of the "pending change notice" to the latter half of the fluctuation effect ("after reach" or "after driving a strong pattern"), the latter half of the variation effect It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting the occurrence (appearance) of the "pending change notice" that raises the expectation of the big hit. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game while expecting a big hit until the latter half of the variable effect, the player can be given a hobby for a long period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to perform the accessory drive process (S1151) in the main process in order to control the drive of the movable accessories 87 and 88.

Specifically, in the process of S1101 of the main process of the third embodiment, when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101: Yes), the first execution is performed. Similar to the embodiment, after the processing of S1102 to S1108 is performed, the processing is transferred to S1151. In the process of S1151, the accessory drive process for driving the movable accessories 87 and 88 is performed (S1151), and then the process shifts to the variation effect process of S1109. The details of this accessory drive process (S1151) will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. Further, the variation effect processing (S1109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the hold display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a hold display setting process, which is one process of a command determination process (see S1110 in FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 performs this hold display setting process when receiving the hold ball number command, and when it is decided to execute the "hold change notice", the hold change information and the scenario. The data is stored in each of the storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the hold information storage X area indicated by the hold ball number command. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven in the variation effect indicated by the reserved ball number command. As a result of the determination, when each movable accessory 87,88 is driven in the variation effect, the drive pattern information indicating the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87,88 is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10. It is configured.

Specifically, in the process of S1303 of the hold display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the hold ball number command received this time (. S1303). As a result of the determination, if the execution lottery of the "pending change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "holding change notice" is not executed. The Null data is stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 and the scenario data storage area 223e6 in the X area (S1361), respectively, and the processing is shifted to S1362.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1303, if the execution lottery of the "pending change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), the processing of S1304 and S1305 is performed as in the first embodiment, and the pending change information and the scenario data are stored. It is stored in each storage area 223e5, 223e6 of the hold information storage X area indicated by the hold ball number command, and the process shifts to S1362.

In the process of S1362, it is determined whether or not the drive lottery for driving the movable accessories 87 and 88 is won in the variation effect indicated by the reserved ball number command received this time (S1362). This determination refers to the drive lottery counter 223 g and the accessory lottery table 222 g, and when the value of the drive lottery counter 223 g corresponds to "none" of the accessory lottery table 222 g corresponding to the effect mode of the corresponding variable effect. Determines that the drive lottery has not been won, while if the value of the drive lottery counter 223g corresponds to the "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" of the accessory lottery table 222g, it is determined that the drive lottery has been won. ..

As a result of the determination, if the drive lottery for each movable accessory 87,88 is won (S1362: Yes), each movable accessory 87,88 is driven by the variation effect, so that the drive pattern information indicating the drive pattern is shown. Is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10 of the hold information storage X area indicated by the hold ball number command (S1363), and the process shifts to S1313. By the processing of S1363, it is possible to recognize the driving mode and the driving timing of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the variation effect. If it is determined in the process of S1362 that the drive lottery for each movable accessory 87,88 has not been won (S1362: No), each movable accessory 87,88 is not executed, so that each movable accessory 87,88 is not executed. In order to erase the information related to the driving of 87 and 88, the Null data is stored in the driving pattern information storage area 223e10 of the hold information storage X area (S1364), and the processing is shifted to S1313.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the hold ball number command is received, the hold erase information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the change effect and the change element of "re-variation" in the change effect are lined up. It does not discriminate and store re-variation information indicating whether or not it is used. In the third embodiment, the "hold change notice" can be executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is made invisible by the movable accessories 87 and 88, and the "hold change notice" can be executed as in the first embodiment. This is because it is not necessary to perform a process of determining the pending erasure information and the revariation information in order to determine whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed "after erasing". As a result, the capacity of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 221 is reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the variation effect processing (S1109) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a variation effect process (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment.

This variation effect process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 47), and is first stored in the hold information storage first area of the hold information storage area 223e in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. A process of shifting various information to the execution information storage area 223f and shifting the information stored in the hold information storage areas 2 to 4 to the hold information storage areas 1 to 3 is performed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, a display error command is generated and this command is displayed and controlled. Performs the process of setting for transmission to the device 114. Further, when each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven in the variable effect to be executed, the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, or the super strong flag 223j is set according to the driving pattern. Further, when it is the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in the execution symbol and the hold symbol, various commands related to each execution timing of the "hold change notice" are generated, and these commands are transmitted to the display control device 114. Perform the process to set to.

In the variation effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. Therefore, this fluctuation effect processing Is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the processes of S1402 to S1410 are performed as in the first embodiment. , The process shifts to S1451.

In the process of S1451, it is determined whether or not each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven in the variation effect to be executed from now on (S1451). This determination is performed based on the drive pattern information stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the variable effect to be executed from now on (S1451: Yes), then the drive pattern and the drive timing of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are determined. (S1452).

As a result of the determination of S1452, if the drive pattern and drive timing of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is the "weak pattern" in the "normal time" (S1452: "weak pattern in the normal time"), the normal weak flag 223h is turned on. The setting (S1453) is performed, and the process shifts to S1411. If the drive pattern and drive timing of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are the "weak pattern" in the "super time" (S1452: "weak pattern in the super time"), the super weak flag 223i is set to ON (S1454). ), The process shifts to S1411. Further, if the drive pattern and drive timing of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are the "strong pattern" in the "super time" (S1452: "super strong pattern"), the super strong flag 223j is set to on (S1455). ), The process shifts to S1411. As a result, the set flags 223h to 223j are referred to by the accessory driving process (see S1151 in FIG. 47) described later, and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven at the set timing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the movable accessories 87, 88 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the movable accessories 87, 88 are driven. It is configured to execute an effect (first effect or second effect) in which character symbols and the like are linked. Therefore, when the drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 displays and controls a display drive pattern change command indicating that the drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 has been changed. It is configured to transmit to the device 114. Upon receiving the display drive pattern change command, the display control device 114 recognizes that the movable accessories 87 and 88 have been changed from the "weak pattern" to the "strong pattern", and recognizes that each movable accessory 87 has been changed. , 88 is configured to execute the display control of the second effect according to the drive timing by the "strong pattern".

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the execution symbol change processing (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an execution symbol change process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment. This execution symbol change processing is executed in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 49) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 47), and the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. It is done to execute "pending change notice" in.

In the execution symbol change processing of the third embodiment, as a result of the determination of S1501, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "0" number of reserved balls and "strong pattern drive". If the data indicates "after" (S1501: "after driving the strong pattern"), in order to confirm whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed after driving the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the "strong pattern". , It is determined whether or not each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is executed in the "strong pattern" in the variation effect (S1561). This determination is based on the process of S1363 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 48), and the drive pattern information stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f is determined.

As a result of the determination in S1561, when the drive pattern information of the "strong pattern" is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1561: Yes), the "strong" of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is "strong". Since the "hold change notice" can be executed after the "pattern" is driven, the display control device is used to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f. A change command is set after the strong pattern for display toward 114 (S1562), and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 49).

The display strong pattern post-change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). Will be sent. The display control device 114, which has received the change command after the strong pattern for display, executes the execution symbol display area Db0 at the timing when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern" and the cockpit display area Db is covered in the variation effect. The display control is performed so that the execution symbol is changed (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") in the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" with respect to the execution symbol displayed in. Specifically, each movable accessory 87,88 starts driving 1 second after the start of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach", and the cockpit display area Db 2 seconds after the start of driving. Is covered, and the cockpit display area Db is maintained to be covered by the left movable accessory 87 for 3 seconds thereafter. Therefore, the display mode of the execution symbol is changed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is covered by the left movable accessory 87.

On the other hand, in the process of S1561 when it is determined that the drive pattern information of the "strong pattern" is not stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1561: No), it is performed in the variation effect. Since the cockpit display area Db is not covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88, it is not possible to execute the "pending change notice" of "after driving the strong pattern". Therefore, the process shifts to S1563 in order to change the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 and confirm whether or not the "pending change notice" of "after the strong pattern is driven" can be executed.

In the process of S1563, it is determined whether or not the variable element of "super reach or more" is selected in the variable effect (S1563). This determination determines the variation pattern in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29).

As a result of the determination in S1563, when the variation element of "super reach or more" is not selected in the variation effect (S1563: No), this execution symbol change processing (S1414) without setting the command to change the execution symbol. Is finished, and the process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 49). That is, when "hold change notice" of "after strong pattern drive" is selected, "hold change notice" is not executed in the execution symbol in the fluctuation effect in which "super reach or higher" is not performed. To do. By configuring in this way, if the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is not appropriate, the effect content may be inconsistent by not executing the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol. It is possible to provide the player with a consistent effect.

In the process of S1563, when the variable element of "super reach or higher" is not selected in the variable effect (S1563: No), for example, the process shifts to the process of S1504, and the "pending change notice" is given to the execution symbol. It may be configured to determine whether or not there is an execution timing at which "" can be performed. With this configuration, the selected "pending change notice" can be reliably executed at any execution timing, so the case where the selected "holding change notice" is not executed even though the execution lottery is won. Can be reduced, the execution rate of the "pending change notice" can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S1563, when the variable element of "super reach or higher" is selected in the variable effect (S1563: Yes), the variable element that can drive each movable accessory 87,88 in the "strong pattern". Therefore, in order to change the drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88, the super strong flag 223j is set to ON (S1564). Next, the normal weak flag 223h and the super weak flag 223i are cleared (set to off) (S1565), and the process shifts to S1562. In S1562, as described above, the display strong pattern post-change command is set toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 that has received the change command after the strong pattern for display receives the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 at the timing when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern" in the variation effect. On the other hand, the display control is performed so as to change the execution symbol (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when "hold change notice" of "after strong pattern drive" is selected in the variation effect, "after strong pattern drive" is executed in the variation effect. When the "pending change notice" cannot be executed at the timing, that is, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven by the "strong pattern", the driving pattern of the "strong pattern" can be executed by a variable element (for example). , Determining the presence or absence of variable factors related to "super reach or higher". Then, when it is determined that the drive pattern of the "strong pattern" includes a variable element that can be executed (for example, a variable element of "super reach or higher"), the drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is set to the "strong pattern". To change to.

Therefore, since "strong pattern" is not initially selected as the drive pattern for each of the movable accessories 87 and 88, even if "after strong pattern drive" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", the said Even if it cannot be executed at the execution timing and is changed to another execution timing (for example, "after reach"), it is possible to drive each movable accessory 87,88 in the "strong pattern". If so, the drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is changed to the "strong pattern" so that the cockpit display area Db is invisible to the player, and then the "pending change notice" of "after the strong pattern is driven". Can be executed. With this configuration, when the "hold change notice" of "after strong pattern drive" is selected, the "hold change notice" can be easily executed at the execution timing of the "after strong pattern drive". it can. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Further, when "holding change notice" is performed in the execution symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is obscured by the movable accessories 87 and 88, and the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db becomes invisible. When it becomes visible again, the "pending change notice" can be displayed (executed). As a result, when the notice target (change target. In the third embodiment, the execution symbol) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or when the notice target is newly displayed. Compared with the case of notifying, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target. In particular, since the driving of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is an effect in which the object moves directly, the player pays attention to the movement of the movable accessories 87 and 88. Then, by subtly changing the notice object (while making the notice object invisible) while paying attention to the movements of the movable accessories 87 and 88, the player is first given a sense of discomfort. After that, by recognizing that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big hit), the player is provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect is diversified to enhance the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, when the execution symbol (or the pending symbol) that is the execution target of the "hold change notice" is made invisible, the effect content of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed, but the third symbol display device 81 is By changing the drive patterns of the different movable accessories 87 and 88, it is possible to make the execution symbol (or the hold symbol) that is the execution target of the "hold change notice" invisible. Therefore, when there is no changeable variable element in the fluctuation effect, the "hold change notice" is executed at the initially set execution timing of the "hold change notice" without changing the execution timing of the "hold change notice". be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of the player to perform an unexpected production, diversify the production, and enhance the interest of the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 51, the accessory drive process (S1151) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the accessory drive process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the accessory drive process (S1151) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 47), and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are set in a drive pattern set based on the content of the variation effect. In order to drive the device, first, the third symbol display device 81 confirms whether or not the variation effect is being varied (executed) (S1601). If the variation effect is not changing in the third symbol display device (S1601: No), this accessory drive process (S1151) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if the third symbol display device 81 is changing (S1601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not "normal reach" is being executed in the changing effect during the change (S1602). This determination is performed using a timer or the like as described above. As a result of the determination, if "normal reach" is being executed in the variation effect (S1602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the normal weak flag 223h is on (S1603), and each movable during the execution of the "normal reach". It is confirmed whether or not the accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the "weak pattern". As a result of the determination, if the normal weak flag 223h is turned on (S1603: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the drive timing of each movable accessory 87,88 in the "weak pattern" in the "normal reach" (S1604). ). This determination is performed, for example, by determining whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the variable element of "normal reach". If a predetermined time has passed from the start of the variable element of "normal reach" (S1604: Yes), the drive timing of each movable accessory 87 and 88 in "normal reach" is the drive timing in the "weak pattern", so that each movable accessory 87 , 88 are driven in a "weak pattern" (S1605). After that, the normal weak flag 223h is set to off (S1606), and the process shifts to S1607.

In the process of S1602, when it is determined that "normal reach" is not being executed (S1602: No), in the process of S1603, the normal weak flag 223h is not set to ON (S1603: No), or , S1604, if it is not the drive timing of each movable accessory 87,88 in the "weak pattern" in "normal reach" (S1604: No), in the "weak pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88. Since it is not the drive timing, the processing of S1605 and S1606 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1607.

In the process of S1607, it is determined whether or not "super reach" or "special reach" is being executed in the fluctuation effect during fluctuation (S1607). As a result of the determination, if "super reach" or "special reach" is being executed in the variable effect (S1607: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the super weak flag 223i is on (S1608), and the "super reach" is determined. "Or" Special reach "is being executed, and it is confirmed whether or not each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven by the" weak pattern ". As a result of the determination, if the super weak flag 223i is turned on (S1608: Yes), then whether or not it is the drive timing of each movable accessory 87,88 in the "weak pattern" in the "super reach" or the "special reach". (S1609). This determination is performed, for example, by determining whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach". If a predetermined time has passed from the start of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach" (S1609: Yes), the "weak pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 in "super reach" or "special reach" Since the drive timing is "", each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven in a "weak pattern" (S1610). After that, the super weak flag 223i is set to off (S1611), the accessory drive process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47).

On the other hand, in the process of S1608, if the super weak flag 223i is not turned on (S1608: No), then it is determined whether or not the super strong flag 223j is turned on (S1612), and the "super reach" or "special" is determined. During the execution of "reach", it is confirmed whether or not each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven by the "strong pattern". As a result of the determination, if the super strong flag 223j is turned on (S1612: Yes), then whether or not it is the drive timing of each movable accessory 87,88 in the "strong pattern" in the "super reach" or the "special reach". (S1613). This determination is performed, for example, by determining whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach". If a predetermined time has passed from the start of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach" (S1613: Yes), the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 in "super reach" or "special reach" Since the drive timing is "", each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven in a "strong pattern" (S1614). After that, the super strong flag 223j is set to off (S1615), the accessory drive process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in the processing of S1607 that "super reach" or "special reach" is not being executed (S1607: No), it is not the drive timing of each movable accessory 87,88 in the variation effect. This accessory drive process (S1511) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47). Further, in the processing of S1609, if it is not the drive timing of each movable accessory 87,88 in the "weak pattern" in "super reach" or "special reach" (S1609: No), each movable accessory 87,88 Since it is not the drive timing in the "weak pattern" of the above, the processes of S1610 and S1611 are skipped, the accessory drive process (S1511) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Further, in the process of S1612, if the super strong flag 223j is not set to ON (S1612: No), the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven by the drive lottery of the movable accessories 87 and 88. Since it is a variable effect, the processes of S1613 to S1615 are skipped, the accessory drive process (S1511) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Further, in the processing of S1613, if it is not the drive timing of each movable accessory 87,88 in the "strong pattern" in "super reach" or "special reach" (S1613: No), each movable accessory 87,88 Since it is not the drive timing in the "strong pattern" of the above, the processes of S1614 and S1615 are skipped, the accessory drive process (S1511) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 52, an execution example of "pending change notice" of "after strong pattern driving" in which the execution symbol changes after each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven by the "strong pattern" will be described. FIG. 52 shows a driving mode of the “strong pattern” of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 and a “holding change” of “after driving the strong pattern” in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed the situation where "notice" is performed.

Specifically, FIG. 52A is a diagram showing a state just before the “reach display” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 52 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 52 (a) and "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 52 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 52 (b). 52 (d) shows a state in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in a “strong pattern” from the state of FIG. 52 (c), and the cockpit display area Db is covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88. It is a figure which showed. In FIG. 52 (e), after each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven in the “strong pattern” from the state of FIG. 52 (d), the position returns to the initial position and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. It is a figure which showed the state. FIG. 52 (f) is a diagram showing a state just before the “big hit display” appears from the state of FIG. 52 (e). In FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted.

In FIG. 52A, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. Further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and "high-speed fluctuation" is shown. Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a warning mode suggesting that the "reach display" appears. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is supporting. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Further, since the movable accessories 87 and 88 are stopped at the initial position (standing position), the cockpit display area Db is not covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times.

In addition, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 maintains the initial position state (arranged upright on both the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81), and almost all of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is visible to the player.

In FIG. 52 (b), from the state of FIG. 52 (a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. Is confirmed, and indicates a state in which "normal reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach", it is displayed as if the entire main display area Dm is enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol during stop display is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is visibly changed at a low speed (for example). , "5" symbol is scrolled slowly to "6" symbol).

The sub-display area Ds is erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds is invisible.

In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 52 (a), the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Has been done. Further, since the movable accessories 87 and 88 are stopped at the initial position (standing position), the cockpit display area Db is not covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88. Therefore, as in FIG. 52 (a), the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is four times. Shown.

In addition, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 maintains the state of the initial position (arranged upright on both the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81) as in the state of FIG. 52 (a), and the third Almost all of the display screen of the symbol display device 81 is visible to the player.

FIG. 52 (c) shows a state in which "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 52 (b). In this "super reach", the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in FIG. 52 (c), a “battle effect” (“competition effect” in “special reach”) in which a plurality of character symbols compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. ing.

In the state of FIG. 52 (c), in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 as in the display state of FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), and the first The reserved symbols are displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), it is shown that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm by the execution symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect is increased by the four reserved symbols. It shows that it is 4 times.

In addition, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 maintains the state of the initial position (arranged upright on both the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81) as in the state of FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b). Therefore, almost all of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, in the state of FIG. 52 (c), the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol that caused the occurrence of this "super reach" is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. There is.

In FIG. 52 (d), from the state of FIG. 52 (c), the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in a “strong pattern” during the “super reach”, and the cockpit display area is formed by the movable accessories 87 and 88. It shows the state where Db is covered. In this state, the player wins the character symbol on the player side in the "battle production" of the "super reach" based on the fact that the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven by the "strong pattern". We expect the appearance of "big hit display results" in the variable production.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88, and both the execution symbol and the reserved symbol are invisible to the player. Therefore, the player is paying attention to the execution contents of the "super reach" and the driving modes of the movable accessories 87 and 88, and the attention to the invisible cockpit display area Db is fading.

In FIG. 52 (e), from the state of FIG. 52 (d), the driving of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the “strong pattern” is completed, and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are in the initial positions (respectively). It shows a state of returning to the state (arranged upright on both the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81). Further, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is a display mode before driving in the “strong pattern” of the movable accessories 87 and 88 (see “white”. FIG. 52 (c)). It is displayed in a display mode (“red”) changed from). That is, it indicates that the "pending change notice" was performed at the execution timing of "after driving the strong pattern".

At this point, the player who sees the "pending change notice" of "after driving the strong pattern" for the first time first sees the display mode of the execution symbol before driving the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88. Notice the difference and feel uncomfortable. Then, he recognizes that the root of the sense of incongruity is the "red" execution pattern. Then, based on his own memory, he examines when the "pending change notice" of the "red" execution symbol was performed. As a result of the examination, the "hold change notice" is not performed before the driving of each movable accessory 87,88, but is executed after the driving of each movable accessory 87,88 in the "strong pattern" is completed. Understand that it is At this moment, the player changes the variable element of "super reach", the driving of each movable accessory 87,88 in the "strong pattern", and the change to the execution symbol of the "red" in the variable effect during execution. It is presumed that the expected value for the "big hit display" was further increased by the combined execution of and in the variable effect.

FIG. 52 (f) shows a state just before the “big hit display” appears in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 52 (e). In this state, stop display is performed at "777", which is a "big hit display", in each display area Dm1 to Dm3. As inferred at the stage of FIG. 52 (e), the player can obtain a feeling of happiness and satisfaction for the appearance of the "big hit display" in the variable effect.

In addition, the player who once experienced the "holding change notice" of this "after driving the strong pattern" will be driven by the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 from the next time, and each movable accessory 87. After the cockpit display area Db disappears due to, 88, when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, it is confirmed whether or not the execution symbol of the cockpit display area Db has been changed. Therefore, the interest of confirming the display mode of the execution symbol after driving each movable accessory 87,88 in the "strong pattern" was born, and the interest of driving each movable accessory 87,88 in the "strong pattern" ( It is possible to enjoy the combination of joy and the joy of changing the execution pattern without a break, and it is possible to dramatically improve the joy of the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the movable accessory (for example, each movable accessory 87, 88) is driven (for example, driven in a “strong pattern”) in the variation effect. , The cockpit display area Db is made invisible to the player, and then the "hold change notice" is given at the timing when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. With this configuration, the notice target (change target. In the third embodiment, the execution symbol) that is always visible can be directly changed and notified, or a new notice target can be notified. It is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target, as compared with the case where the notice target is displayed and notified. By subtly changing the object to be announced, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made aware that the source of the discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot). While providing a surprising production, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game.

In particular, since the driving of the movable accessory (each movable accessory 87,88) is an effect in which the object moves directly, the player pays attention to the movement of the movable accessory (each movable accessory 87,88). easy. Then, while paying attention to the movement of the movable accessory (each movable accessory 87, 88), the player is first made to feel uncomfortable by subtly changing the notice target object that is not visible due to the movable accessory. By giving and then recognizing that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big hit), the player is provided with a surprising effect, and the effect is diversified to promote the game. Can be enhanced.

In addition, the player who once experienced the "holding change notice" after driving this movable accessory ("after driving a strong pattern") will be able to use the movable accessory ("strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 from the next time. ) Is driven, the cockpit display area Db becomes invisible due to the movable accessory (each movable accessory 87,88), and then the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. It will be confirmed whether or not the notice target (execution symbol) of is changed. Therefore, after driving the movable accessory (“strong pattern” of each movable accessory 87,88), the interest of confirming the display mode of the notice target is born, and the movable accessory (each movable accessory 87,88 is “strong”). It is possible to enjoy the hobby (joy) caused by the driving of the "pattern") and the hobby (joy) that the object to be announced changes without a break, and it is possible to dramatically improve the hobby of the game. ..

Further, when "hold change notice" after driving the movable accessory ("after driving the strong pattern") is selected in the variable effect, after driving the movable accessory ("after driving the strong pattern") in the variable effect. When the "pending change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing of, that is, when the movable accessory is not driven (each movable accessory 87, 88 is in a "strong pattern"), the movable accessory is driven ("" It is determined whether or not there is a variable element (for example, a variable element related to "super reach or higher") that can execute the "strong pattern" drive pattern). Then, when it is determined that the movable accessory (driving pattern of "strong pattern") includes a variable element (for example, a variable element of "super reach or higher"), the movable accessory is driven. (The drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 is changed to "strong pattern").

Therefore, when "after driving the strong pattern" is initially selected as the execution timing of the "pending change notice", the cockpit display area Db is not covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88, so that the "strong pattern" is used. Even in a situation where the "pending change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing of "after driving" and the execution timing is changed to another execution timing (for example, "after reach"), each movable accessory 87,88 is set to "strong". Check if it is a variable effect that can be driven by the "pattern". Then, when the variable effect is such that the movable accessories 87 and 88 can be driven by the "strong pattern", the drive pattern of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is changed to the "strong pattern" and the cockpit is used. After making the display area Db invisible to the player, it is possible to execute the "pending change notice" of "after driving the strong pattern". With this configuration, when the "hold change notice" of "after strong pattern drive" is selected, the "hold change notice" can be easily executed at the execution timing of the "after strong pattern drive". it can. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Further, when the execution symbol (or the pending symbol) that is the execution target of the "hold change notice" is made invisible, the effect content of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed, but the movable accessories 87 and 88 are used. By changing the drive pattern to the "strong pattern", the execution symbol (or the pending symbol) that is the execution target of the "hold change notice" can be made invisible. Therefore, when there is no changeable variable element in the fluctuation effect, the "hold change notice" is executed at the initially set execution timing of the "hold change notice" without changing the execution timing of the "hold change notice". be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of the player to perform an unexpected production, diversify the production, and enhance the interest of the game.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the "pending change notice" of "after strong pattern drive" is selected in the variation effect, the drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is initially set to "" in the variation effect. When the "strong pattern" is not selected, it is confirmed whether or not there is a variable element capable of executing the drive pattern of the "strong pattern" of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the variation effect. Then, when there is a variable element capable of driving each movable accessory 87,88 in the "strong pattern" in the variation effect, the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87,88 is changed to the "strong pattern". At the same time, the initially set "after strong pattern drive""pending change notice" was executed.

However, if the variation effect does not include a variable element capable of executing the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88, the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87,88 cannot be executed. The drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not changed, and the "hold change notice" is not executed in the execution symbol. Therefore, even though the "hold change notice" of "after strong pattern drive" is selected, the change effect is performed without being able to execute the "hold change notice" at that timing. It ends monotonously, and there is a risk that it will not be possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the large character cut-in image Dc2 (see FIG. 54 (b)) can be displayed so as to overlap the cockpit display area Db during the fluctuation effect, and the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be displayed. The display time of the character cut-in image Dc2 is set to be shorter than the execution time of any of the variable elements of the variable effect. Further, the cockpit display area Db is configured so that any variable element can always be displayed during the execution of the variable effect. Further, in the variation effect, the cockpit display area Db is not visible to the player while the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed. After that, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 disappears and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, the "pending change notice" of "after the large cut-in display" that changes the display mode of the execution symbol is executed. Configure to.

With this configuration, the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is concealed by the large character cut-in image Dc2 whose display time is shorter than the execution time of each variable element, and the execution symbol is executed when the concealment is released. When the notice object (change target object) that is always visible is directly changed and notified by performing the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the hold" for the symbol, or a new notice is given. Compared with the case where the object is made to appear and notified, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the advance notice object, and to subtly change the display mode of the execution symbol. By subtly changing the execution pattern, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made aware that the source of the discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), which is surprising to the player. While providing a sexual production, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 53, the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the “normal reach” and the “super reach” appear in the variation effect of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53A is a diagram showing a state just before (immediately before) when the “reach display (normal reach)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the occurrence of “normal reach” is confirmed from the state of FIG. 53 (a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the “normal reach” is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a figure. FIG. 53 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which "super reach" is generated from the state of FIG. 53 (b) and "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 53 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is redisplayed from the state of FIG. 53 (c) and the “loss display” of the third symbol appears in the main display area Dm.

First, in FIG. 53A, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the “7” symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm3. Immediately before the stop display is displayed, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and "high-speed fluctuation" is shown. Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a warning mode suggesting that the "reach display" appears. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is supporting. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times.

In FIG. 53 (b), from the state of FIG. 53 (a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. Is confirmed, and indicates a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol during stop display is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is visibly changed at a low speed (for example). , "5" symbol is scrolled slowly to "6" symbol).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the variable element of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds is invisible. This expands the display content of the main display area Dm in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the content of the "reach display" that the player pays attention to when the "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is erased as the image is enlarged.

In the state of FIG. 53 (b), in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 as in the display state of FIG. 53 (a), and the first to fourth reserved symbols are displayed. The reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 53A, the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is four times. Shown.

FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 53 (b). In the variable element of the "super reach", the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol displayed by the variable element of the "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in FIG. 53 (c), a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character symbols compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this "battle effect", an effect (in the fourth embodiment, kickboxing) in which the character symbol on the player side (for example, the left character symbol) and the character symbol on the enemy side (for example, the right character symbol) fight is executed. .. In the "battle production", if the character symbol on the player side wins, it becomes a big hit, and the "big hit display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, in the "battle effect", if the character symbol on the enemy side wins, it becomes a loss, and the "loss display" is set to appear as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

In the state of FIG. 53 (c), in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 as in the display state of FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), and the first The reserved symbols are displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four hold symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is increased. It shows that it is 4 times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the sub-display area Ds, so that even if the display continues to be displayed when the variable element of "super reach" is executed, the display is compared with the sub-display area Ds. Therefore, it does not hinder the production of the variable element of the "super reach". Therefore, the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed while the variable element of "super reach" is being executed.

Further, the reserved symbol and the executed symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the "pending change notice", and the execution symbol suggesting the content of the variation effect being executed is also subjected to the "pending change notice". It is configured to inherit (inherit) the display mode of the changed reserved symbol. That is, it is configured so that the player can be suggested to the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect during execution depending on the display mode of the execution symbol. Therefore, by having the player confirm the display mode of the execution symbol during the execution of the variable element of the "super reach", it is possible to predict whether or not the variable element of the "super reach" being executed is a big hit. It is composed of the above, and the interest based on the prediction is given.

In the state of FIG. 53 (c), the reach forming symbol of the “7” symbol, which is the cause of the variable element of the “super reach”, is reduced in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. it's shown.

Further, in the state of FIG. 53 (c), in the upper left of the display area (lower side of the "reach display") of the third symbol display device 81, a numerical symbol indicating the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect (in the first embodiment). , "4") is not displayed. This is because the cockpit display area Db is always displayed in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, so that the player can recognize the number of fluctuation effects by checking the display content of the cockpit display area Db. Is.

In FIG. 53 (d), from the state of FIG. 53 (c), the variable element of "super reach" is lost (the character symbol on the enemy side wins), and the "loss display" appears in the main display area Dm. At the same time, the sub-display area Ds is redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is visible again. The character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "loss display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the variation element of the "super reach" ends and the variation effect is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the display state of the third symbol display device 81 is the initial state, that is, the main state. The display area Dm, the sub-display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are each displayed. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the variation effect has been stopped (confirmed display), and when there is a pending (standby) variation effect, the next variation effect can be smoothly performed. It becomes possible to execute.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the display states of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are enlarged or reduced at each timing in the variation effect. By erasing or redisplaying, the display contents having high importance at each timing can be easily recognized by the player. Further, by constantly displaying the execution symbol and the reserved symbol on the cockpit display area Db, the player can clearly recognize how many variable displays are on hold.

Next, the character cut-in image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the small character cut-in image Dc1 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the large character cut-in image Dc2 in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure shown.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, two types of character cut-in images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are provided, a small character cut-in image Dc1 and a large character cut-in image Dc2. The lottery ratio of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 is the same as the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of the movable accessories 87 and 88 of the third embodiment (small character cut-in image). Dc1 corresponds to the "weak pattern", and the large character cut-in image Dc2 corresponds to the "strong pattern").

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the small character cut-in image Dc1 displays a display frame image having a vertical width of 1/3 of the display screen of the main display area Dm and the entire horizontal width, and the central portion of the display frame image. It is displayed as if a small female character design is cheering. The background of the display frame image is displayed in blue.

This small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 for 1 second from the start of display to the end of display (erasure). Therefore, other images displayed overlapping with the small character cut-in image Dc1 (for example, a character image in a variable element of "super reach") are displayed while the small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed. The overlapping portion is configured to be invisible. In the fourth embodiment, since the small character cut-in image Dc1 is not displayed in the area overlapping the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol of the cockpit display area Db is displayed while the small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed. And the reserved symbol is in a visible state.

When displaying the small character cut-in image Dc1, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display small character cut-in command in order to notify the display control device 114 that the small character cut-in image Dc1 is to be displayed. It is configured as follows. When the display control device 114 receives the display small character cut-in command, it recognizes that the small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and recognizes that the small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, "super reach"). The display control is performed so that the small character cut-in image Dc1 is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the large character cut-in image Dc2 displays a display frame image having a vertical width of 4/5 of the display screen of the main display area Dm and the entire horizontal width of the display frame image. It is displayed in the center as if a large female character pattern is cheering. Further, the background of the display frame image is displayed in red unlike the small character cut-in image Dc1. Therefore, since the size and color display modes of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 are clearly different, the player can clearly recognize the difference.

Like the small character cut-in image Dc1, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 for 1 second from the display start to the display end (erasure). Therefore, other images displayed overlapping with the large character cut-in image Dc2 (for example, the execution symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db, the character image in the variable element of the "super reach", etc.) are large. While the character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, the overlapping portion is configured to be invisible. In the fourth embodiment, since the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed in an area overlapping the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol of the cockpit display area Db is displayed while the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed. And the reserved symbol becomes invisible, and at the timing when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become visible again.

When displaying the large character cut-in image Dc2, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display large character cut-in command in order to notify the display control device 114 that the large character cut-in image Dc2 is to be displayed. It is configured as follows. When the display control device 114 receives the display large character cut-in command, it recognizes that the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and recognizes that the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, "super reach"). The display control is performed so that the large character cut-in image Dc2 is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Since the display time of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 is set to 1 second, the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 are configured to be shorter than the execution time of any of the variable elements. In the fourth embodiment, the display control device 114 is configured to randomly determine the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2. Specifically, when the display control device 114 receives the display small character cut-in command or the display large character cut-in command from the voice lamp control device 113, any fluctuation is made with reference to a predetermined counter and table. The element is configured to determine by lottery whether or not to display the small character cut-in image Dc1 or the large character cut-in image Dc2.

With this configuration, the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 or the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, since the execution timing is not determined by the voice lamp control device 113, it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 or the large character cut-in image Dc2. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 113 The processing by 114 can be reduced. Furthermore, by diversifying the appearance timing of the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the hold" by the large character cut-in image Dc2, while providing the player with an unexpected effect, the effect is diversified to enhance the interest of the game. Can be enhanced.

Further, by setting the display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 to be shorter than the execution time of each variable element, it is possible to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 with any variable element. Compared with the case where the cockpit display area Db is covered by driving each of the movable accessories 87 and 88, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be displayed and the variable element of the variable effect. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to perform control for determining whether or not to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 in order to perform the "hold change notice" of "after the hold is erased". While reducing the control load of the control device 113, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, diversify the effect, and enhance the interest of the game.

The execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 may be determined by the voice lamp control device 113, or a fixed timing of a specific variable element (for example, “super reach””. It may be configured to be executed one second after the start of the variable element of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, an execution example of "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" in which the execution symbol changes after the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed will be described. FIG. 55 shows a display mode of the large character cut-in image Dc2 and a situation in which a “hold change notice” of “after hold deletion” is performed for the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed.

Specifically, FIG. 55A is a diagram showing a state just before the “reach display” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 55 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 55 (a) and the variable element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 55 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed from the state of FIG. 55 (c) and the cockpit display area Db is covered. FIG. 55 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased from the state of FIG. 55 (d) and the cockpit display area Db is visible again. FIG. 55 (f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "big hit display" appears from the state of FIG. 55 (e). In FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted.

In FIG. 55 (a), the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. Further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and "high-speed fluctuation" is shown. Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a warning mode suggesting that the "reach display" appears. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is supporting. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Further, at this stage, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is not displayed, and the cockpit display area Db is visible. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times.

In FIG. 55 (b), from the state of FIG. 55 (a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. Is confirmed, and indicates a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol during stop display is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is visibly changed at a low speed (for example). , "5" symbol is scrolled slowly to "6" symbol).

The sub-display area Ds is erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the variable element of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds is invisible.

In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 55 (a), the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Has been done. Further, as in FIG. 55A, at this stage, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is not displayed, and the cockpit display area Db is visible. Therefore, as in FIG. 55 (a), the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is four times. Shown.

FIG. 55 (c) shows a state in which the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 55 (b). In the variable element of the "super reach", the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol displayed by the variable element of the "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in FIG. 55 (c), a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character symbols compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In the state of FIG. 55 (c), in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 as in the display states of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), and the first The reserved symbols are displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Further, as in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the large character cut-in image Dc2 is not displayed at this stage, and the cockpit display area Db is visible. Therefore, as in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), it is shown that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm by the execution symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect is increased by the four reserved symbols. It shows that it is 4 times.

Further, in the state of FIG. 55 (c), the reach forming symbol of the “7” symbol, which is the cause of the variable element of the “super reach”, is reduced in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. it's shown.

In FIG. 55 (d), from the state of FIG. 55 (c), the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed during the execution of the variable element of “super reach”, and the cockpit display area Db is displayed by the large character cut-in image Dc2. Indicates that is covered. In this state, the player wins the character symbol on the player side in the "battle production" of the variable element of the "super reach" based on the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2 that is easily selected at the time of a big hit. However, we expect the appearance of "big hit display" in the variable effect.

Further, the cockpit display area Db is entirely covered with the large character cut-in image Dc2, and both the execution symbol and the reserved symbol are invisible to the player. Therefore, the player is paying attention to the execution content of the variable element of "super reach" and the large character cut-in image Dc2, and the attention to the invisible cockpit display area Db is fading.

FIG. 55 (e) shows a state in which the large character cut-in image Dc2 is deleted from the state of FIG. 55 (d). Further, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is a display mode changed from the display mode (“white”. See FIG. 55 (c)) before the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2. It is displayed in ("red"). That is, it indicates that the "holding change notice" of "after holding and erasing" was performed along with the appearance and erasing of the large character cut-in image Dc2.

At this point, the player who first sees the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" due to the appearance and deletion of this large character cut-in image Dc2 is first executed before the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2. I noticed the difference in the display mode of the design and felt a sense of discomfort. Then, he recognizes that the root of the sense of incongruity is the "red" execution pattern. Then, based on his own memory, he examines when the "pending change notice" of the "red" execution symbol was performed. As a result of the examination, it is understood that the "pending change notice" is not performed before the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2, but is executed after the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2. At this moment, in the variable effect being executed, the player sees the variable element of "super reach", the appearance of the large character cut-in image Dc2, and the change to the execution pattern of the "red" in the variable effect. It is speculated that the expected value for the "big hit display" was further increased by the combined execution.

FIG. 55 (f) shows a state just before the “big hit display” appears in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 55 (e). In this state, stop display is performed at "777", which is a "big hit display", in each display area Dm1 to Dm3. As inferred at the stage of FIG. 55 (e), the player can obtain a feeling of happiness and satisfaction for the appearance of the "big hit display" in the variable effect.

In addition, the player who once experienced the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the hold" by displaying the large character cut-in image Dc2 will see the large character cut-in image Dc2 from the next time when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed. After the cockpit display area Db becomes invisible due to the cut-in image Dc2, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, the execution symbol of the cockpit display area Db is changed. You will be able to check if you are doing it. Therefore, the interest of confirming the display mode of the execution symbol after the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2 is born, and the interest (joy) of displaying the large character cut-in image Dc2 and the interest (joy) of changing the execution symbol. You can enjoy the game in combination without a break, and you can dramatically improve the interest of the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is made invisible to the player by displaying the cut-in image (for example, the large character cut-in image Dc2) in the variation effect. After that, it is configured to give a "pending change notice" at the timing when it becomes visible again. With this configuration, compared to the case where the notice target (change target) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or the case where the notice target is newly displayed and notified. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the notice target object, and to subtly change the display mode of the execution symbol. By subtly changing the execution pattern, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made aware that the source of the discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), which is surprising to the player. While providing a sexual production, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, since the display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 is set to 1 second, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is configured to be shorter than the execution time of any of the variable elements. Therefore, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" can be generated by the large character cut-in image Dc2 that can appear in any of the variable elements. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the appearance timing of the "hold change notice" "after the hold is deleted", provide the player with an unexpected effect, and diversify the effect to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, by setting the display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 to be shorter than the execution time of each variable element, it is possible to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 with any of the variable elements. Compared with the case where the cockpit display area Db is covered by driving each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 of the third embodiment, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be displayed and the variable element of the variable effect. Become. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to perform control for determining the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2 in order to perform the "hold change notice" of "after the hold is erased". While reducing the control burden of 113, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, diversify the effect, and enhance the interest of the game.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is executed in the execution symbol showing the change effect during execution. As described above, since the execution symbol indicates the content of the variation effect during execution, the player pays attention to which display mode the execution symbol is displayed during the execution of the variation effect. It is carried out.

Therefore, if the display mode of the execution symbol changes during the execution of the variation effect, even if the display mode of the execution symbol is subtly changed by the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion", the change is given to the player. There is a risk of being guessed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the "holding change notice" of "after holding and erasing" can be executed in the holding symbol. The player does not pay attention to the change of the reserved symbol as much as the execution symbol, and it is hard to notice the change. Therefore, when the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the hold" is given to the hold symbol, the player can delay recognizing the change of the hold symbol as compared with the case where the execution symbol changes. In the meantime, the player can feel uncomfortable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in the execution symbol or the reserved symbol in which the jackpot variation effect is executed, the minimum "hold change notice" is set at the timing of "after cockpit erasure" when the cockpit display area Db is erased. It is configured to change from a normal display mode (“white”) to a change mode (“blue”) that is changed by one step. On the other hand, when executing a display mode other than the above-mentioned minimum display mode of the "pending change notice", that is, a display mode (for example, "red") changed by a plurality of steps from the normal display mode ("white"). It is configured so that the execution timing of the above "after cockpit erasure" is not selected. With this configuration, even if it is the "holding change notice" of the minimum change mode that could not be expected to be a big hit in the past, a big hit can be expected depending on the timing when the "holding change notice" occurs. Is possible. As a result, the significance of existence of the one-stage "pending change notice", which is the minimum display mode that could not be found in the past, can be enhanced, and a big hit can be expected in any production pattern. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the "hold change notice" is performed in the hold symbol on which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the hold symbol is deleted by the fluctuation element of the "super reach", and the "super" is deleted. At the timing when the variable element of "reach" ends and the reserved symbol is redisplayed, the "pending change notice" can be displayed (executed). As a result, when the notice target (change target. In the fifth embodiment, the reserved symbol) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or when the notice target is newly displayed. Compared with the case of notifying, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target. In addition, the reserved symbol that the player is not paying attention to is temporarily made invisible and then subtly changed, and the change mode is also a slight change from the normal change (minimum change mode, one-step change). First of all, while making it difficult for the player to notice the change, the change gives the player a sense of discomfort. After that, by recognizing that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big hit), the player is provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect is diversified to promote the game. Can be enhanced.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the scenario table 222f according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, not only the execution symbol but also the reserved symbol is given a "pending change notice" at the timing when the execution symbol and the reserved symbol are erased and redisplayed. It is configured to be executable. Therefore, when the effect of erasing the execution symbol and the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is executed, the voice lamp control device 113 redisplays the executed symbol or the reserved symbol after the execution of the erased effect. The execution timing of "after cockpit erasure" that can execute "pending change notice" can be selected at the timing when it is executed.

In the fifth embodiment, when the execution of the “hold change notice” is determined, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f, and executes the “after cockpit erasure” execution timing. The execution timing of 1 is determined from the execution timings of the "pending change notice" including. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario table 222f1 in the fifth embodiment.

In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of the fifth embodiment, each reserved ball is in each reserved ball number (4 patterns of 1 to 4 reserved balls) of the fluctuation effect at the time when the vertical row determines the "hold change notice". Each number is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns, which are divided according to the display mode of "pending change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). In addition, there are four patterns in which the rows execute (start) the "hold change notice" (the number of hold balls is "1" to "4"), and the fluctuation effect is being performed (the number of hold balls is "0"). ), There are a total of eight types of timing patterns: three patterns of "start", "before reach", and "after reach", and one pattern of "after cockpit erase" when the cockpit display area Db is erased. Each is divided. Then, the value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the "holding change notice" in the fifth embodiment, the display mode of the determined "holding change notice" is executed (appearing) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each of the above situation patterns. It is set to do.

Specifically, for example, when the execution timing of the "pending change notice" is selected as "after cockpit erasure" in the fluctuation effect based on the start prize of 1, the variation effect based on the start prize is started from the time of the start prize. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased until the confirmation is displayed. That is, when the "pending change notice" of "after cockpit erasure" is determined in the fluctuation effect based on the start prize of 1, any change is made before the change effect based on the start prize is confirmed and displayed. When a variable element whose cockpit display area Db is erased is executed in the effect (including the variable effect based on the start winning prize), after the end of the variable element, the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed at the timing of "pending change notice". Is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the "holding change notice" is that the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. In this case, a lottery is performed in the voice lamp control device 113, and it is determined whether or not to execute the "pending change notice". When the execution of the "holding change notice" is decided, first, the number of held balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "holding change notice" are grasped. Then, when the fluctuation effect indicated by the hold ball number command is a big hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "hold change notice" at the time of the big hit is referred to by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the big hit scenario table 222f1. ) Is determined. On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect indicated by the hold ball number command is lost, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "hold change notice" at the time of loss is referred to by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the loss scenario table 222f2. ) Is determined. The loss scenario table 222f2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of FIG. 56, each of the number of reserved balls (4 patterns of the number of reserved balls "1" to "4") of the fluctuation effect at the time when the vertical row determines the "hold change notice" Each of the number of reserved balls is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns, which are divided according to the display mode of the "pending change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). In addition, as the timing for the row to execute (start) the "hold change notice", four patterns at the time of displaying or shifting to each hold ball number (hold ball number "1" to "4") and the hold ball. Three patterns of "start (at shift)", "before reach", or "after reach" in the number "0" (during the variable effect execution), and the cockpit display area Db regardless of the number of pending numbers. It is divided into a total of eight types of timing patterns, one of which is "after cockpit erasure" in the timing after erasure. Then, the possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with each of the divided groups.

In the "holding change notice" in the fifth embodiment, the display mode of the determined "holding change notice" is executed (appearing) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each of the above situation patterns. It is set to do.

Specifically, for example, when "after cockpit erasure" is selected as the execution timing of "pending change notice", the variable element of "super reach" or "special" is before the variable effect is confirmed and displayed. The variable element of "reach" is executed, and then the "pending change notice" is executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. In addition, when the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "0" for the number of hold balls and "at the start" is selected, the change effect at which the "hold change notice" is determined is started. "Pending change notice" is executed. If the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "0" for the number of reserved balls and "before reach" is selected, the change effect in the change effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is in progress. The "hold" is performed before the "reach display" appears (for example, when the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed, or when the left symbol column Z1 is stopped while the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is being executed, etc.). "Change notice" is executed. If the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "0" for the number of reserved balls and "after reach" is selected, the change effect in the change effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is in progress. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing when the "reach display" is being executed (for example, the variable element of the "normal reach" is being executed).

Further, for example, when the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is selected as the number of hold balls "1", the hold symbol indicating the variation effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is the first hold symbol display area Db1. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing displayed in or at the timing of the shift. When the number of reserved balls "2" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", the hold symbol indicating the variation effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Db2. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing of the shift or the timing of the shift. When the number of reserved balls "3" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", the hold symbol indicating the variation effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is displayed in the third hold symbol display area Db3. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing of the shift or the timing of the shift. When the number of reserved balls "4" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", the hold symbol indicating the variation effect for which the "hold change notice" is determined is displayed in the fourth hold symbol display area Db4. The "pending change notice" is executed at the timing of the change.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the voice lamp A lottery for the "holding change notice" is performed in the control device 113, and it is determined whether or not to execute the "holding change notice". When the execution of the "holding change notice" is decided, first, the number of held balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "holding change notice" are grasped. Then, when the fluctuation effect indicated by the hold ball number command is a big hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "hold change notice" at the time of the big hit is referred to by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the big hit scenario table 222f1. ) Is determined.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, situation patterns of the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” and each display mode of the “hold change notice” are prepared, and each is prepared. The value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the status pattern.

First, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “1” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated, the reserved symbols of "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls is "1" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "2" to "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 56).

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "start" of the number of reserved balls "0". "20-39", "40-59" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "60-79" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved The number of balls is "80 to 99" for "1".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 20%, "at the start" of "0" reserved balls, 20% "before reach" of "0" reserved balls, 20% "after reach" of "0" reserved balls , The number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 20%.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the reserved symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is executed. Timing ("after cockpit erasure", "0" number of reserved balls "at the start", "0" number of reserved balls "before reach", "0" number of reserved balls "after reach", number of reserved balls "1") are set to be evenly selected (20%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "start" of the number of reserved balls "0". "0-19", "20-39" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "60 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 0%, "0" number of reserved balls "at the start" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "before reach" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "after reach" 20% , The number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 40%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the hold symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation effect is "after the cockpit is erased" when the display mode is "red" or "rainbow" described later. Execution timing is set so that it is not selected. In other words, the "hold change notice" of the "after cockpit erasure" of the hold symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation effect is set to be selected only when the display mode is "blue".

Conventionally, in the "pending change notice", a plurality of change patterns (normal "white", "blue", "green", "red", "rainbow", etc.) are prepared in advance from the initial display mode, and the degree of change thereof. It is configured so that the expected jackpot value differs depending on the situation. Therefore, for example, when a "pending change notice" occurs, a "red" display, which is a two-step change from the normal display mode, is displayed rather than a "blue" display mode, which is a one-step change from the normal display mode. The mode is set so that the expected jackpot value is higher. That is, in the "pending change notice" in the execution symbol or the reserved symbol, a big hit is expected in the display mode ("red" etc.) changed by a plurality of steps from the normal display mode, and the display mode changed by one step from the normal display mode ("red" etc.). "Blue" etc.) cannot be expected to be a big hit, and it is set so that there are many cases of loss. Therefore, even when the "pending change notice" occurs, for example, when a one-step display mode ("blue" or the like) appears, the one-step display mode changes in a plurality of steps ("" Since it is not possible to expect a jackpot from (red, etc.), the player determines that a jackpot cannot be expected for the fluctuation effect in which the one-step "pending change notice" has occurred, and the player determines that the one-step "holding change notice" cannot be expected. I couldn't find any interest in the variable production that corresponds to "", but rather I was awakened.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased when the one-step "hold change notice" is executed in the execution symbol or the hold symbol showing the variation effect of the jackpot. It is configured so that it can be changed to a one-step display mode (“blue”) at the timing of “after”. Further, when executing the "pending change notice" that has changed in a plurality of stages, the execution timing of "after cockpit erasing" is not selected. With this configuration, even if it is a one-stage "holding change notice" that could not be expected to be a big hit in the past, it is possible to expect a big hit depending on the timing when the "holding change notice" occurs. It will be possible. As a result, the significance of existence of the one-stage "pending change notice", which could not be found in the past, can be enhanced, a big hit can be expected in any production pattern, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced by various productions.

In addition, when a "hold change notice" is given for a hold symbol and an execution symbol indicating a variable effect that causes a big hit, the hold symbol or the execution symbol is deleted by "super reach" or the like, and the effect of the "super reach" ends. At the timing when the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is redisplayed, the "pending change notice" can be displayed (executed). As a result, when the notice target (change target. In the fifth embodiment, the reserved symbol or the execution symbol) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or a new notice target is displayed. Compared with the case of issuing and notifying, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target. In addition, the reserved symbol that the player is not paying attention to is temporarily made invisible, and then subtly changed, and the change mode is also a slight change (one-step change) from the normal change. While making it difficult to notice the change, it gives the player a sense of discomfort due to the change. After that, by recognizing that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big hit), the player is provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect is diversified to promote the game. Can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit erasure", "0-29" for "start" of "0" reserved balls, and "0-29" for reserved balls. It is "30 to 59" for "0" "before reach" and "60 to 99" for "after reach" of "0" reserved balls. Note that the display mode of "rainbow" in the "hold change notice" does not appear in the hold symbol, but can appear only in the execution symbol. Therefore, for "after cockpit erasure" and the number of reserved balls "1" The value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 0%, "0" number of reserved balls "at the start" is 30%, "0" number of reserved balls "before reach" is 30%, "0" number of reserved balls is "after reach" 40% , The number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be 0%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is "reach display" when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow". Is set so that the timing during execution can be easily selected (40%). The display mode of the "rainbow" in the "holding change notice" at the time of a big hit is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of holding balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice". Therefore, the description of the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "pending change notice" at the time of a big hit in the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is omitted.

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “2” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated, the reserved symbols of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls is "2" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "3" or "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 56).

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 29" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "at the start" of the number of reserved balls "0". "30-39", "40-49" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "50-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "60 to 79" for the number of balls "1" and "80 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "2".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 30%, "at the start" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "before reach" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "after reach" of "0" reserved balls , The selection ratio is set so that the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 20%, and the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 20%. ..

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the cockpit display area when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue". The timing at which Db is redisplayed is set so that it is most easily selected (30%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "start" of the number of reserved balls "0". "0-19", "20-39" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "60 to 69" for the number of balls "1" and "70 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "2".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 0%, "0" number of reserved balls "at the start" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "before reach" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "after reach" 20% , The selection ratio is set so that the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 30%. ..

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the hold symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (30%).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “3” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated, the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, at the time when the number of reserved balls is "3" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d is against the number of reserved balls "4" when the "hold change notice" is executed. The value of is not assigned (see FIG. 56).

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 39" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "start" of "0" reserved balls. "40-49", "50-59" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "60-69" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "70 to 79" for the number of balls "1", "80 to 89" for the number of reserved balls "2", and "90 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "3". ..

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 40%, "at the start" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "before reach" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "after reach" of "0" reserved balls , The number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls is "3" (that is, when the symbol is shifted). (When displaying a symbol) is set to be a selection ratio of 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the cockpit display area when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue". The timing at which Db is redisplayed is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "start" of the number of reserved balls "0". "0-19", "20-39" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "60 to 69" for the number of balls "1", "70 to 79" for the number of reserved balls "2", and "80 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "3". ..

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 0%, "0" number of reserved balls "at the start" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "before reach" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "after reach" 20% , The number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved symbols is "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted). (At the time of display) is set to be a selection ratio of 20%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the number of hold balls when the number of hold balls at the time of the determination is "3" and the display mode is "red". "0" "at the start", "0" number of reserved balls "before reach", "0" number of reserved balls "after reach", and "3" number of reserved balls are evenly executed. Is set to be selected (20%).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” of the jackpot is “4” will be described.

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 49" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "at the start" for the number of reserved balls "0". "50-59", "60-69" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "70-79" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved "80-84" for the number of balls "1", "85-89" for the number of reserved balls "2", "90-94" for the number of reserved balls "3", the number of reserved balls It is "95 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 50%, "at the start" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "before reach" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "after reach" of "0" reserved balls , The number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 5%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 5%, and the number of reserved balls is "3" (that is, when the symbol is shifted). The selection ratio is set so that 5% is selected when the symbol is shifted) and 5% is selected for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed).

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the cockpit display area when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue". The timing at which Db is redisplayed is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "start" of the number of reserved balls "0". "0-19", "20-39" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved "60-69" for the number of balls "1", "70-79" for the number of reserved balls "2", "80-89" for the number of reserved balls "3", the number of reserved balls It is "90 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 0%, "0" number of reserved balls "at the start" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "before reach" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "after reach" 20% , The number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved symbols is "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted). The selection ratio is set so that (at the time of shift) is 10% and "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) are 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the jackpot is the number of hold balls when the number of hold balls at the time of its determination is "4" and the display mode is "red". The execution timings of "0" "at the start", "0" reserved balls "before reach", and "0" reserved balls "after reach" are evenly selected (20%). Is set to.

In this way, when the "hold change notice" is performed in the hold symbol and the execution symbol indicating the change effect that generates the jackpot, the cockpit display area Db is before the change effect corresponding to the "hold change notice" is confirmed and displayed. Is deleted and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db become invisible, and then the "pending change notice" can be displayed (executed) at the timing when it becomes visible again. As a result, when the notice target (change target. In the fifth embodiment, the execution symbol or the reserved symbol) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or a new notice target is displayed. Compared with the case of issuing and notifying, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target. In other words, by making the object to be announced invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot). By making them aware, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Further, the "holding change notice" of "after the cockpit is erased" is configured so that the larger the number of holding balls at the time when the "holding change notice" is determined, the easier it is to be selected. The greater the number of variation effects executed before the variation effect corresponding to the "pending change notice" of "after cockpit deletion" is confirmed and displayed, the higher the possibility that the cockpit display area Db will be deleted. It is possible to increase the chances that the "pending change notice" of "after the cockpit is erased" is executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the loss scenario table 222f2 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the loss scenario table 222f2 of the fifth embodiment. In the loss scenario table 222f2 of FIG. 57, as in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, each number of reserved balls (4 patterns of 1 to 4 reserved balls) of the fluctuation effect at the time when the vertical row determines the “hold change notice”. ), Each of the number of reserved balls is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns, which are divided according to the display mode of the "pending change notice" (3 patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). There is. In addition, as the timing for the row to execute (start) the "hold change notice", four patterns at the time of displaying or shifting to each hold ball number (hold ball number "1" to "4") and the hold ball There are a total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (at shift)", "before reach", "after reach", or "after hold deletion" when the number is "0" (during the variable effect execution). Each is divided. Then, the possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with each of the divided groups.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the loss scenario table 222f2, a situation pattern of the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “hold change notice” and each display mode of the “hold change notice” is prepared, and each is prepared. The value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the status pattern. The "rainbow" in the display mode of the "pending change notice" suggests the occurrence of a big hit when the display mode of the "rainbow" appears, and is not selected at the time of loss. Therefore, in the situation pattern of "rainbow" in the scenario table 222f2 for loss, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to any of the number of pending fluctuation effects at the time when the "pending change notice" is determined. Is omitted.

First, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “1” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" is generated, the reserved symbols of "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this loss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls is "1" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "2" to "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 57).

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "at the start" for the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "40 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 10%, "at the start" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "before reach" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "after reach" of "0" reserved balls , The number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 60%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (60%).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the scenario counter 223d was not assigned to "after hold deletion" in the loss scenario table 222f2, but in the loss scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment, the value of the scenario counter 223d was not assigned. The scenario counter 223d is set to be allocated to the execution timing of "after cockpit erasure". This is because the erasure of the cockpit display area Db can also be executed in the variation effect executed before the variation effect corresponding to the "pending change notice" of "after the cockpit is erased", and the cockpit display area in the variation effect can be executed. This is because the "big hit display" is not fixed even when Db is deleted.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "start" of the number of reserved balls "0". "0-19", "20-39" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "60 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 0%, "0" number of reserved balls "at the start" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "before reach" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "after reach" 20% , The number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 40%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “2” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "2" is generated, the reserved symbols of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this loss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls is "2" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the number of reserved balls when the "hold change notice" is executed is "3" or "4". On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned (see FIG. 57).

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "at the start" for the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "40 to 49" for the number of balls "1" and "50 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "2".

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 10%, "at the start" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "before reach" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "after reach" of "0" reserved balls , The selection ratio is set so that the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 50%. ..

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (50%).

Next, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 57 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing and scenario of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "0" for "start" of the number of reserved balls "0". ~ 19 ”,“ 20-39 ”for“ before reach ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 40-59 ”for“ after reach ”with“ 0 ”number of reserved balls,“ 40-59 ”for“ after reach ” It is "60 to 69" for "1" and "70 to 99" for "2" of reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 0%, "0" number of reserved balls "at the start" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "before reach" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "after reach" 20% , The selection ratio is set so that the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 30%. ..

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "red". The display timing is set so that it can be easily selected (30%).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “3” will be described. In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls "3" is generated, the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this loss scenario table 222f2, at the time when the number of reserved balls is "3" when the "hold change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d is against the number of reserved balls "4" when the "hold change notice" is executed. The value of is not assigned (see FIG. 57).

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "at the start" for the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "40 to 49" for the number of balls "1", "50 to 59" for the number of reserved balls "2", and "60 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "3". ..

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 10%, "at the start" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "before reach" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "after reach" of "0" reserved balls , The number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls is "3" (that is, when the symbol is shifted). (When displaying a symbol) is set to be a selection ratio of 40%.

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "start" of the number of reserved balls "0". "0-19", "20-39" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved It is "60 to 69" for the number of balls "1", "70 to 79" for the number of reserved balls "2", and "80 to 99" for the number of reserved balls "3". ..

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 0%, "0" number of reserved balls "at the start" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "before reach" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls "after reach" 20% , The number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved symbols is "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted). (At the time of display) is set to be a selection ratio of 20%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the change effect of the loss is the change effect when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "3" and the display mode is "red". It is set so that it is easy to select "at the start", "before reach", "after reach", or when the reserved symbol is displayed (20% each).

Next, a case where the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect at the time of determining the “holding change notice” of the loss is “4” will be described.

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined. The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "at the start" for the number of reserved balls "0". "10 to 19", "20 to 29" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved "40-49" for the number of balls "1", "50-59" for the number of reserved balls "2", "60-69" for the number of reserved balls "3", the number of reserved balls It is "70 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 10%, "at the start" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "before reach" of "0" reserved balls, 10% "after reach" of "0" reserved balls , The number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls is "3" (that is, reserved). The selection ratio is set so that 10% is selected when the symbol is shifted) and 30% is selected for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed).

Therefore, the "holding change notice" of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the loss is the holding symbol when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (30%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit erasure" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "start" of the number of reserved balls "0". "0-19", "20-39" for "before reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, "40-59" for "after reach" with "0" number of reserved balls, reserved "60-69" for the number of balls "1", "70-79" for the number of reserved balls "2", "80-89" for the number of reserved balls "3", the number of reserved balls It is "90 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "pending change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after cockpit erasure". 0%, "0" number of reserved balls "at the start" is 20%, "0" number of reserved balls is "before reach" 20%, "0" number of reserved balls is "after reach" is 10% , The number of reserved balls is "1" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved symbols is "3" (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted). The selection ratio is set so that (at the time of shift) is 10% and "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) are 10%.

Therefore, the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol or the hold symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation effect is the change effect when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is "4" and the display mode is "red". "At the start", "Before reach" or "After reach" is set so that it is easy to select (20% each).

In this way, even if the same "hold change notice (for example," blue ")" is used when the fluctuation effect is lost and when the jackpot is hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) is different, so that the "hold change notice" is given. The jackpot expectation level can be different depending on the display mode of "" and the timing at which the display mode appears. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the suggestion content of the jackpot expectation degree by the "hold change notice" depending on the display mode and the appearance timing of the "hold change notice", and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the fifth embodiment. In the configuration of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the fifth embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment is that the hold erase information storage areas 223e7, 223f7 and the revariation information storage areas 223e8, 223f8 are provided. It is a point that is not. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b updated by the hold ball number command in the hold information storage first to fourth areas of the hold information storage area 223e. A look-ahead process (hold display setting process (see FIG. 59)) is performed based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223e1 to 223e4 in the hold information storage area X corresponding to the above, and based on the result of this look-ahead process. The hold change information and the scenario data generated in the above are stored in the respective storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the same hold information storage X area, respectively.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation element of "super reach or more" in the variation effect when the scenario data of "pending change notice" of "after cockpit erasure" is stored in the scenario data storage areas 223e6 and 223f6. Is executed and the cockpit display area Db is erased, the hold symbol corresponding to the execution information storage area 223f or the hold information storage area 223e in which the scenario data of the "hold change notice" of "after the cockpit is erased" is stored. The "hold change notice" is executed for the execution symbol, and the hold change information stored in the hold change information storage areas 223f5 and 223e5 of the execution information storage area 223f or the hold information storage area 223e is stored as the hold change information. It is configured to be rewritten and stored in. In this way, when the "hold change notice" of "after cockpit erasure" is executed, the hold change information stored in the hold change information storage areas 223f5 and 223e5 of the execution information storage area 223f or the hold information storage area 223e is stored. By rewriting the information to be changed on hold, it is not necessary to duplicately execute the "notice of change on hold" of "after cockpit erasure", and the control load of MPU221 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the shift process in the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. That is, the reserved variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variation effect in time is started. Therefore, the reserved information storage first area corresponding to the first reserved variation effect is started. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed. Let me.

In addition, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the hold information storage second area are transferred to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the hold information storage first area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the hold information storage third area after being moved are stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the hold information storage second area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the hold information storage fourth area are moved to each storage area 223e1 to the hold information storage third area. Move to 223e6.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f. Further, in the hold information storage first to fourth areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 are stored, respectively. Will be done. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the hold information storage area 223e. To.

Since the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the fifth embodiment are not provided with the hold erase information storage areas 223e7, 223f7 and the revariation information storage areas 223e8, 223f8, the hold of the first embodiment is held. The storage capacity is reduced as compared with the information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the hold display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the hold ball number command has been received in the command determination process (S1110 in FIG. 28), the voice lamp control device 113 performs this hold display setting process, and performs the hold display setting process, and the "hold change notice" is displayed. When the execution is decided, the hold change information and the scenario data are stored in the respective storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the hold information storage X area indicated by the sub-hold ball number counter 223b updated by the hold ball number command.

Specifically, in the process of S1303 of the hold display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the hold ball number command received this time (. S1303). As a result of the determination, if the execution lottery of the "pending change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "holding change notice" is not executed. The Null data is stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 and the scenario data storage area 223e6 in the X area (S1361), respectively, and the processing is transferred to S1313.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1303, if the execution lottery of the "pending change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), the processing of S1304 and S1305 is performed as in the first embodiment, and the pending change information and the scenario data are stored. It is stored in each storage area 223e5, 223e6 of the hold information storage X area indicated by the hold ball number command, and the process shifts to S1313.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the hold ball number command is received, the hold erase information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the change effect and the change element of "re-variation" in the change effect are lined up. It does not discriminate and store re-variation information indicating whether or not it is used. As a result, the capacity of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 221 is reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the variation effect processing (S1109) of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a variation effect process (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment.

This variation effect process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and is first stored in the hold information storage first area of the hold information storage area 223e in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. A process of shifting various information to the execution information storage area 223f and shifting the information stored in the hold information storage areas 2 to 4 to the hold information storage areas 1 to 3 is performed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, a display error command is generated and this command is displayed and controlled. Performs the process of setting for transmission to the device 114. Further, when it is the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in the execution symbol, various commands related to each execution timing of the "hold change notice" are generated, and these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. Perform processing. Further, when it is the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in the hold symbol, various commands related to each execution timing of the "hold change notice" are generated, and these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. Perform processing.

In the variation effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. Therefore, this fluctuation effect processing Is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the processes of S1402 to S1412 are performed as in the first embodiment. , The process shifts to S1413.

In the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the execution timing is such that the "pending change notice" appears in the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (S1413). This determination confirms the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the execution information storage area 223f, and the scenario data is the data indicated by "after cockpit erasure" or the number of reserved balls "0". Therefore, it is determined whether or not the data indicates "at the start", "before reach" or "after reach" (hereinafter, abbreviated as "at the start" to "after reach").

As a result of the determination in S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "after the cockpit is erased" or the number of reserved balls is "0" and "at the start" to "reach". If the data indicates any of "after" (S1413: Yes), the execution symbol change processing is performed (S1414) in order to execute the "pending change notice" in the execution symbol, and the processing is shifted to S1415.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating "after cockpit erasure" or the number of reserved balls is "0" and "at the start". If the data does not indicate any of "after reach" (S1413: No), the process of S1414 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1415. The execution symbol change processing of S1414 will be described later in FIG.

Next, in the process of S1415, it is determined whether or not the execution timing is such that the "hold change notice" appears in the hold symbols displayed in the first to third hold symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 (S1415). This determination determines each scenario data stored in the scenario data storage areas 223f6 provided in the hold information storage first to third areas of the hold information storage area 223e. That is, it is determined whether or not each scenario data in each scenario data storage area 223f6 is the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in the hold symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 after the shift. This determination is made, for example, whether or not the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 stored by shifting to the hold information storage first area is data indicating the number of hold balls "1", or the cockpit display. After the area Db is erased, it is determined whether or not the data is to be executed in the hold symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 for the "hold change notice" (that is, "after the cockpit is erased").

As a result of the processing of S1415, if the reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 for storing the scenario data corresponding to the execution timing do not exist (S1415: No), it is not necessary to perform the "pending change notice" for the reserved symbol. Therefore, the variation effect processing (S1109) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 for storing the scenario data corresponding to the execution timing exist (S1415: Yes), then the change timing of the reserved symbol, that is, the "pending change notice" in the reserved symbol It is determined whether or not the execution timing is "at the time of shift" or "after the cockpit is erased" (S1461). As a result of the determination, if the change timing of the hold symbol is the shift time of the hold symbol (S1461: "shift time"), the "hold change notice" is stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 in the corresponding hold symbol. To execute the display control device 114, a display shift hold change command including information on the corresponding hold symbol is set (S1462), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

The display shift hold change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be sent. The display control device 114 that has received the display shift hold change command performs display control so that when the hold symbol is shift-displayed, the corresponding hold symbol is displayed in the determined "hold change notice" display mode. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S1461, if the change timing of the reserved symbol is the timing when the reserved symbol is erased, that is, "after cockpit erase" (S1461: "after cockpit erase"), then the third symbol is displayed from now on. It is determined whether or not the variation element of "super reach or more" is executed in the variation effect executed by the device 81 (S1463). That is, in the fluctuation effect, it is confirmed whether or not there is a timing in which the cockpit display area Db is erased by the fluctuation element of "super reach or higher" and the reserved symbol becomes invisible. This determination is performed by discriminating the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29).

In the processing of S1463, if the variation element of "super reach or higher" is not executed in the variation effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 from now on (S1463: No), the variation effect to be executed from now on is "after cockpit erasing". Since the "pending change notice" of "" cannot be performed, the processing of S1464 to S1466 is skipped, the variation effect processing (S1109) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1463, if the variation element of "super reach or more" is executed in the variation effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 from now on (S1463: Yes), then the cockpit display area Db has already been executed. It is determined whether or not the pending symbol has been changed by executing the effect of erasing (S1464). This determination determines whether or not the hold change information stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 of the hold information storage area 223e has been rewritten to the hold change completed information. When the hold change information in the hold change information storage area 223e5 is the hold change information, the "hold change notice" has already been executed in the hold symbol, so that it is not necessary to perform the "hold change notice" again. Therefore, as a result of the determination of S1464, if the pending change information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 (S1464: Yes), the processing of S1465 and S1466 is skipped and the variation effect processing (S1109) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S1464, if the pending change information is not stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 (S1464: No), the "pending change notice" of "after cockpit erasing" has not been executed yet. After the cockpit display area Db is erased, at the timing when it is redisplayed, the display control device 114 is used to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 for the corresponding hold symbol. Set the hold change command for display including the information of the corresponding hold symbol toward (S1465). Then, the pending change information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 of the corresponding reserved symbol (S1466), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

When the "hold change notice" of "after cockpit deletion" is executed, the hold change information storage area 223e5 of the corresponding hold symbol is stored, but instead of this, the corresponding hold change information is stored. The scenario data of the symbol scenario data storage area 223e6 may be changed from "after cockpit erasure" to Null data or the like. With this configuration, in the processing of S1415, it is determined that the reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 for storing the scenario data corresponding to the execution timing do not exist (S1415: No), and thereafter, the corresponding reserved symbol is determined. It can be configured not to give a "pending change notice" in.

The display change post-erasure command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be done. The display control device 114 that has received the change command after erasing for display executes the fluctuation element of "super reach or more" in the fluctuation effect, erases the cockpit display area Db, and changes the fluctuation element of "super reach or more". At the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after the end, display control is performed so that the corresponding reserved symbol is displayed in the determined display mode of the "pending change notice".

Next, the execution symbol change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an execution symbol change process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment. This execution symbol change processing is executed in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 60) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28), and the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. It is done to execute "pending change notice" in.

In the execution symbol change processing of the fifth embodiment, as a result of the determination of S1501, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is the number of reserved balls "0" and "after cockpit erasure". (S1501: "After erasing the cockpit"), first, it is determined whether or not the effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db has already been executed and the executed symbol has been changed (S1571). This determination determines whether or not the pending change information stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f has been rewritten to the pending change information. If the hold change information in the hold change information storage area 223f5 is the hold change information, the "hold change notice" has already been executed in the execution symbol, so that it is not necessary to perform the "hold change notice" again. Therefore, as a result of the determination in S1571, if the pending change information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 (S1571: Yes), the processing of S1572 to S1574 is skipped and the execution symbol change processing (S1414) is performed. After finishing, the process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 60).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1571, if the pending change information is not stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 (S1571: No), the "pending change notice" of "after cockpit erasure" has not been executed yet. In addition, in order to confirm whether or not the "pending change notice" of "after cockpit erasure" can be executed in the fluctuation production, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation element of "super reach or more" is executed in the fluctuation production. (S1572). This determination is performed by discriminating the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29).

As a result of the determination in S1572, when the variation element of "super reach or more" is executed in the variation effect (S1572: Yes), there is an effect in which the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variation effect. , In order to confirm whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed after the "reach display" of the fluctuation effect, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation element of the "re-variation" is executed in the fluctuation effect (S1573). ). This determination is performed by discriminating the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29).

As a result of the determination of S1573, when the variable element of "re-variation" is executed in the variation effect (S1573: Yes), it is a variation effect in which "re-variation" is executed after "reach display", and the cockpit. Since the "hold change notice" can be executed when the display area Db is redisplayed, the "hold change notice" is executed in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f. A change command after erasing for display is set toward the display control device 114 (S1574), and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 60).

The display change post-erasure command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Will be done. The display control device 114 that has received the change command after erasing for display is after the "super reach" or "special reach" of the variation effect is completed for the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. , The display control is performed so as to change the execution symbol (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") to the determined display mode of the "pending change notice" at the timing before the execution of the "revariation".

On the other hand, in the processing of S1572, if the variation element of "super reach or higher" is not executed in the variation effect (S1572: No), the effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db is not performed in the variation effect, so that the "cockpit" is displayed. "After erasing" "Pending change notice" cannot be executed.

Further, in the processing of S1573, when the variable element of "re-variation" is not executed in the variation effect (S1573: No), since the variation element of "re-variation" is not included in the variation effect, "after cockpit erasure". There is no point in executing the "pending change notice". Specifically, for example, even if the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol is executed after the "super reach" is executed and the "big hit display" is confirmed, no effect is generated after the "super reach". , The player cannot be given any interest, but rather awakens with a meaningless production. Also, for example, even if the "hold change notice" of the execution symbol is executed after the "super reach" is executed and the "loss display" is confirmed, the "loss display" is confirmed as it is, and the next variation effect is started. In that case, the discrepancy in the production gives the player a sense of distrust of the game.

Therefore, in the processing of S1572, when it is determined that the variation element of "super reach or more" is not executed in the variation effect (S1572: No), or in the process of S1573, "revariation" in the variation effect. If it is determined that the variable element is not executed (S1573: No), the "pending change notice" cannot be executed "after the cockpit is erased", so the process is performed in S1504 to confirm the executable timing of the "holding change notice". Move to.

With this configuration, even if the initially set "after cockpit erasure" "pending change notice" cannot be executed, the execution timing ("after reach" or "before reach") can be executed. You can change it and execute "pending change notice". Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the "hold change notice" is not executed even though the lottery is won, the execution rate of the "hold change notice" can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, even if the lottery process of "pending change notice" and the lottery process of variable effect are performed by different (different system) processes, adjustments are made so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of each effect. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a different (separate system) program, it is possible to facilitate the design of each program and to execute a consistent production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, an execution example of the “pending change notice” of “after cockpit erasing” will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a situation in which a “pending change notice” of “after cockpit erasing” is performed in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the fifth embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a state just before the “reach display” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 62 (a) and "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 62 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 62 (b). FIG. 62 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect suggesting that a “loss display” appears in the effect of “super reach” is being executed from the state of FIG. 62 (c). FIG. 62 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. 62 (d) and the “loss display” appears in the main display area Dm. is there. FIG. 62 (f) shows the variation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3 at the stage of FIG. 62 (e) after the variation effect is digested from the state of FIG. 62 (e). It is a figure which showed the state just before the appearance of "big hit display". In FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted.

In FIG. 62A, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. Further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and "high-speed fluctuation" is shown. Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a warning mode suggesting that the "reach display" appears. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is supporting. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times.

In FIG. 62 (b), from the state of FIG. 62 (a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed, and the “reach display” by the “7” symbol is displayed. Is confirmed, and indicates a state in which "normal reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach", it is displayed as if the entire main display area Dm is enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol during stop display is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is visibly changed at a low speed (for example). , "5" symbol is scrolled slowly to "6" symbol).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds is invisible.

In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 62A, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Has been done. Therefore, as in FIG. 62A, the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is four times. Shown.

FIG. 62 (c) shows a state in which "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 62 (b). In this "super reach", the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in FIG. 62 (c), a “battle effect” (“competition effect” in “special reach”) in which a plurality of character symbols compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of "super reach", and instead, the third symbol display device 81 A numerical symbol (“4” in the fifth embodiment) indicating the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is newly displayed in the upper left of the display area.

In FIG. 62 (d), from the state of FIG. 62 (c), the character symbol on the player side (left character symbol) is changed to the character symbol on the enemy side (right character symbol) in the “battle effect” in “super reach”. The losing state is displayed. Therefore, when the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 62 (d), the character symbol on the player side loses in the "battle production" of the "super reach", and thus the "big hit display" is displayed in the "super reach". "Is not appearing, but it is predicted that" loss display "will appear.

Further, in FIG. 62 (d), as in FIG. 62 (c), since the “super reach” is being executed, the cockpit display area Db is maintained in the erased state.

In FIG. 62 (e), from the state of FIG. 62 (d), the effect of "super reach" is lost (the character symbol on the enemy side wins), and the "loss display (787)" is displayed in the main display area Dm. Appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds and the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are visible again. The character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "loss display". That is, in the main part of the third symbol display device 81, a state in which the chance is down is displayed.

In FIG. 62E, the display mode before the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3 of the cockpit display area Db is erased by the execution of “super reach” (“white”. FIG. 62 (e). b) It is displayed in a display mode (“blue”) changed from). That is, the "pending change notice" is performed at the execution timing of "after the cockpit is erased". That is, in the portion (sub portion) of the third symbol display device 81 that is not the main portion, the state in which the chance is increased is displayed. Therefore, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a state in which the chance is down in the main part and a state in which the chance is up in the non-main part are displayed at the same time.

When the player saw the state of FIG. 62 (e), the "missing display (787)" appeared in the main display area Dm and the player lost in the "battle production" in the "super reach". Based on the impression of, as predicted at the time of FIG. 62 (d), it is presumed that the "big hit display" does not appear in this fluctuation effect, the "loss display" appears, and the "loss display" is confirmed as it is. I am in a state where my interest is shifting to the next fluctuation production. Then, when the player sees the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db in order to pay attention to the content of the next variable effect, the "pending change notice" is displayed in the reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Db3 indicating the pending variable effect. Is performed, and it is recognized that the reserved symbol has changed to "blue".

At this point, the player who saw the "hold change notice" of "after cockpit erasure" for the first time noticed the difference in the display mode of the hold symbol from before the execution of "battle production" of "super reach". Feel something is wrong. Then, he recognizes that the source of the discomfort is the reserved symbol of "blue". Then, based on his own memory, he examines when the "holding change notice" of the holding symbol of the "blue" was performed. As a result of the examination, it is understood that the "pending change notice" was not executed before the execution of the "super reach", but was executed after the execution of the "super reach". At this moment, the player predicts that some event will occur in the pending fluctuation effect in which this "pending change notice" is executed.

In FIG. 62 (f), two variation effects are digested from the state of FIG. 62 (e) (at the stage of FIG. 62 (e), the first reserved symbol display area Db1 and the second reserved symbol display area Db2 are displayed. The variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol is executed), and the "big hit display" appears in the variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3 at the stage of FIG. 62 (e). Indicates the state of. In this variation effect, the stop display is performed at "777" which is the "big hit display". As inferred at the stage of FIG. 62 (e), the player can obtain a feeling of happiness and satisfaction for the appearance of the "big hit display" in the fluctuation effect in which the "pending change notice" occurs. ..

In addition, a player who has once experienced the "pending change notice" of this "after cockpit erasure" will display a "loss" in the "super reach" or "special reach" from the next time, even if the "super reach" etc. ”Appears, it is confirmed whether or not the reserved symbol has been changed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db to be redisplayed. Therefore, the interest of confirming the display mode of the reserved symbol that is redisplayed even after the execution of "Super Reach" is born, and even if the variable display during execution is lost, the reserved symbol is "pending". The game can be played while expecting that the "change notice" is generated and the "big hit display" appears in the variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the "pending change notice" at various timings.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a "hold change notice" is given in the hold symbol and the execution symbol indicating the fluctuation effect that causes a big hit, the hold symbol is used by "super reach" or the like. Alternatively, the "hold change notice" can be displayed (executed) at the timing when the execution symbol is deleted and the effect of the "super reach" is completed and the hold symbol or the execution symbol is redisplayed. As a result, when the notice target (change target. In the fifth embodiment, the reserved symbol or the execution symbol) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or a new notice target is displayed. Compared with the case of issuing and notifying, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the notice target while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice target. In particular, the reserved symbol that the player is not paying attention to is temporarily made invisible and then subtly changed, and the change mode is also a slight change from the normal change (minimum change mode, one-step change). First, while making it difficult for the player to notice the change in the reserved symbol, the change gives the player a sense of discomfort. After that, by recognizing that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big hit), the player is provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect is diversified to promote the game. Can be enhanced.

In addition, when executing the one-step "hold change notice" in the execution symbol or the hold symbol showing the variation effect of the jackpot, the one-step display mode is performed at the timing of "after cockpit erasure" in which the cockpit display area Db is erased. Configure to change to ("blue"). Further, when executing the "pending change notice" that has changed in a plurality of stages, the execution timing of "after cockpit erasing" is not selected. With this configuration, even if it is a one-stage "holding change notice" that could not be expected to be a big hit in the past, it is possible to expect a big hit depending on the timing when the "holding change notice" occurs. It will be possible. As a result, the significance of existence of the one-stage "pending change notice", which could not be found in the past, can be enhanced, a big hit can be expected in any production pattern, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced by various productions.

Further, the "holding change notice" of "after cockpit erasing" is configured so that the larger the number of holding balls at the time when the "holding change notice" is determined, the easier it is to select. The greater the number of variation effects executed before the variation effect corresponding to the "pending change notice" of "after cockpit deletion" is confirmed and displayed, the higher the possibility that the cockpit display area Db will be deleted. It is possible to increase the chances that the "pending change notice" of "after the cockpit is erased" is executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, since the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f are not provided with the hold deletion information storage areas 223e7, 223f7 and the revariation information storage areas 223e8, 223f8, the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the first embodiment are not provided. The storage capacity is reduced as compared with the execution information storage area 223f.

Further, when the hold ball number command is received, the hold erase information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variation effect and the re-variation indicating whether or not the variation element of "re-variation" is performed in the variation effect are performed. It does not distinguish and store information. As a result, the capacity of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 221 is reduced.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 70. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased by the appearance of the variable element of "super reach" in the variable effect during execution, and the variable element of "super reach" is completed. At the timing when the cockpit display area Db was displayed again, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" was given to the execution symbol. Further, in the variation effect of the first embodiment, as the "reach display", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach" and the variable element of "special reach" (hereinafter, abbreviated as "each reach display"). There are three different types of "reach display", and the reach pattern (execution mode) of each "reach display" is composed of one type.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a plurality of reach patterns of "each reach display" are provided (in the sixth embodiment, two types of "weak pattern" and "strong pattern"), and "each When "reach display" is selected, it is configured to determine the reach pattern of the "each reach display". Specifically, for example, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the variable effect, the "super reach" effect mode is described with reference to the values of the reach pattern table 222h and the reach pattern counter 223k, which will be described later. It is configured to select either a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern" reach pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after erasure of hold" is executed, when the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is selected for "each reach display", the said. Change "strong pattern" to "weak pattern" reach pattern. Then, after the "weak pattern" "each reach display" is executed, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is executed.

Conventionally, when a plurality of types of reach patterns are provided in each "reach display" for the purpose of diversifying the effect pattern, for example, a "strong pattern" reach pattern that is easily selected at the time of a big hit and the "strong pattern" A "weak pattern" reach pattern, which is more difficult to select at the time of a big hit, is provided. That is, the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" is easily selected at the time of a big hit and is easily selected at the time of loss, and the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is easily selected at the time of a big hit and is difficult to be selected at the time of loss. .. Therefore, the player recognizes that when the "weak pattern" of "each reach display" appears, it is unlikely that a jackpot will be given in the variation effect due to the low expected value of the jackpot, and the variation. There is a risk that he will give up the big hit in the production and will be awakened by the appearance of the reach pattern of "weak pattern".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is performed in the change effect of the jackpot, the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is set in the "each reach display" of the change effect. If selected, the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is changed to the reach pattern of the "weak pattern". With this configuration, even if the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" appears, after the end of the variable element of the "reach display" of the "weak pattern", the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" If appears, it will be a big hit, so even when the "weak pattern" appears, it will be possible to enjoy the game without awakening.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 63, a detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment further stores at least a reach pattern table 222h with respect to the ROM 222 of the first to fifth embodiments. The reach pattern table 222h will be described later with reference to FIG.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment is further provided with at least a reach pattern counter 223k with respect to the RAM 223 of the first to fifth embodiments.

The reach pattern counter 223k is a counter for drawing the reach pattern of "each reach display". As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the fluctuation pattern (effect mode) from the fluctuation pattern command. Then, when the extracted variation pattern includes the effect mode of "reach display", the reach pattern of "reach display" is set by the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern table 222h based on the type of "reach display". It is configured to draw a lottery for either a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern".

The reach pattern counter 223k is sequentially added by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the maximum value is increased. (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the reach pattern counter 223k is updated (for example, 1 addition) once for each loop of the main process (see S1111 in FIG. 28). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted, and the reach pattern is based on the type of "reach display". With reference to the value of the counter 223k and the reach pattern table 222h, the reach pattern of the “reach display” is drawn by lottery (see S1703 in FIG. 67).

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the reach pattern table 222h showing the reach pattern of “each reach display” and the selection ratio of each reach pattern of each “each reach display” in the sixth embodiment will be described. .. FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a “weak pattern” and a “strong pattern” of the reach pattern in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the reach pattern table 222h. It is a figure shown.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern command. Then, when it is determined that the "reach display" is executed for the fluctuation pattern, the reach pattern of the "reach display" is determined by referring to the reach pattern table 222h based on the value of the reach pattern counter 223k at that time. Will be done. Specifically, in the sixth embodiment, "background blue" and "background red" are provided as the reach patterns of "normal reach", and "punch" and "kick" are provided as the reach patterns of "super reach". A "gun" and a "cannon" are provided as the reach patterns of the "special reach" (see FIG. 64 (a)). Since the reach pattern is not provided, the “special variation” is expressed as “−” (see FIG. 64 (a)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the reach pattern for each “reach display” in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing a “weak pattern” of “normal reach” in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing a “strong pattern” of “normal reach”. 65 (c) is a diagram showing a “weak pattern” of “super reach”, and FIG. 65 (d) is a diagram showing a “strong pattern” of “super reach”, FIG. 65 (e). Is a diagram showing a “weak pattern” of the “special reach”, and FIG. 65 (f) is a diagram showing a “strong pattern” of the “special reach”.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a reach pattern of "background blue" is provided as a "weak pattern" of "normal reach" (see FIG. 65 (a)). Further, as a "strong pattern" of "normal reach", a reach pattern of "background red" is provided (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, as a "weak pattern" of "super reach", a reach pattern of "punch" is provided (see FIG. 65 (c)). Further, as a "strong pattern" of "super reach", a reach pattern of "kick" is provided (see FIG. 65 (d)).

Further, as a "weak pattern" of the "special reach", a reach pattern of the "gun" is provided (see FIG. 65 (e)). Further, as a "strong pattern" of the "special reach", a reach pattern of the "cannon" is provided (see FIG. 65 (f)).

Returning to FIG. 64 (b), the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the reach pattern table 222h is grouped based on the selected "reach display".

Specifically, "Loss: Normal Reach" referred to when "Normal Reach" at the time of loss is determined, and "Loss: Super Reach" referred to when "Super Reach" at the time of loss is determined. For "Loss: Special Reach" which is referred to when "Special Reach" at the time of loss is decided, and for "Big Hit: Normal Reach" which is referred to when "Normal Reach" at the time of jackpot is decided , For "big hit: super reach" that is referred to when "super reach" at the time of big hit is decided, and for "big hit: special reach" that is referred to when "special reach" at the time of big hit is decided , It is divided into "special fluctuation" at the time of big hit. Then, the value of the reach pattern counter 223k is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the reach pattern table 222h, the value of the reach pattern counter 223k is not assigned to the "special variation" at the time of a big hit. This is because the "special variation" is an effect mode that is completely selected at the time of the "2R probability variation jackpot", the variation elements of the "movie" are selected without omission, and no other reach pattern is provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 64 (b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the “normal reach” effect mode is “0 to 79” for the “weak pattern” and “strong pattern” for the “strong pattern”. It is "80 to 99".

That is, when the production mode of "normal reach" at the time of loss is selected, the reach pattern of "weak pattern" is set to be selected at a ratio of 80%, and the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%. ing. Therefore, the reach pattern selected at the time of "normal reach" at the time of loss is set (80%) so that the "weak pattern" is easily selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 64 (b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the production mode of "super reach" is "0 to 89" for the "weak pattern" and "0 to 89" for the "strong pattern". It is "90 to 99".

That is, when the production mode of "super reach" at the time of loss is selected, the reach pattern of "weak pattern" is set to 90% and the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is set to 10%. Has been done. Therefore, the reach pattern selected at the time of "super reach" at the time of loss is set (90%) so that the "weak pattern" is easily selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 64 (b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the production mode of the "special reach" is "0 to 98" for the "weak pattern" and "0 to 98" for the "strong pattern". It is "99".

That is, when the production mode of "special reach" at the time of loss is selected, the reach pattern of "weak pattern" is set to 99% and the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is set to 1%. Has been done. Therefore, the reach pattern selected at the time of "special reach" at the time of loss is set (99%) so that "weak pattern" is easily selected.

Therefore, in any of the "reach displays", the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" is easily selected and the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is difficult to be selected at the time of loss.

In the example shown in FIG. 64 (b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the “normal reach” effect mode is “0 to 9” for the “weak pattern” and “strong pattern” for the “strong pattern”. It is "10 to 99".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" is set to 10%, and the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is set to 90%. ing. Therefore, the reach pattern selected at the time of "normal reach" at the time of big hit is set (90%) so that "strong pattern" is easily selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 64 (b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the production mode of "super reach" is "0 to 19" for the "weak pattern" and "0 to 19" for the "strong pattern". It is "20 to 99".

That is, when the production mode of "super reach" at the time of big hit is selected, the reach pattern of "weak pattern" is set to 20% and the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is set to 80%. Has been done. Therefore, the reach pattern selected at the time of "super reach" at the time of big hit is set (80%) so that "strong pattern" is easily selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 64 (b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the production mode of the "special reach" is "0 to 29" for the "weak pattern" and "0 to 29" for the "strong pattern". It is "30 to 99".

That is, when the production mode of "special reach" at the time of big hit is selected, the reach pattern of "weak pattern" is set to be selected at a ratio of 30%, and the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is set to be selected at a ratio of 70%. Has been done. Therefore, the reach pattern selected at the time of "special reach" at the time of big hit is set (70%) so that "strong pattern" is easily selected.

Therefore, in any of the "reach displays", the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is easily selected and the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" is difficult to be selected at the time of a big hit.

In this way, by providing a reach pattern of "strong pattern" that is easy to be selected at the time of big hit and difficult to be selected at the time of loss, and a reach pattern of "weak pattern" that is difficult to be selected at the time of big hit and easy to be selected at the time of loss, "weak". By the difference in the expected value of the jackpot in the reach pattern between the "pattern" and the "strong pattern", it is possible to diversify the effect pattern of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game.

Next, the command determination process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1110). This command determination process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1110), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is read from the main control unit 110. Is determined (S1201). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1201: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command, and the details in the variation effect are the variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern (reach pattern). (S1251), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), the processes of S1204 to S1212 are performed, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

Here, with reference to FIG. 67, the fluctuation pattern determination process (S1251) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern determination process (S1251). When the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command is "reach display", the variation pattern determination process (S1251) determines the reach pattern of the "reach display" and displays variation for the display control device 114. Performs the process of setting the pattern command.

In this fluctuation pattern determination process (S1251), first, a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1701). The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223. Then, it is determined whether or not "reach display" is included in the fluctuation pattern (S1702). As a result of the determination, if the fluctuation pattern includes the "reach display" (S1702: Yes), the reach is based on the value of the reach pattern counter 223k at that time in order to determine the detailed reach pattern of the "reach display". The reach pattern is determined with reference to the pattern table 222h (S1703), and the process shifts to S1704. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern does not include "reach display" (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped and the process shifts to S1704.

In the process of S1704, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern and the reach pattern is set based on the extracted variation pattern and reach pattern (S1704). , The variation pattern determination process (S1251) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 66). In the process of S1704, a dedicated display variation pattern command is set for the variation effect in which the reach pattern does not exist as in the "special variation" effect mode.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1102 in FIG. 28) of the main process. .. As a result, the display control device 114 executes the process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation effect of the variation pattern and the reach pattern determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the variation effect processing (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the variation effect processing (S1109) of the sixth embodiment.

This variation effect processing (S1109) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, first, the hold information storage first of the hold information storage area 223e is performed. Various information stored in the area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and the information stored in the hold information storage areas 2 to 4 is shifted to the hold information storage areas 1 to 3. In addition, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 matches the content (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, and the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is executed. When this is done, a variable change process is performed to change the reach pattern from the "strong pattern" to the "weak pattern". Further, when the stop type command received from the main control device 110 does not match the content (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, a display error command is generated and this command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Perform the process to be set. Further, when it is the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in the execution symbol and the hold symbol, various commands related to each execution timing of the "hold change notice" are generated, and these commands are transmitted to the display control device 114. Perform the process to set to.

Specifically, in the variation effect processing (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), at least the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation effect The process is completed and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the processing of S1402 to S1404 is performed in order to start the fluctuation effect. Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 matches the content (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, and the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is displayed. When executed, a variable change process for changing the reach pattern from the "strong pattern" to the "weak pattern" is performed (S1471). After the process of the variation change process (S1471), the processes of S1408 to S1416 are executed, the variation effect process (S1109) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation change process (S1471) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation change processing (S1471). In this fluctuation change processing, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control unit 110 matches the content (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, and the "hold change" of "after hold deletion" is determined. When the "notice" is executed, the process of changing the reach pattern from the "strong pattern" to the "weak pattern" is performed.

Specifically, first, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed from now on is acquired (S1801). Then, the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1701 of the variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 67) are one. It is determined whether or not it is done (S1802). If the information related to the fluctuation effect indicated by the variation pattern command received this time and the information related to the variation effect stored in the execution information storage area 223f (hold information storage area 223e) before that are different, some abnormality (noise, etc.) ), It is not possible to execute a normal fluctuation effect (fluctuation pattern). Therefore, by this discrimination process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is discriminated, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal fluctuation effect can be executed.

If, as a result of the determination in S1802, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 223 do not match (S1802: No), there is some abnormality in the variation effect to be executed. Is generated, a display error command for notifying the display control device 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1803), and the process shifts to S1804.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 28) of the main process. .. By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some abnormality has occurred in the fluctuation effect, switches the third symbol display device 81 to an error display (for example, default fluctuation), and causes the error. Start display control of the display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 223 match (S1802: Yes), there is an abnormality regarding the fluctuation effect to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1803 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1804.

Next, in the process of S1804, it is determined whether or not the execution timing is such that the "pending change notice" appears in the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (S1804). This determination confirms the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the execution information storage area 223f, and the scenario data has "0" reserved balls, "at the start", and "before reach". , "After reach" or "After erasure on hold" (hereinafter, abbreviated as "at the start" to "after erasure on hold").

As a result of the determination in S1804, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is the number of reserved balls "0" and indicates any of "at the start" to "after the hold is deleted". If it is data (S1804: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "after hold deletion" (S1805).

Since it is determined in S1805 whether or not the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "after the hold is deleted", the processing of whether or not the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in the execution symbol in S1804 is performed is It can be omitted.

As a result of the determination of S1805, if the execution timing of this "hold change notice" is "after hold deletion" (S1805: Yes), then the reach pattern of the "reach display" executed in the fluctuation effect is "strong". It is determined whether or not it is a "pattern" (S1806). This determination is performed by discriminating the reach pattern determined in the process of S1703 of the variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 67). As a result of the determination, if the reach pattern of the "reach display" executed in the variation effect is the "strong pattern" (S1806: Yes), the reach pattern of the "reach display" is changed from the "strong pattern" to the "weak pattern". (S1807), a display reach pattern change command is set based on the changed reach pattern (S1808), this variation change process (S1471) is terminated, and the process proceeds to the variation effect process (see FIG. 68). Return.

In this way, when the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the hold" is performed in the variation effect, if the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is selected in the "each reach display" of the variation effect, the "strong pattern" is selected. The reach pattern of "" is changed to the reach pattern of "weak pattern". With this configuration, even if the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" appears, after the end of the variable element of the "reach display" of the "weak pattern", the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" If appears, it will be a big hit, so even when the "weak pattern" appears, it will be possible to enjoy the game without awakening.

In the process of S1804, the number of scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "0", and any of "at the start" to "after the hold is deleted" is selected. If it is not the data shown (S1804: No), the "pending change notice" in the execution symbol is not executed, so the processing of S1805 to S1808 is skipped, the fluctuation change processing (S1471) is terminated, and the fluctuation effect processing (S1471) is terminated. (See FIG. 68). Further, in the process of S1805, if the execution timing of the current "hold change notice" is not "after hold deletion" (S1805: No), the processes of S1806 to S1808 are skipped and this change change process (S1471) is performed. After finishing, the process returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 68). In the processing of S1806, if the reach pattern of the "reach display" executed in the variation effect is not a "strong pattern" (S1806: No), it is not necessary to change the reach pattern, so the processing of S1807 and S1808 is skipped. Then, the variation change process (S1471) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 68).

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, an execution example of the “hold change notice” of “after hold deletion” in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a situation in which a “holding change notice” of “after holding and erasing” is performed in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment.

Specifically, FIG. 70A is a diagram showing a state just before the “reach display” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 70 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 70 (a) and the variable element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 70 (c) shows a state in which the cockpit display area Db is erased from the state of FIG. 70 (b) and the “weak pattern” of the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a figure. FIG. 70 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect suggesting that a “loss display” appears in the effect of the variable element of “super reach” is executed from the state of FIG. 70 (c). .. FIG. 70 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. 70 (d) and the “loss display” appears in the main display area Dm. is there. FIG. 70 (f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "re-variation" is executed from the state of FIG. 70 (e) and the "big hit display" appears. In FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted.

In FIG. 70A, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. Further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and "high-speed fluctuation" is shown. Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a warning mode suggesting that the "reach display" appears. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is supporting. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times.

In FIG. 70 (b), from the state of FIG. 70 (a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. Is confirmed, and indicates a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol during stop display is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is visibly changed at a low speed (for example). , "5" symbol is scrolled slowly to "6" symbol).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the variable element of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds is invisible.

In the state of FIG. 70 (b), in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 as in the display state of FIG. 70 (a), and the first to fourth reserved symbols are displayed. The reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 70A, the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm, and the four hold symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is four times. Shown.

FIG. 70 (c) shows a state in which the “weak pattern” of the variable element of the “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 70 (b). In the "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "super reach", the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol displayed by the variable element of the "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the variable element of the "super reach", and instead, the third symbol display is displayed. A numerical symbol (“4” in the sixth embodiment) indicating the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is newly displayed on the upper left of the display area of the device 81.

Further, in the variable element of the "super reach" of FIG. 70 (c), a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character symbols compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this "battle effect", an effect (in the sixth embodiment, kickboxing) in which the character symbol on the player side (for example, the left character symbol) and the character symbol on the enemy side (for example, the right character symbol) fight is executed. ..

As described above, the variable elements of "super reach" are expressed by different attack patterns of the character pattern on the player side, so that the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of the variable elements of "super reach" are expressed. And is configured to be executable. Specifically, a "punch" of "weak pattern", a "kick" of "strong pattern" and a reach pattern are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 70 (c), the variable element of "super reach" is provided. The "punch", which is the reach pattern of the "weak pattern", is being executed.

Conventionally, in the variable element of "super reach", the "strong pattern" is easily selected when the jackpot is won, and the "weak pattern" is easily selected when the jackpot is not won, that is, when the jackpot is lost. It is configured. Therefore, the player who sees the "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "super reach", at the stage of seeing the "weak pattern", the player side with the "battle effect" of the variable element of the "super reach". It is expected that the character symbol of will be difficult to beat the character symbol of the enemy side, and as a result, the character symbol of the player side will lose to the character symbol of the enemy side and will be lost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is executed, that is, for example, after winning the jackpot and executing the variable element of "super reach", " When the "big hit display" appears due to "re-variation", the reach pattern of the variable element of "super reach" can be changed from "strong pattern" to "weak pattern". Therefore, even if a "weak pattern" appears as a variable element of "super reach", a "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" will occur and a big hit will occur. At the stage when the "weak pattern" of the variable element appears, it does not awaken, but pays attention to the timing when the variable element of "super reach" ends and the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed, and concentrates on the variable effect until that stage. By doing so, you can maintain your interest for a long time.

In the state of FIG. 70 (c), the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol, which is the cause of the variable element of the "super reach", is reduced in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. it's shown.

In FIG. 70 (d), from the state of FIG. 70 (c), in the "battle effect" in the variable element of "super reach", the character symbol on the player side (left character symbol) is the character symbol on the enemy side (right character). The state of losing is displayed in the design). Therefore, when the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 70 (d), the character symbol on the player side loses in the "battle effect" of the variable element of the "super reach", so that the "super reach" It is predicted that the "big hit display" will not appear and the "missing display" will appear as a variable element.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is executed, the reach pattern of the variable element of "super reach" is changed from "strong pattern" to "weak pattern". It is configured to be changeable to. Therefore, if a "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach" appears, a player who has already experienced that a "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" may occur. , The variable element of "Super Reach" lost to "Battle production" due to "Weak pattern", but when the variable element of "Super Reach" ends, the execution symbol of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. We are paying attention to the possibility that a "pending change notice" will occur at the same timing, and we are concentrating on the fluctuation production until that stage.

Further, in FIG. 70 (d), as in FIG. 70 (c), since the variable element of “super reach” is being executed, the cockpit display area Db is maintained in the erased state.

In FIG. 70 (e), from the state of FIG. 70 (d), the effect of the variable element of "super reach" is lost (the character symbol on the enemy side wins), and the "loss display (loss display) is performed in the main display area Dm. 787) ”appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds and the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are visible again. The character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "loss display". That is, in the main part of the third symbol display device 81, a state in which the chance is down is displayed.

In FIG. 70 (e), the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is displayed before being erased by the execution of the variable element of “super reach” (“white”. See FIG. 70 (b)). It is displayed in a display mode (“blue”) changed from. That is, the "hold change notice" is performed at the execution timing of "after the hold is deleted". That is, in the portion (sub portion) of the third symbol display device 81 that is not the main portion, the state in which the chance is increased is displayed. Therefore, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a state in which the chance is down in the main part and a state in which the chance is up in the non-main part are displayed at the same time.

When the player first sees the state of FIG. 70 (e), the "loss display (787)" appears in the main display area Dm, and the "battle effect" in the variable element of "super reach". Due to the impression of losing in, as predicted at the time of Fig. 70 (d), when the "big hit display" does not appear in this fluctuation effect, the "loss display" appears, and the "loss display" is confirmed as it is. I guess, I'm in a state where I'm interested in the next fluctuation production. Then, when the player sees the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db in order to pay attention to the content of the next variation effect, a "hold change notice" is performed in the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0 indicating the current variation effect. , Recognize that the execution symbol has changed to "blue".

At this point, the player who sees the "pending change notice" of "after erasing the hold" for the first time first sees the difference in the display mode of the execution symbol from before the execution of the "battle effect" of the variable element of the "super reach". I noticed that I felt something was wrong. Then, he recognizes that the source of the discomfort is the "blue" execution pattern. Then, based on his own memory, he examines when the "pending change notice" of the execution symbol of the "blue" was performed. As a result of the examination, it is understood that the "pending change notice" was not executed before the execution of the variable element of "super reach", but was executed after the variable element of "super reach" was completed. .. At this moment, the player predicts that some event will occur due to the "blue" execution symbol in the variable effect being executed.

FIG. 70 (f) shows a state in which the fluctuation element of “re-variation” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 70 (e). In the variable element of this "re-variation", the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is erased, and "787" is stopped and displayed in each display area Dm1 to Dm3. Starts to fluctuate again, and is finally stopped and displayed at "777", which is a "big hit display". The player was surprised at the occurrence of the variable element of "re-variation", and as inferred at the stage of FIG. 70 (e), the variation effect developed without being confirmed by the "loss display", and " You can get a sense of happiness and satisfaction for the appearance of the "big hit display".

In addition, a player who has once experienced the "pending change notice" of "after erasing the hold" will change the "super reach" even in the variable element of the "super reach" of the "weak pattern" from the next time. Even if the element is executed with the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" and the "missing display" appears as a result of the variable element of the "super reach", it is redisplayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db. It will be confirmed whether or not the execution symbol has been changed. Therefore, the interest of confirming the display mode of the execution symbol that is redisplayed even after the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach" is born, and the "big hit display" appears until the variable effect is confirmed and displayed. You can play the game while expecting. Therefore, the interest of the game can be maintained until the variable effect is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the hold" is performed in the change effect of the jackpot, the "strong pattern" is displayed in the "each reach display" of the change effect. When the reach pattern of "" is selected, the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is changed to the reach pattern of the "weak pattern". With this configuration, even if the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" appears, after the end of the variable element of the "reach display" of the "weak pattern", the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" If appears, it will be a big hit, so even when the "weak pattern" appears, it will be possible to enjoy the game without awakening.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily inferred. For example, each embodiment is provided by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment to the embodiment or exchanging a part or a plurality of parts of the structure of the embodiment with each other. The embodiment may be modified to form the configuration. Further, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification example 1>
In each of the above embodiments, when the variable element of "super reach" appears, the entire cockpit display area Db is erased, and both the execution symbol and the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db become invisible. Was erased like this. On the other hand, only the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db may be deleted, and the execution symbol indicating the content of the variation effect being executed may be continuously displayed. With this configuration, when the "pending change notice" is executed in the execution symbol, the player is suggested to the player the jackpot expectation regarding the variable effect during execution based on the display mode of the "holding change notice". It is possible to continue, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the variable production during execution. If the execution symbol is continuously displayed without being erased during the variation effect, it is preferable to configure the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" to be executed for the hold symbol.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment or the fifth embodiment, the execution symbol or the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db that is visible in the normal state but becomes invisible when a variable element of "super reach" occurs. In, the "pending change notice" of "after pending erasure" is executed at the timing when the variable element of the "super reach" ends and the executed symbol and the reserved symbol become visible again. On the other hand, a display object different from the execution symbol or the reserved symbol may be configured to perform "change notice""aftererasure".

Specifically, for example, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds may be configured to perform "change notice" "after erasing". When performing "change notice" of "after erasing" in the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2, the character symbol is displayed at the timing when the central small area Ds2 is redisplayed after the end of the variable element of "super reach". A part (for example, only hair or only bee) or all (for example, facial expression of a character pattern) is displayed in a normal display mode (for example, "white" for bee and "black" for hair). , If it is a facial expression of a character pattern, it is a special display mode (for example, "red" if it is a bee, and if it is a hair, it is a "gold" character pattern) that is different from the disappointing mode when the "missing display" appears. If it is a facial expression, it may be configured to be displayed in a happy manner).

With this configuration, when the erased display is redisplayed, the player is redisplayed while assuming that it will be redisplayed with the same display content as before it was erased. Since the displayed object changes and the change is also a slight change from the entire displayed content, it is difficult to recognize the difference from the initial assumption. Therefore, it is possible to change the display content of the displayed object so that the player does not notice it, and it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, for example, the level meter display object is displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds, and the level meter display object is always displayed at normal times. This level meter display object is configured to specifically display the jackpot expectation in the variable effect, and specifically, every time an effect that raises the jackpot expectation appears in the variable effect (for example, a character). The level meter display is gradually raised to the appearance of the symbol, the appearance of the cut-in symbol, etc.), and the jackpot expectation at that stage is visualized and displayed so that the player can easily understand it. Then, at the timing of erasing the sub-display area Ds by the variable element of "super reach" or the like, the level meter display object is also erased, the variable element of "super reach" or the like ends, and the sub-display area Ds is re-erased. This level meter display is also redisplayed at the timing of display. When the redisplayed level meter display has changed from the display mode before erasure (for example, the level meter stage is higher than before erasure), the variable element of "re-variation" is performed. It is configured to derive the "big hit display".

Further, for example, in the background display of the main display area Dm, the background display is erased by the variable element or the like of the "super reach", the variable element or the like of the "super reach" is completed, and the background display of the main display area Dm is completed. This background display is also redisplayed at the timing of redisplaying. The redisplayed background display changes from the display mode before erasing (for example, the "city stage" is clearly changed to the "sky stage", the background color display color is changed from "blue" to "light blue", and the background When a small character symbol is additionally displayed so as to be mixed in a part), the variable element of "re-variation" is performed to derive the "big hit display".

In this way, by displaying the display object that is not the execution symbol or the reserved symbol at the timing of redisplaying it by changing it from before it is erased, the object that is always visible is directly changed and notified. Compared with the case where the object is newly displayed and notified, the display mode of the object can be subtly changed while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the object. By making the object invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the discomfort is recognized as being directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

Further, the change of the object may be configured to be performed by a plurality of objects. With this configuration, the player can see where the displayed object has been changed from before the erasure when the variable element of "super reach" ends and the display screen returns to the normal display mode. A game to search for is born, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Modification example 3>
In each of the above embodiments, when the "holding change notice" of "after erasing the hold" is executed, the display mode of the execution symbol or the hold symbol is displayed in an increased (chance-up) display mode from the normal display mode. Was configured in. On the other hand, when executing the "pending change notice" of "after erasing the hold", the display mode of the execution symbol or the hold symbol is displayed in a display mode that is lowered (chance down) from the display mode before the erasure. It may be configured. With this configuration, for example, when the reserved symbol before erasing is in the "blue" display mode, the reserved symbol is displayed in the normal display mode "white" at the timing of redisplaying. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which of the reserved symbols has changed by displaying the reserved symbol for which the "pending change notice" of "after the pending deletion" has been performed as the same display as the other reserved symbols. .. By obscuring the pending symbols that had changed before the erasure, it is unclear in which variation effect the "pending change notice" occurred. Then, the unclear impression gives the player a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made aware that the source of the discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big hit), thereby giving the player a surprising effect. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by diversifying the production while providing.

<Modification example 4>
In the third embodiment, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven at the same time. On the other hand, the movable accessories 87 and 88 may not be driven at the same time but may be driven separately. In this case, for example, only the left movable accessory 87 is configured to cover the cockpit display area Db. That is, it is configured to cover the cockpit display area Db only when the left movable accessory 87 is driven before the right movable accessory 88, and when the right movable accessory 88 is driven before the left movable accessory 87. Is configured so that the left movable accessory 87 cannot cover the cockpit display area Db. With this configuration, the content of the subsequent production changes depending on whether or not any of the movable accessories 87 and 88 starts moving first, so it is possible to create an interest in the way each movable accessory 87 and 88 starts moving. it can.

<Modification 5>
In the third embodiment, the left movable accessory 87 is driven to cover the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db, and at the timing when the left movable accessory 87 covers the execution symbol, "hold change notice" is given to the execution symbol. Was configured to do. On the other hand, the execution symbol may be concealed (covered) by another concealing member (covering member). Specifically, for example, a light guide plate is provided on the front side of the gaming board 13, and the front side of the light guide plate is mechanically etched to form fine linear irregularities on the side of the light guide plate. Light is introduced from the pachinko machine 10 and the light introduced by the unevenness is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the pattern corresponding to the unevenness appears to shine in color due to the light. Then, by arranging the unevenness on the front side of the execution symbol, the execution symbol is configured so as not to be seen when the light is incident on the light guide plate, and the incident of the light on the light guide plate is stopped to prevent the execution symbol. Is configured to execute the "pending change notice" when is visible again. With this configuration, the light guide plate and the third symbol display device 81 enable a three-dimensional effect, and at the timing of light incident on the light guide plate, a "hold change notice" of "after hold erase" is given. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by diversifying the production while providing the player with an unexpected production.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth embodiment, when the reach pattern of the "reach display" is provided with the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern", respectively, and the "hold change notice" of "after the hold is deleted" is performed, the "reach display" is displayed. When the "strong pattern" was selected, the "strong pattern" was changed to the "weak pattern". On the other hand, regarding the reach pattern of the "reach display", for example, in the "battle production", two types of action patterns, an attack pattern and a defense pattern based on the character symbol on the player side, and an attack pattern and an attack pattern based on the character symbol on the enemy side. Two types of action patterns, which are defense patterns, are provided, and a reach pattern is constructed by combining one of the action patterns based on the character symbol on the player side and one of the action patterns based on the character symbol on the enemy side. A combination of reach patterns that is selected only when the "pending change notice" of "" is executed may be provided. Specifically, when executing the "pending change notice" of "after erasing the hold", a combination of action patterns that cannot normally occur (for example, the defense pattern of the character symbol on the player side and the character symbol on the enemy side) The combination of the defense patterns and the defense patterns of the above) may be executed.

With this configuration, the player is given a first sense of discomfort by the combination pattern that cannot normally occur, and then the "hold change notice" is executed at the timing when the execution symbol or the hold symbol is redisplayed. The change gives the player a second sense of discomfort. When the player senses the second discomfort, he / she recognizes that the source of the second discomfort is directly related to the game value (for example, a big hit), thereby giving the player a surprising effect. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by diversifying the production while providing. Further, the player recognizes that the first discomfort before the second discomfort occurs is a preliminary display of the second discomfort. Then, the player who has experienced the event once plays a game of searching for a second discomfort and a game of searching for a first discomfort in the subsequent game, so that the game can be diversified and the game can be played. It can enhance the interest.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above embodiments, when the "holding change notice" is performed after the execution symbol or the holding symbol is made invisible, the "holding change notice" is performed in the execution symbol or the holding symbol at the timing when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. Was running. On the other hand, the "pending change notice" may be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. In this case, it may be configured to change the execution symbol or the reserved symbol while making it difficult for the player to recognize that the execution symbol or the reserved symbol is changing depending on the display mode (for example, morphing) in which the execution symbol or the reserved symbol gradually changes. ..

<Modification 8>
In the sixth embodiment, when the "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach" appears, the "pending change notice" of "after pending deletion" may appear. .. That is, it is configured to suggest the possibility that the "pending change notice" of "after pending deletion" is executed by the "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach". On the other hand, during the execution of the variation effect, it is suggested that the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" may be executed by the background display, the notice symbol, or the stop symbol of "loss display". It may be configured.

Specifically, for example, a weak background (“blue”) and a strong background (“red”) are provided in the background display, and the strong background is easier to directly display the “big hit display” than the weak background. The weak background is configured so that the "pending change notice" of "after erasing the hold" is more easily executed than the strong background. Also, for example, a weak notice ("mini character") and a strong notice ("deca character") are provided in the notice design, and the strong notice is easier to directly display the "big hit display" than the weak notice, but it is easier than the strong notice. It is configured so that the weak notice is easier to execute the "hold change notice" of "after the hold is deleted". Furthermore, the stop symbols of the "loss display" are weakly lost (eyes that are not related to each symbol such as "169") and strong lost ("123" in a predetermined permutation, and "645" that can be expressed as a pun. "Mujiko)" and other symbols that are related to each other are provided, and it is easier for a strong loser to directly display a "big hit display" than for a weak loser, but a weaker loser than a strong loser. It is configured so that the "pending change notice" of "after erasing the hold" is more easily executed.

With this configuration, the player is allowed to play the game while paying attention to whether or not an effect suggesting the execution of the "hold change notice" of "after the hold is deleted" appears during the execution of the change effect. , The interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Modification example 9>
In each of the above embodiments, the display object (execution symbol or reserved symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 switches from a visually recognizable state to an unrecognizable state, and is visually recognized again. By changing the display mode at the timing when it can be done, it is configured to cause a sense of discomfort based on the change. On the other hand, it may be configured to cause a sense of discomfort to the player by changing the perception other than the visual sense, for example, the cognition based on the auditory sense or the cutaneous sense (tactile sense, temperature sense, pain sense, wind sense, etc.). ..

For example, in the case of causing a sense of discomfort due to hearing, the sound output by the voice output device 226 is changed from the normal state so that the player feels a sense of discomfort. The sense of discomfort caused by voice is, for example, changing the method of stimulating the player's hearing from the normal output state, such as the pitch of the sound, the change pattern of the sound image, the volume of the sound, the change of the rhythm, and the type of musical instrument. It is configured to make the player feel uncomfortable.

Specifically, for example, when the sound is initially combined and output with the treble and bass of the sound, the sound output is temporarily stopped (silence), and then the sound is output again, only the treble of the sound is output. It is configured to output with. Also, for example, when a sound whose sound image changes from right to left is initially output, the sound output is temporarily stopped (silence), and then the sound is output again, the sound whose sound image changes from left to right. Is configured to output. Further, for example, when the sound is initially output by the piano, the sound output is temporarily stopped (silence), and then the sound is output again, the sound is output by the guitar.

Visual recognition is easy to recognize early when you feel something is wrong because you can continue to visually confirm it, but auditory recognition is that sound is only the output at that moment. It is lower than the visual cognitive ability because it cannot be confirmed continuously. Therefore, changing the sound from the normal output state to make the player feel a sense of discomfort can prolong the time until the player clearly recognizes the sense of discomfort.

Also, for example, skin sensation (tactile sensation (perception of touch), temperature sensation (perception of temperature), pain sensation (perception of pain or stimulus), pressure sensation (perception of pressure), wind sensation (perception of wind) ), Etc., as a case of causing a sense of discomfort due to the perception) that occurs on the body surface, such as the operation handle 51, the frame button 22, the ball pulling lever 52, the ball lending button 42, the return button 43, and other games such as a fan and a heater. It is configured so that the player feels uncomfortable by making the control state different from the normal for the parts that stimulate the person.

Specifically, for example, the operation handle 51 is configured so that the player feels a sense of discomfort by making the urging force of the spring that urges the operation handle 51 to the initial position stronger than usual at a predetermined timing. May be good. Further, for example, in the frame button 22, a lock mechanism for locking the frame button 22 is provided so that the frame button 22 cannot be pushed and operated, and the frame button 22 is in a state of outputting instructions such as repeated hits, and the frame button 22 is in the middle of the repeated hits state. It may be configured to make the player feel uncomfortable by locking the lock and not being able to push it in. In this case, it is preferable to output an announcement such as "Please hit the frame button repeatedly" on the third symbol display device 81 or the like. Further, for example, an electric fan capable of outputting wind to a player is normally configured to emit (output) wind to stimulate the player's sense of wind, but initially outputs wind. However, it may be configured so that the player's sense of wind feels uncomfortable by inhaling the wind from the middle.

<Modification example 10>
In the first embodiment, when "after erasure of hold" is selected as the execution timing of "notice of change on hold" and the change element of "re-change" is not included in the change effect, "notice of change on hold" Was configured to change the execution timing of to another timing (for example, "after reach") other than "after hold deletion". On the other hand, when "after hold deletion" is selected as the execution timing of "hold change notice" and "hold change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing of "after hold deletion" in the variation effect, "hold change". It may be configured to execute other notice effects other than "notice".

Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is such that the fluctuation element of "re-variation" is performed but the cockpit display area Db is not erased, such as the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + re-variation", "after pending deletion". "Hold change notice" is selected, instead of "Hold change notice" of "After erasing hold", "Sub display area Ds" is displayed at the timing when the sub display area Ds is redisplayed. "After erasing" "Notice of redisplay" is performed. As this "redisplay notice", for example, the display mode of the character symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds changes from before the sub-display area Ds is erased (for example, the color of the headband changes from "white" to "red", etc. ) Is changed and displayed. In the variation effect including the variation element of "re-variation", the variation element of "normal reach" is always executed, and when the variation element of "normal reach" is executed, the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is deleted. Even if the fluctuation pattern cannot execute the "pending change notice" of "after erasing the hold", the "notice of change of hold" of "after erasing the hold" is used like the "notice of redisplay" of "after erasing the secondary display area". It is possible to improve the interest of the game by performing the same or similar notice production.

<Modification 11>
In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of "holding change notices" are displayed, any one of the execution timings of the "holding change notice" is selected, and any one of the execution timings is determined. It was configured to execute the "pending change notice" in the display mode of. On the other hand, when a display mode (for example, "red" or "rainbow") on a plurality of stages is selected in the "hold change notice", the "hold change notice" is executed step by step at a plurality of execution timings. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the "pending change notice" step by step to execute the notice effect that raises the jackpot expectation level, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification example 12>
In the third embodiment, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in a "strong pattern" to cover the cockpit display area Db, and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven to the initial positions again to release the coating. It was configured to execute the "pending change notice" for the execution symbol when it was executed. On the other hand, LEDs are mounted on the movable accessories 87 and 88 so that the change in color can be expressed, and before the movable accessories 87 and 88 cover the cockpit display area Db, the movable accessories are each movable. The colors of 87 and 88 are expressed in a suggestive manner. Then, when the cockpit display area Db is covered with the movable accessories 87 and 88 expressed in the suggested mode, the suggested mode propagates to the execution symbol (reserved symbol) of the cockpit display area Db, and each movable symbol is propagated. When the coating of the accessories 87 and 88 is released and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible, the display mode of the execution symbol may be configured to be displayed in a state reflecting the above-mentioned suggestion mode.

Specifically, for example, the display mode of each movable accessory 87,88 before covering the cockpit display area Db is lit in red, and each movable accessory 87,88 covers the cockpit display area Db and covers the cockpit display area Db. When is released, the execution symbol (reserved symbol) in the cockpit display area Db is configured to be displayed in a red display mode. With this configuration, whether or not the execution symbol (reserved symbol) is covered by each movable accessory 87,88, and if covered, the suggested mode is the suggested mode of each movable accessory 87,88. The gameplayability of whether or not to propagate to the execution symbol (reserved symbol) is born, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Instead of the movable accessories 87 and 88, a cut-in image or the like may be used. The "state in which the suggested mode is reflected" means that the display mode of the effect means that makes the execution symbol (reserved symbol) difficult to see is directly propagated to the execution symbol (reserved symbol), or that the effect means. The content related to the display mode includes that the execution symbol (reserved symbol) is displayed, or that the display mode of the effect means is changed (shifted) to the execution symbol (reserved symbol) and displayed.

<Modification example 13>
In the third embodiment, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven from the initial position in a "strong pattern" to cover the cockpit display area Db, and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven to the initial positions again. When the cover was released, the "pending change notice" was executed for the executed symbol, giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, as an effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable, for example, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are moved from the initial position to the moving position and then driven again from the moving position, the initial position is not the initial position. It may be configured to return to a position slightly deviated from. With this configuration, the player can feel a sense of discomfort that the movable accessories 87 and 88 are displaced from the initial position to the displaced position.

<Modification 14>
Each of the above embodiments is configured to suggest to the player that the jackpot expectation is different depending on the difference in the display color of the "pending change notice". On the other hand, it is configured to suggest to the player that the game value (“probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction state”) given at the time of a big hit differs depending on the difference in the display color of the “pending change notice”. You may. Specifically, for example, when the "pending change notice" is "blue", it is unlikely that the "probability fluctuation state" will be given, and when the "holding change notice" is "red", the "probability change" If there is a high possibility that "state" will be given and the "pending change notice" is "rainbow", "probability fluctuation state" will be given and the jackpot with the highest game value (for example, 15R) will be given. It may be configured to suggest that. With this configuration, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is executed, it is suggested that the game value given by the difference in the display color of the "hold change notice" is different, and " It is possible to create a playability of which color the display color of the "hold change notice" displayed "after the hold is deleted" will be, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition to the configuration that suggests that the game value given at the time of a big hit differs depending on the difference in the display color of the "hold change notice", some kind of game depends on the difference in the display color of the "hold change notice". It may be configured to suggest the situation to the player. Specifically, for example, when the "hold change notice" is "blue", the fluctuation time of the variable effect to be executed is short, and when the "hold change notice" is "red", the variable effect to be executed is executed. It may be configured to suggest a long variation time.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is completed, the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the redisplayed cockpit display area Db. In the execution symbol, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" for changing the display mode at the time of redisplay from the display mode before erasing the execution symbol is executed, and a big hit is obtained based on the change. It was configured to perform an unexpected production. On the other hand, in the character symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it is suggested that the display mode at the time of redisplay is changed from the display mode before erasing the character symbol, and a big hit is obtained based on the change. It may be configured as follows. In this case, while the temporary "missing display" is displayed in the main display area Dm, the character symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is in a display mode (for example, a happy expression) that does not correspond to the "missing display". It may be displayed so as to make the player feel uncomfortable based on the fact that the facial expressions of the "missing display" display mode and the character symbol do not correspond to each other.

<Modification 16>
In the third embodiment, when the left movable accessory 87 is driven in a "strong pattern", the entire left movable accessory 87 is configured to cover the entire cockpit display area Db. On the other hand, when the left movable accessory 87 is driven by the "strong pattern", a part of the cockpit display area Db, for example, the execution symbol display area Db0, the first reserved symbol display area Db1, and the second reserved symbol display area. It may be configured so that only Db2 is covered and the third reserved symbol display area Db3 and the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4 are not covered. With this configuration, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" can be executed only for the execution symbol and the hold symbol within the range covered by the left movable accessory 87, and the left movable accessory 87 can cover it. It is possible to increase the variation of the game by configuring so that the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is not executed for the hold symbol that cannot be held.

Further, in the above configuration, the left movable accessory 87 covers the execution symbol display area Db0, the first reserved symbol display area Db1 and the second reserved symbol display area Db2, and the right movable accessory 88 covers the third reserved symbol display area. It is configured to cover Db3 and the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4, and is configured to change the execution timing of the "pending change notice" of "after pending erasure" depending on the driving mode of each movable accessory 87,88. May be good. At this time, by configuring the drive of the "strong pattern" of the left movable accessory 87 and the drive of the "strong pattern" of the right movable accessory 88 so that the jackpot reliability is different, each movable accessory 87 , 88 drive contents and execution contents of "pending change notice" can be provided with variations in the game to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification example 17>
In the fourth embodiment, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed once during the variation effect, the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is concealed, and when the concealment is released, the execution symbol is displayed. It was configured to give a "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion". On the other hand, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed a plurality of times in the area where the cockpit display area Db is displayed during the fluctuation effect, and the cockpit display area Db is visually recognized again after displaying any of the large character cut-in images Dc2. When it is possible, it may be configured to execute the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion".

Specifically, for example, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is configured to be displayed three times in the variation effect, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, and then erased, the cockpit display area Db is displayed. Whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed with the cockpit display area Db erased, and then when the cockpit display area Db is erased, the executed symbol or the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db is re-displayed. You may give the playability of whether or not it is displayed. For example, based on the display of the first large character cut-in image Dc2, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered, and when the first large character cut-in image Dc2 is deleted, the cockpit display area Db is also deleted. Then, when the second large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and the second large character cut-in image Dc2 is deleted, only the outer frame of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. Then, when the third large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and the third large character cut-in image Dc2 is deleted, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the execution symbol is displayed. It is configured to change the color and execute "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion". With this configuration, game playability is given to whether or not the effect related to the "pending change notice" is executed at the timing when the large character cut-in image Dc2 covering the cockpit display area Db is erased. It can enhance the interest.

<Modification 18>
In the fourth embodiment, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered by the entire large character cut-in image Dc2. On the other hand, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, only a part of the cockpit display area Db, for example, the execution symbol display area Db0, the first reserved symbol display area Db1, and the second reserved symbol display area Db2 is covered. , The third reserved symbol display area Db3 and the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4 may not be covered. With this configuration, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" can be executed only for the execution symbol and the hold symbol within the range covered by the large character cut-in image Dc2, and the large character cut-in image Dc2 covers it. It is possible to increase the variation of the game by configuring so that the "hold change notice" of "after the hold is deleted" is not executed for the hold symbol that cannot be held.

<Modification 19>
In the fourth embodiment, the large character cut-in image Dc2 whose rear side becomes invisible is displayed, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered by the entire large character cut-in image Dc2, and the cockpit display area Db is concealed. When the character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be visible again, and the "pending change notice" is executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. On the other hand, the rear side of the large character cut-in image Dc2 may be configured to be visible when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and invisible when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Specifically, for example, when the display color of the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed in blue, it becomes invisible when the execution symbol is displayed in "blue", while the execution symbol is "white". "Or" red "is displayed so that the execution symbol can be seen through the large character cut-in image Dc2. With this configuration, the display color of the execution symbol (holding symbol) displayed before the large character cut-in image Dc2 appears is the same as the display color of the large character cut-in image Dc2 (same system). When the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, the execution symbol is assimilated with the large character cut-in image Dc2 to make it invisible, and when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is deleted, the execution symbol is deleted. It is configured to change the display color of. As a result, based on the relationship between the display color of the execution symbol before the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and the display color of the large character cut-in image Dc2, the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" Whether or not it can be executed is decided, and the variety of production can be enriched to enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the look-ahead process may be executed by the display control device 114. For example, information for performing look-ahead processing, that is, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type acquired from the counter buffer in connection with the start winning in the main control device 110. A hold information storage area and an execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. 19 for storing each value of the counter CS1 are provided in the display control device 114, and when a display hold ball count command is received, the hold information storage area is provided. The display control device 114 executes the look-ahead process based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area, and becomes a big hit in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. If it is determined that there is a fluctuation effect, the "pending change notice" may be executed. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 may transmit the hold ball number command as it is to the display control device 114 as a display hold ball number command. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning are set to the hold information first to fourth areas provided in the hold information storage area of the display control device 114. Among them, it can be stored in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the display reserved ball number command. Then, each time the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 may execute the same shift processing as the processing of S1403 and S1404 of FIG. 31 on the hold information storage area. As a result, the execution information storage area of the display control device 114 can store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110, and the hold information first. Each of the fourth area can store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be transmitted directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as one control device, a hold information storage area and an execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. 19 are stored in the RAM of the one control device. When the hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the area corresponding to the number of hold ball count commands is placed in the look-ahead information first to fourth areas provided in the hold information storage area. , Each counter value C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command may be stored. Further, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, one control device performs a shift process similar to the process of S1403 and S1404 of FIG. 31 between the hold information first to fourth areas and the execution information storage area. May be executed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the case where the fluctuation start flag 223a is always set to ON when the stop type command is received has been described. When the stop type command is received after receiving the signal, the fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to ON. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange fluctuation effect when the stop type command is received without receiving the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, the fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to be turned on at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation effect process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command is notified to the display control device 114 based on the fact that the variation start flag 223a is turned on. A display variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 is made to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can be done. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when the stop type command is received. It may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol that is suspended and executed when the ball enters the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) is determined by the execution symbol and the execution symbol. The case where "holding change notice" is given in the holding symbol has been described. On the other hand, it hits in the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) that is held and executed when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (starting prize) (stops at the symbol "○"). Whether or not there is something that becomes a big hit during the fluctuation effect of the third symbol by using the second symbol hold lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, etc., or , Instead, the player may be notified. As a result, is there a winning variable display in the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) that is pending, or in the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) that is being executed and is pending? The player can grasp whether or not. Therefore, it can be inferred whether or not the second symbol is a hit before the variable display of the second symbol is executed. Some game machines have improved game playability depending on the presence or absence of hits of ordinary symbols, and are particularly effective in such game machines.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not given the numbers "0" to "9" has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , The third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variation effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the "hold change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice effect, is executed on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and pachinko. A fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. (Hereinafter, "continuous notice effect" including "hold change notice") is executed, which is different from "hold change notice" or "hold change notice" and is executed over a plurality of variable effects. You may. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an accessory different from the movable accessories 87 and 88 that operate according to various effects, and the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect to produce a continuous advance notice effect. You may do it. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous advance notice effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect (dynamic display), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory is displayed. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of a big hit by operating in a predetermined mode, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33. .. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 causes the continuous advance notice effect, so that the player is given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, voice output from voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the winning / failing determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). By changing (or a combination of these), a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the game state (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) after the end of the continuous advance notice production are prepared. May be good.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls added by "1" when there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64. The case where each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer due to the start winning is included as they are and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described for the number command, but it is included in the hold ball number command. The type of the counter may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of these values by including information indicating the values of each counter in a command other than the reserved ball count command. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the hold information included in the command in any of the hold information first to fourth areas corresponding to the hold count based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the hold ball number command are stored in the hold information storage area 223e. The case has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a hold ball count command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, the value of each counter indicated by the command is used as a basis. , Whether it is a big hit or not, a big hit type in the case of a big hit, a part or all of the miss type in the case of a miss, etc. are judged, and these judgment results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or , A part or all of the value of the counter may be stored in the hold information storage area 223e. As a result, when the look-ahead process is executed, the judgment result such as whether or not the variable effect being executed or held is a big hit is already stored in the hold information storage area 223e. Therefore, in the look-ahead process, this judgment result is stored. It only needs to be read, and the execution of the process can be completed quickly. If the variation time of the variation effect is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), the hold ball number command (or the time when the jackpot lottery is performed) When the command) indicating the value of each counter is received, the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation effect cannot be determined, so that the fluctuation time cannot be accurately determined. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable that at least the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for determining the fluctuation time is stored in the hold information storage area 223e. As a result, if the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped when the look-ahead process is executed, the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation effect can be determined, so that the ball is stored in the reserved information storage area 223e. The fluctuation time can be calculated based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 together with the determination results of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the deviation type in the case of a miss.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first entry slot 64, in which a big hit lottery is started when a ball is entered, is arranged in the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the entry is detected independently and the lottery for the jackpot is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first ball entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold ball counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

Further, when a plurality of first entrances are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with the winning (starting winning) of each first entrance is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. You may. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning is acquired in connection with the start winning in any of the first entrances. It may include information indicating whether the information is correct. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is associated with the start winning of the first ball entrance. You may. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold information storage area may be prepared for each first ball entry port. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, shift processing is performed on the hold information storage area corresponding to the first entry slot that detects the start winning prize that triggered the execution of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. It can be carried out. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending fluctuation effect for each first ball entry port can be held in the voice lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the probability of sorting a jackpot type, the probability of sorting a missed type, etc. differ depending on the first ball opening that won the starting prize, will each variation effect be a jackpot in the look-ahead processing? Whether or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the missed type in the case of a miss, and the like can be correctly determined based on which first entrance winning the starting prize. Further, when the variation effect based on the start winning to the first ball opening of 1 is performed in preference to the variation effect based on the start winning to the other first entry, the first entry of 1 is performed. Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the fluctuation effect based on the start winning to the ball mouth.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 inputs the value of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the first ball entrance from the main control device 110 by a command. If it is decided to start the continuous advance notice effect when it is received, the continuous advance notice effect is executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) held at that time regardless of the first entrance that has won the start prize. You may. In addition, a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, and the variable effect for winning a prize in one first ball opening is preferentially executed over the variable effect for winning a prize in another first ball opening. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the first ball entrance where the variable effect is preferentially executed. .. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is not started for this variable effect. .. If a continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance having a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended at the first ball slot having a high priority. There is a risk that the continuous notice production will not end easily. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance having a low priority, and the variable effect is not determined. Since the continuous advance notice production is not started, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and reduces the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b by 1 (see S1411 in FIG. 31) has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation processing (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 is subtracted as the variation pattern command is set by the variation start processing (S307). A hold ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S305 in FIG. 22), and the hold ball number command has a variation pattern. The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of reserved balls held by the main control device 110. Further, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a after subtraction may be included in the fluctuation pattern command. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the number of reserved balls (N) included in the fluctuation pattern command may be extracted and set in the sub-holding ball number counter 223b.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variation effect which is the variation display of the third symbol is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. Further, the variation display of the symbol is not limited to the variation effect of the symbol, and for example, an effect performed by displaying one or a plurality of characters together with the symbol or by displaying a wide variety of movements or changes separately from the symbol. Display etc. are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of the slot machine, only the ball can be treated as the game value in the game hall, which is the game value seen in the current game hall where the pachinko machine and the slot machine are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location where game machines are installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Group A: Change the execution timing of "pending change notice" & "holding change notice" when redisplaying>

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning opening and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, there is a case where the variable effect related to the start winning is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect that is being executed ends, the execution of the pending variation effect that has not been executed is started.

In this variation effect, as a part of the interest of the game, a suggestion display (for example, "hold change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. When executing this suggestion display, the display mode of the display object that is always visible to the player is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or a new display object is additionally displayed to display the display object. It is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot to the player depending on the display mode of.

However, in the conventional game machine, when the suggestion display is executed, the player always changes the display mode of the visible display object or additionally displays the display object, so that the player changes the display object. It was easy to recognize, and it was not possible to create unexpectedness in the production content. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing an unexpected effect and preferably improving the interest of the game.

An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. With a control device 114)
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
A second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the determination result by the determination means, and
A display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and the non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from a variable element of "normal reach" to a variable element of "super reach").
A changing means (for example, a hold display setting process) that changes the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (for example, "hold change notice") showing a judgment result by the determination means. S1209)) and
When changing from the first aspect to the second aspect by the changing means and redisplaying the second display means which has been hidden by the display switching means, the display of the second display means is displayed. Redisplay changing means (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)) for changing to the second aspect,
The gaming machine A0 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine A0, the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the display switching means switches and controls the second display means between the display state and the non-display state. Then, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the changing means. When changing from the first state to the second mode by the changing means, when the redisplay changing means redisplays the second display means which has been hidden by the display switching means, the display of the second display means is displayed. It is changed to the second aspect. As a result, as compared with the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is newly added and displayed, the second display means is displayed. The second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the display means. Therefore, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is recognized as the manifestation of the second aspect in the second display means. It has the effect of making it possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

In the game machine A0
The changing means
A change determination means (for example, a change determination means for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first aspect to a second aspect (for example, "pending change notice") indicating a determination result by the determination means. For example, the hold display setting process (S1209)) is provided.
The redisplay changing means
When it is determined by the change determining means to change from the first aspect to the second aspect, at the first display timing for redisplaying the second display means which has been hidden by the display switching means. , A change executing means (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)) for changing the display of the second display means to the second aspect.
The gaming machine A1 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means is determined by the change determination means provided in the change means. When it is determined by the change determining means to change from the first state to the second mode, the change executing means provided in the redisplay changing means redisplays the second display means hidden by the display switching means. At the first display timing to be displayed, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode. As a result, as compared with the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is newly added and displayed, the second display means is displayed. The second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the display means. Therefore, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is recognized as the manifestation of the second aspect in the second display means. It has the effect of making it possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

In the gaming machine A1
The second display means can display a symbol representing the number of the information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means.
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a continuous display means (for example, a variable element of "normal reach") that continuously displays the second display means, and
With a special effect executing means (for example, a variable element of "super reach") that executes a special effect including an effect of hiding the second display means displayed by the continuous display means by the display switching means. ,
After the end of the special effect by the special effect executing means, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means. After the end, the redisplay means (for example, the cockpit display area after the end of the variable element of "super reach"). Db is redisplayed), and
The change executing means is
The gaming machine A2, characterized in that, when the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means after the end, the display of the second display means is changed to the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a symbol representing the number of information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means continuously displays the second display means in the dynamic display. Then, the special effect executing means executes a special effect including an effect of hiding the second display means displayed by the continuous display means by the display switching means, and after the end, the special effect is executed by the redisplay means. After the special effect by the means is completed, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means. Then, when the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means after the end by the change executing means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode.

Conventionally, at the start of dynamic display, the number of information stored in the storage means is displayed by the second display means, and the second display means is continuously displayed by the continuous display means. Then, when the special effect is executed, the second display means is switched to the non-display state by the display switching means, the second display means is redisplayed by the display switching means after the end of the special effect, and continuous display is performed at the start of the dynamic display. By returning the second display means to the state displayed by the means, the next dynamic display is prepared for execution. That is, by redisplaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the special effect, the player can be informed of the end of the dynamic display, and the number of the next dynamic display can be determined. The next dynamic display can be smoothly executed while making the player aware of it. Therefore, when the special effect is completed, the redisplay of the second display means is a natural expression in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, so that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort.

Then, the second display means continuously displayed by the continuous display means, such as the game machine A2, is hidden by the display switching means based on the execution of the special effect, and the display switching means is set at the end of the special effect. At the timing of redisplaying the second display means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode. With this configuration, in the flow of the dynamic display execution process, the display mode can be changed from the first mode to the second mode while redisplaying the second display means that has been hidden. it can. Therefore, the second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is the manifestation of the second aspect in the second display means. It has the effect of making the player aware and providing the player with an unexpected effect, while diversifying the effect and enhancing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a provisional display means for displaying provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information (for example, a provisional "loss display" in FIG. 33 (e)) and
After the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, the redynamic means for executing the redynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information (for example, a variable element of "revariation"). And with
The change executing means is
When it is determined by the change determining means that the first aspect is changed to the second aspect, and the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means, the second display is performed at the first display timing. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the display of the means is changed to the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means by the redynamic means also provided in the dynamic display execution means, the redynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information is executed. .. Then, when it is determined by the change determining means to change from the first aspect to the second aspect and the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means, the second display is performed at the first display timing by the change executing means. The display of the means is changed to the second aspect. That is, in the state where the provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is once displayed in the dynamic display, the second aspect of the second display means is displayed, and the re-dynamic display is executed in that state to perform the provisional identification. It is configured to change the information to predetermined identification information. Therefore, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the first mode to the second mode in accordance with the redisplay of the second display means, and the player feels uncomfortable based on the change. Then, after that, re-dynamic display is performed, and the provisional identification information is changed to the predetermined identification information, so that it is possible to recognize that the source of the discomfort is directly related to the game value, and the player can be made to recognize. It has the effect of diversifying the production and enhancing the interest of the game while providing a surprising production.

In the game machine A3
The change executing means is
A second timing execution means (for example, after reaching) that changes the second display means to the second mode at a second display timing (for example, "after reach") different from the first display timing (for example, "after holding and erasing"). , "Post-reach""pending change notice"),
A start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a change start time of the second display means to the second aspect, and
When the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second aspect by the start time selection means, the redynamic determination for determining whether or not to execute the redynamic display by the redynamic means. Means (for example, processing for determining revariability information (S1506)) and
When the redynamic determination means determines that the redynamic display is not executed, the redynamic timing change for changing the start timing of the second aspect from the first display timing to the second display timing. A game machine A4 comprising means (for example, S1506 of execution symbol change processing).

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the second display timing different from the first display timing by the second timing execution means provided in the change execution means. In addition, the start time selection means selects the change start time of the second display means to the second aspect. Then, when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second aspect by the start time selection means, it is determined by the redynamic determination means whether or not the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means. To. Then, when it is determined by the redynamic determination means that the redynamic display is not executed, the start time of the second aspect is changed from the first display timing to the second display timing by the redynamic timing changing means. .. As a result, when the first display timing is initially selected as the change start time for changing the second display means to the second mode, the condition for changing the second display means to the second mode at the first display timing. When is not ready, the change start time of the second aspect is changed to the second display timing and displayed, thereby reducing the cases where the second aspect is not displayed and increasing the execution rate of the second aspect by the second display means. It has the effect of being able to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4
The change executing means is
A second timing execution means (for example, after reaching) that displays the second display means in the second aspect at a second display timing (for example, "after reach") different from the first display timing (for example, "after holding and erasing"). , "Post-reach""pending change notice"),
A start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a change start time of the second display means to the second aspect, and
When the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second aspect by the start time selection means, the special effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special effect by the special effect execution means ( For example, the process of determining the hold deletion information (S1507)) and
When the special effect determining means determines that the special effect is not executed, the special timing changing means for changing the start time of the second aspect from the first display timing to the second display timing is provided. A game machine A5 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the second display timing different from the first display timing by the second timing execution means provided in the change execution means. In addition, the start time selection means selects the change start time of the second display means to the second aspect. Then, when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second aspect by the start time selection means, it is determined whether or not the special effect is executed by the special effect execution means. Then, when the special timing changing means determines that the special effect is not executed by the special effect determining means, the start time of the second aspect is changed from the first display timing to the second display timing. As a result, when the first display timing is initially selected as the change start time for changing the second display means to the second mode, the condition for changing the second display means to the second mode at the first display timing. When is not ready, the change start time of the second aspect is changed to the second display timing and displayed, thereby reducing the cases where the second aspect is not displayed and increasing the execution rate of the second aspect by the second display means. It has the effect of being able to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5
The dynamic display executing means has a predetermined specific effect (for example, a variable element of "normal reach" or a variable element of "pseudo-ream") at a timing before the second display means can be hidden by the display switching means. Etc.), and
The gaming machine A6, wherein the second display timing is at the time of executing the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means executes a predetermined specific effect at the timing before the display switching means puts the second display means in the non-display state, and the display switching means puts the second display means in the non-display state. In the specific effect executed at the timing before the acquisition, the second aspect is displayed in the second display means. Therefore, even if the display switching means does not hide the second display means, it can be displayed in the second mode in the second display means, and the case where the second mode is not displayed can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution rate of the second aspect by the second display means can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6
The game machine A7, wherein the dynamic display executing means executes the special effect in the latter half of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes a special effect in the latter half of the dynamic display. As a result, even in the latter half of the dynamic display, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the appearance of the display in the second mode by the second display means. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game while expecting the appearance of the predetermined identification information until the latter half of the dynamic display, there is an effect that the player can be given a hobby for a long period of time.

In the gaming machine A6 or A7
The game machine A8 is characterized in that the dynamic display execution means is configured such that the execution timing of the specific effect arrives at a timing prior to the execution timing of the special effect in the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured so that the execution timing of the specific effect arrives before the execution timing of the special effect in the dynamic display. As a result, the second aspect can be displayed in the second display means in the specific effect executed at the timing before the second display means is hidden by the special effect. Therefore, even in the dynamic display in which the special effect is not executed, the second display means can be changed to the second mode in the specific effect, so that the case where the second mode is not displayed can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution rate of the second aspect by the second display means can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8
The start time selection means
The acquisition means includes a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when information is acquired when the start condition is satisfied.
The dynamic display execution means
An execution establishment determination means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition is provided.
The change executing means is
The feature is that the timing correcting means for correcting the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selecting means is provided based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display executing means. Game machine A9 to play.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied. .. Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. .. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the content of the dynamic display. The execution timing of the second aspect is modified by. As a result, even when the determination of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed by the processes performed at different timings, the contents of the effect can be made consistent. It is possible to make adjustments so that there is no discrepancy with each other's production contents. Therefore, by performing each decision in a separate process, it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each decision, and at the same time, it is possible to execute a consistent effect.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A9
The storage means
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, a special effect storage means (for example, a hold erase information storage area 223e7) for storing whether or not the special effect is executed is used.
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, the dynamic storage means (for example, the revariable information storage area) that stores whether or not the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means. 223e8) and a game machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A3 to A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each information acquired by the acquisition means, the storage means stores the presence / absence of execution of the special effect by the special effect storage means, and also corresponds to the same. In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information, the redynamic storage means stores whether or not the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means. As a result, by confirming whether or not the special effect stored in each storage means is executed and whether or not the revariable display is executed, it is possible to easily determine the execution mode of the dynamic display stored in the storage means. It will be possible. Therefore, for example, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the dynamic display without determining the execution mode of the dynamic display in detail at the start of the dynamic display, and reduce the processing load at the start of the dynamic display. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Group B: Change the variable factor to execute "pending change notice">

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning opening and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, there is a case where the variable effect related to the start winning is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect that is being executed ends, the execution of the pending variation effect that has not been executed is started.

In this variation effect, as a part of the interest of the game, a suggestion display (for example, "hold change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. When executing this suggestion display, the time to start the suggestion display is determined by lottery, and the suggestion display is displayed based on the lottery result, thereby suggesting the expectation of the jackpot to the player. ing.

However, in the conventional game machine, even if the time to start the suggestion display is decided in advance, the suggestion display may not be executed at the decided start time depending on the content of the fluctuation element in the fluctuation production. In such a case, the execution of the suggestion display itself was stopped, and the production could not be diversified. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggestion display at the initially selected start time, diversify the production, and preferably improve the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. With a control device 114)
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
The dynamic display is composed of a combination of a plurality of dynamic elements (for example, a variable element of "high-speed fluctuation", a variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", and a variable element of "normal reach").
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
A second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the determination result by the determination means, and
A changing means (for example, a hold display setting process) that changes the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (for example, "hold change notice") showing a judgment result by the determination means. S1209)) and
A start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) that selects the start time of the second aspect by the second display means when the change means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
Execution determination means for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means (for example, a process for determining revariability information (S1506), or determination for pending erasure information). Processing (S1507)) and
When the execution determination means determines that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the dynamic element of the dynamic display is selected by the start time selection means. An element changing means (for example, S1553 or S1554 of the execution symbol change processing) that changes the second aspect to the dynamic element of the dynamic display that can be displayed at the start time.
The gaming machine B0 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine B0, the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. In addition, the dynamic display is composed of a combination of a plurality of dynamic elements. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the changing means. When the change means is changed to the second aspect, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second aspect by the second display means. Here, the execution determination means determines whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, and the execution determination means determines the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means. When it is determined that the mode cannot be displayed, the dynamic element of the dynamic display can display the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means by the element changing means. Is changed to. Thereby, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected start time, the dynamic element of the dynamic display can be changed to display the second mode at the start time. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means can be increased at the initially selected start time, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B0
A display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and the non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from a variable element of "normal reach" to a variable element of "super reach") is provided.
The changing means
A change determination means (for example, a change determination means for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first aspect to a second aspect (for example, "pending change notice") indicating a determination result by the determination means. For example, hold display setting process (S1209)) and
When it is determined by the change determining means that the display mode of the second display means is changed to the second mode, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. (For example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)) provided with a change execution means (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)).
The start time selection means
Redisplay selection means (redisplay time selection means) for selecting the first display timing for redisplaying the second display means hidden by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second aspect in the second display means (the second display means). For example, S1506) of execution symbol change processing is provided.
The execution determination means
A first display timing execution determining means (for example, a process of determining revariability information (S1506)) for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the redisplay selection means. Alternatively, a process for determining pending erasure information (S1507)) is provided.
The element changing means
When it is determined by the first display timing execution determining means that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the redisplay selection means, the dynamic element of the dynamic display is displayed. The first display timing execution element changing means (for example, S1553 or S1554 of the execution symbol change processing) for changing the second aspect to the dynamic element of the dynamic display capable of displaying at the first display timing. A game machine B1 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display switching means switches and controls the second display means between the display state and the non-display state. Then, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the change determination means provided in the change means. When it is determined by the change determining means to change to the second aspect, the change executing means changes the second display means to the second aspect at the execution timing selected by the start time selecting means. Then, the redisplay selection means provided in the start time selection means redisplays the second display means hidden by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode in the second display means. The first display timing is selected. Here, the first display timing execution determining means provided in the execution determining means determines whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the redisplay selection means, and the first display timing is determined. When it is determined by the execution determining means that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the redisplay selection means, the first display timing execution element changing means provided in the element changing means can be used. The dynamic element of the dynamic display is changed to the dynamic element of the dynamic display capable of displaying the second aspect at the first display timing. As a result, as compared with the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is newly added and displayed, the second display means is displayed. The second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the display means. Therefore, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is recognized as the manifestation of the second aspect in the second display means. It has the effect of making it possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production. Further, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected first display timing, the dynamic element of the dynamic display can be changed to display the second mode at the first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1
The second display means can display a symbol representing the number of the information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means.
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a continuous display means (for example, a variable element of "normal reach") that continuously displays the second display means, and
A special effect executing means (for example, a variable element of "super reach") for executing a special effect including an effect of hiding the second display means displayed by the continuous display means by the display switching means.
After the end of the special effect by the special effect executing means, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means. After the end, the redisplay means (for example, the cockpit display area after the end of the variable element of "super reach"). Db is redisplayed), and
The redisplay selection means is
As the execution timing for displaying the second aspect in the second display means, a timing selection means for selecting a timing at which the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means after the end is provided. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a symbol representing the number of information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means continuously displays the second display means in the dynamic display. Then, a special effect including an effect of hiding the second display means displayed by the continuous display means by the display switching means is executed by the special effect executing means, and the special effect executing means is executed by the redisplay means after the end. After the end of the special effect by, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means. Then, the timing selection means provided in the redisplay selection means selects the timing at which the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means after the end as the execution timing for displaying the second aspect in the second display means. To.

Conventionally, at the start of dynamic display, a symbol representing the number of information stored in the storage means is displayed by the second display means, and the second display means is continuously displayed by the continuous display means. Then, when the special effect is executed, the second display means is switched to the non-display state by the display switching means, the second display means is redisplayed by the display switching means after the end of the special effect, and continuous display is performed at the start of the dynamic display. By returning the second display means to the state displayed by the means, the next dynamic display is prepared for execution. That is, by redisplaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the special effect, the player can be suggested to end the dynamic display, and the number of the next dynamic display can be determined. The next dynamic display can be smoothly executed while making the player aware of it. Therefore, when the special effect is completed, the redisplay of the second display means is a natural expression in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, so that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort.

Then, the second display means continuously displayed by the continuous display means, such as the game machine B2, is hidden by the display switching means based on the execution of the special effect, and the display switching means is set at the end of the special effect. At the timing of redisplaying the second display means again, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode. With this configuration, in the flow of the dynamic display execution process, the display mode can be changed from the first mode to the second mode while redisplaying the second display means that has been hidden. it can. Therefore, the second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is the manifestation of the second aspect in the second display means. It has the effect of making the player aware and providing the player with an unexpected effect, while diversifying the effect and enhancing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2
The element changing means
A special effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the special effect in the dynamic display (for example, a process for determining pending erasure information (S1507)).
When it is determined by the special effect determining means that the special effect is not executed, the effect changing means for executing the special effect in the dynamic display (for example, the variable element of the "pseudo effect" is referred to as "super reach". It is provided with a process of changing to a variable element or a variable element of "special reach" (S1553, S1554)).
The change executing means is
The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the second display means is changed to the second aspect after the end of the special effect changed by the effect changing means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the special effect is executed in the dynamic display is determined by the special effect determining means provided in the element changing means. Further, when it is determined by the effect changing means provided in the element changing means that the special effect is not executed by the special effect determining means, the special effect is executed in the dynamic display. Then, the change executing means changes the second display means to the second mode after the end of the special effect changed by the effect changing means. As a result, the second aspect can be displayed at the initially selected first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B3
The effect changing means is
In the dynamic display, a dynamic element determination means (for example, a process of confirming pseudo-effect information) for determining the presence or absence of a change target dynamic element (for example, a variable element of "pseudo-effect") that can be changed to the special effect (for example, S1551)), equipped with
The gaming machine B4, characterized in that, when the dynamic element determining means determines that there is a dynamic element to be changed, the dynamic element to be changed is changed to the special effect.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic element discriminating means provided in the effect changing means determines the presence or absence of a change target dynamic element that can be changed to a special effect in the dynamic display. Then, when it is determined by the dynamic element discriminating means that there is a variable target dynamic element, the change target dynamic element is changed to a special effect. As a result, when the special effect has a changeable dynamic element to be changed, the second display means can be changed to the special effect and the second display means can be deleted. Therefore, by adding a special effect of erasing the second display means while maintaining the consistency of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, the second mode is displayed in the second display means at the initially selected first display timing. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, without having to reselect the dynamic element of the dynamic display, the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing is increased, and the production is diversified. It has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B4
The gaming machine B5, characterized in that the special effect and the dynamic element to be changed are configured with the same execution time.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special effect and the dynamic element to be changed are composed of the same execution time. This makes it possible to change the dynamic elements of the dynamic display without changing the execution time of the entire dynamic display. Therefore, by adding a special effect of erasing the second display means while maintaining the consistency of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, the second mode is displayed in the second display means at the initially selected first display timing. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, without having to reselect the dynamic element of the dynamic display, the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing is increased, and the production is diversified. It has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5
The change executing means is
When the first display timing is selected by the redisplay selection means, and the dynamic element determination means determines that there is no changeable dynamic element to be changed in the special effect, the first display 2. The gaming machine B6, characterized in that the second aspect is not displayed in the display means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the change execution means selects the first display timing by the redisplay selection means, and the dynamic element determination means determines that there is no changeable dynamic element to be changed in the special effect, The second display means is configured not to display the second aspect. As a result, when there is no changeable dynamic element of the special effect that can be changed in the dynamic display, that is, when there is no appropriate effect as the execution timing of the second aspect, the second aspect is not displayed. , There is an effect that a consistent production can be provided to the player without causing a discrepancy in the production content.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5
The start time selection means
A "holding change" of a second timing selection means (for example, "after reach") that selects a second display timing (for example, "after reach") different from the first display timing as an execution timing for starting the display of the second aspect. Notice ") and
When the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second aspect, and the dynamic element determining means determines that there is no changeable dynamic element to be changed in the special effect, the above. The gaming machine B7 is characterized by comprising a timing changing means for changing the start time of the second aspect from the first display timing to the second display timing.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects a second display timing different from the first display timing as the execution timing for starting the display of the second aspect. Further, when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second aspect and it is determined by the dynamic element determining means that there is no change target dynamic element that can be changed in the special effect, the timing changing means determines. The start time of the second aspect is changed from the first display timing to the second display timing. As a result, when the condition for displaying the second mode by the second display means is not satisfied at the first display timing initially selected, the start time of the second mode is changed to the second display timing and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of cases where the second aspect is not displayed can be reduced, the execution rate of the second aspect by the second display means can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7
The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the special effect is a dynamic element (for example, a variable element of "super reach") in which the predetermined identification information may be displayed.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special effect is configured as a dynamic element in which a predetermined identification information may be displayed, that is, an effect suggesting whether or not to give a predetermined game value to the player. As a result, for example, it is possible to increase the chances of executing a special effect in the dynamic display by the effect changing means, to allow the player to experience a lot of effects as to whether or not a predetermined game value is given, and to enhance the interest of the game. , Has the effect.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B8
The gaming machine B9, wherein the change target dynamic element is a dynamic element (for example, a variable element of a "pseudo-ream") from which the predetermined identification information may not be displayed.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the change target dynamic element is configured as a dynamic element in which a predetermined identification information is unlikely to be displayed, that is, an effect that cannot give a predetermined game value to the player. As a result, for example, by changing the change target dynamic element to a special effect by the effect changing means, the dynamic element that cannot be given a predetermined game value becomes a dynamic element that can be given a predetermined game value. There is an effect that the player can experience a lot of effects of changing and whether or not a predetermined game value is given, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a provisional display means for displaying provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information (for example, a provisional "loss display" in FIG. 33 (e)) and
After the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, the redynamic means for executing the redynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information (for example, a variable element of "revariation"). And with
The change executing means is
When it is determined by the change determining means to change from the first aspect to the second aspect and the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means, the second display is performed at the first display timing. The gaming machine B10, characterized in that the display of the means is changed to the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means by the redynamic means also provided in the dynamic display execution means, the redynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information is executed. .. Then, when it is determined by the change determining means to change from the first aspect to the second aspect and the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means, the second display is performed at the first display timing by the change executing means. The display of the means is changed to the second aspect. That is, in the state where the provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is once displayed in the dynamic display, the second aspect of the second display means is displayed, and the re-dynamic display is executed in that state to perform the provisional identification. It is configured to change the information to predetermined identification information. Therefore, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the first mode to the second mode in accordance with the redisplay of the second display means, and the player feels uncomfortable based on the change. Then, after that, re-dynamic display is performed, and the provisional identification information is changed to the predetermined identification information, so that it is possible to recognize that the source of the discomfort is directly related to the game value, and the player can be made to recognize. It has the effect of diversifying the production and enhancing the interest of the game while providing a surprising production.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B10
The start time selection means
The acquisition means includes a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when information is acquired when the start condition is satisfied.
The dynamic display execution means
An execution establishment determination means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition is provided.
The change executing means is
The feature is that the timing correcting means for correcting the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selecting means is provided based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display executing means. Game machine B11 to play.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied. .. Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. .. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the content of the dynamic display. The execution timing of the second aspect is modified by. As a result, even when the determination of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed by the processes performed at different timings, the contents of the effect can be made consistent. It is possible to make adjustments so that there is no discrepancy with each other's production contents. Therefore, by performing each decision in a separate process, it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each decision, and at the same time, it is possible to execute a consistent effect. is there.

In the gaming machine B10 or B11
The storage means
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, a special effect storage means (for example, a hold erase information storage area 223e7) for storing whether or not the special effect is executed is used.
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, the dynamic storage means (for example, the revariable information storage area) that stores whether or not the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means. 223e8) and a game machine B12.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B10 or B11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each information acquired by the acquisition means, the storage means stores the presence / absence of execution of the special effect by the special effect storage means, and the corresponding information. In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the above, the redynamic storage means stores whether or not the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means. As a result, by confirming whether or not the special effect stored in each storage means is executed and whether or not the revariable display is executed, it is possible to easily determine the execution mode of the dynamic display stored in the storage means. It will be possible. Therefore, for example, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the dynamic display without determining the execution mode of the dynamic display in detail at the start of the dynamic display, and reduce the processing load at the start of the dynamic display. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines B4 to B12
The storage means
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, a change target storage means (for example, a pseudo effect information storage area 223e9) for storing whether or not the change target dynamic element is executed is provided. A game machine B13 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B4 to B12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each information acquired by the acquisition means, the storage means stores whether or not the dynamic element to be changed is executed by the change mode storage means. .. Thereby, by confirming whether or not the change target dynamic element stored in each storage means is executed, it is possible to easily determine the execution mode of the change target dynamic element that can be changed from the special effect. Therefore, for example, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the dynamic display without determining the execution mode of the dynamic display in detail at the start of the dynamic display, and reduce the processing load at the start of the dynamic display. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Group C: Drive a movable accessory to execute "pending change notice">

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning opening and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, there is a case where the variable effect related to the start winning is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect that is being executed ends, the execution of the pending variation effect that has not been executed is started.

In this variation effect, as a part of the interest of the game, a suggestion display (for example, "hold change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. When executing this suggestion display, the time to start the suggestion display is determined by lottery, and the suggestion display is displayed based on the lottery result, thereby suggesting the expectation of the jackpot to the player. ing.

However, in the conventional game machine, even if the time to start the suggestion display is decided in advance, the suggestion display may not be executed at the decided start time depending on the content of the fluctuation element in the fluctuation production. In such a case, the execution of the suggestion display itself was stopped, and the production could not be diversified. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggestion display at the initially selected start time, diversify the production, and preferably improve the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. Control device 114) and
During the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means, a movable accessory (for example, the left movable accessory 87) that is driven in conjunction with the effect content of the dynamic display and
An accessory driving means for driving the movable accessory (for example, an accessory driving process (S1151)) is provided.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
A second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the determination result by the determination means, and
A changing means (for example, a hold display setting process) that changes the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (for example, "hold change notice") showing a judgment result by the determination means. S1209)) and
A start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) that selects the start time of the second aspect by the second display means when the change means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
Execution determination means for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means (for example, a process for determining revariation information (S1506), or determination for pending erasure information). Processing (S1507)) and
When the execution determination means determines that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the drive change means (for example, the drive change means for driving the movable accessory by the accessory drive means). , Processing to set the super strong flag 223j (S1564)),
A drive interlocking display means for displaying the second aspect by the second display means as the movable accessory driven by the drive change means is driven.
A gaming machine C0 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine C0, the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. During the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the movable accessory is driven in conjunction with the effect content of the dynamic display. Then, the movable accessory is driven by the accessory driving means. Further, when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the changing means. When the changing means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second aspect by the second display means. Here, the execution determination means determines whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, and the second aspect is at the start time selected by the start time selection means by the execution determination means. When it is determined that the display cannot be displayed, the movable accessory is driven by the accessory driving means by the drive changing means. Then, the drive interlocking display means displays the second mode by the second display means as the movable accessory driven by the drive change means is driven. As a result, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected start time, the movable accessory can be driven and the second mode can be displayed in association with the driving. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means can be increased at the initially selected start time, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C0
A display switching means (for example, changing from a variable element of "normal reach" to a variable element of "super reach") for switching and controlling between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state of the second display means is provided.
The changing means
A change determination means (for example, a change determination means for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first aspect to a second aspect (for example, "pending change notice") indicating a determination result by the determination means. For example, hold display setting process (S1209)) and
When the change determining means determines that the first aspect is changed to the second aspect, the second display means is changed to the second aspect at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. A change execution means (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)) is provided.
The accessory driving means
The movable accessory can be driven to a position where the second display means is difficult to see.
The start time selection means
As the execution timing for starting the second aspect in the second display means, the second display means, which has been made difficult to see by the display switching means, selects the first display timing from the difficult-to-see state to the visible state. Re-visualization selection means (for example, "pending change notice" of "after strong pattern drive") is provided.
The execution determination means
A first display timing execution determining means (for example, a process of determining revariability information (S1506)) for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualizing selection means. Alternatively, a process for determining pending erase information (S1507)) is provided.
The drive interlocking display means
When the first display timing execution determining means determines that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-visualization selection means, the accessory driving means determines the movable combination. It is characterized by including a first display timing drive changing means (for example, a process of setting a super strong flag 223j (S1564)) for driving an object to a position that makes the second display means difficult to see. Game machine C1 to play.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display switching means switches and controls the visible state and the difficult-to-see state of the second display means. Then, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the change determination means provided in the change means. Further, when it is determined by the change determining means to change from the first aspect to the second aspect, the change executing means provided in the changing means displays the second display at the execution timing selected by the start time selecting means. The means is changed to the second aspect. Here, the accessory driving means is controlled so that the movable accessory can be driven to a position that makes the second display means difficult to see. Then, the re-visualization selection means provided in the start time selection means allows the second display means, which has been made difficult to see by the display switching means, to be visible as the execution timing for starting the second aspect in the second display means. The first display timing is selected. Here, the first display timing execution determining means provided in the execution determining means determines whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualization selection means, and the first display timing is determined. When it is determined by the execution determining means that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualizing selection means, the first display timing drive changing means provided in the drive interlocking display means serves as a combination. The object driving means drives the movable accessory to a position that makes the second display means difficult to see. As a result, as compared with the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is newly added and displayed, the second display means is displayed. The second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the display means. Therefore, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing the second display means when it becomes visible again, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is displayed in the second display. It has the effect of recognizing that it is the appearance of the second aspect of the means, providing the player with an unexpected effect, and diversifying the effect to enhance the interest of the game. Further, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected first display timing, the movable accessory can be driven to display the second mode at the first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, when making the second display means difficult to see from the player, the driving mode of the movable accessory, which is different from the dynamic display effect, is changed instead of changing the effect content of the dynamic display. The second display means can be made difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to change to the second mode after making the second display means difficult to see without transmitting an additional command or the like for controlling the dynamic display and replacing the effect contents. It has the effect of providing a player with an unexpected effect and diversifying the effect to enhance the interest of the game without increasing the control burden of the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine C1
The accessory driving means
The initial position of the movable accessory and
In the dynamic display, the first position (for example, "strong pattern") that makes the second display means difficult to see by the movable accessory, and
The movable accessory can be driven from the first position to the initial position that makes the second display means visible again.
The change executing means is
With the movable accessory in the first position, the second display means starts the second aspect.
A game machine C2 characterized in that the second aspect is continuously displayed by the second display means in a state where the movable accessory has returned to the initial position.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display means is made difficult to see by driving the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position by the accessory driving means, and the movable accessory is in the first position by the change executing means. The display of the second mode is started by the second display means, and the second mode is continuously displayed by the second display means in a state where the movable accessory has returned to the initial position.

Conventionally, when a movable accessory is driven during execution of dynamic display, it is configured to complete one driving mode by driving from the initial initial position to the driving position and then driving to the initial position again. There is. That is, when the movable accessory is driven, it is configured so as not to interfere with the contents of other effects in the dynamic display by always returning to the initial position. Therefore, when the movable accessory is driven, returning from the drive position to the initial position is a natural expression as a flow of the driving mode of the movable accessory, so that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort.

Then, like the game machine C2, the second display means is made difficult to see by driving the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position, and the second display means is used while the movable accessory is in the first position. Two modes are displayed. After that, the movable accessory is driven from the first position to the initial position, and the second aspect is continuously displayed by the second display means, so that the player can visually recognize the second aspect. With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode while making the second display means visible in the smooth flow of the drive mode of the movable accessory. Therefore, the second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, the second display means is temporarily made invisible and then subtly changed to give the player a sense of discomfort. Then, after that, it is possible to recognize that the sense of incongruity is the appearance of the second aspect by the second display means, and while providing the player with an unexpected effect, diversify the effect and enhance the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2
The execution determination means
In the dynamic display, a position determining means for determining whether or not the movable accessory is in the first position (for example, a process for determining whether or not to drive with a "strong pattern" (S1561)) is provided. ,
The drive changing means is
When the position determining means determines that the movable accessory does not reach the first position, the drive position changing means for driving the movable accessory to the first position in the dynamic display (for example, a super strong flag). The process of setting 223j (S1564)) is provided.
The change executing means is
In the state where the drive position of the movable accessory is changed to the first position by the drive position changing means and the movable accessory is set to the first position by the accessory drive means, the second display means The gaming machine C3, characterized in that the display of the second aspect is started.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position determination means provided in the execution determination means determines whether or not the movable accessory is in the first position in the dynamic display, and the drive position change means provided in the drive change means determines the position determination means. When it is determined that the movable accessory is not in the first position, the movable accessory is driven to the first position in the dynamic display. Then, the change executing means starts the display of the second aspect in the second display means with the movable accessory in the first position. As a result, the second aspect can be displayed at the initially selected first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C3
The drive position changing means
In the dynamic display, a dynamic element determining means (for example, "super reach" or higher variable element) for determining the presence or absence of a dynamic element that can drive the movable accessory (for example, "super reach variable element") The process of confirming the presence or absence (S1563)) is provided.
When the dynamic element determining means determines that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the movable accessory is driven to the first position during execution of the dynamic element. A game machine C4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the presence or absence of a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory is determined in the dynamic display by the dynamic element determining means provided in the driving position changing means. Then, when it is determined by the dynamic element discriminating means that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the movable accessory is driven to the first position during the execution of the dynamic element. As a result, when there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the second display means can be changed to a drive mode that makes it difficult to see, and the second display means can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, by making the second display means difficult to see while maintaining the consistency between the effect content of the dynamic display and the driving mode of the movable accessory, the second display means is initially selected at the first display timing. It is possible to display two modes. Therefore, without performing processing such as reselecting the dynamic display of the dynamic display, the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing is increased, and the production is diversified. It has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C4
The accessory driving means
It has a predetermined time to drive the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position and to drive the movable accessory to the initial position again.
The dynamic element discrimination means
The gaming machine C5, characterized in that, in the dynamic display, the presence or absence of the dynamic element for the predetermined time or longer is determined.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the accessory driving means drives the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position, and it takes a predetermined time to drive the movable accessory to the initial position again. Then, the presence or absence of the dynamic element for a predetermined time or longer is determined in the dynamic display by the dynamic element determination means. As a result, in the dynamic element of the dynamic display, the movable accessory can be driven by the dynamic element that can complete the drive of the movable accessory that requires a predetermined time. Therefore, the movable accessory can be driven by the dynamic element. Can be completed, and the combined effect of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the driving of the movable accessory can be performed with a consistent content. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C4 or C5
The change executing means is
When the first display timing is selected by the redisplay selection means, it is determined by the dynamic element determination means that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory in the dynamic display. At that time, the gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the second display means does not display the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second aspect by the re-visualization execution means, it is determined by the dynamic element discriminating means that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory. At that time, the second display means is configured not to display the second aspect. As a result, when there is no dynamic element that can drive the movable accessory in the dynamic display, that is, when there is no appropriate effect as the execution timing of the second mode, the second mode is not displayed. , There is an effect that a consistent production can be provided to the player without causing a discrepancy in the production content.

In the gaming machine C4 or C5
The start time selection means
A "holding change" of a second timing selection means (for example, "after reach") that selects a second display timing (for example, "after reach") different from the first display timing as an execution timing for starting the display of the second aspect. Notice ") and
When the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second aspect and the dynamic element discriminating means determines that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the first display timing is described. The gaming machine C7 is characterized by comprising a timing changing means for changing the start time of the two modes from the first display timing to the second display timing.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects a second display timing different from the first display timing as the execution timing for starting the display of the second aspect. Further, when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second aspect and the dynamic element determining means determines that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the timing is changed. By means, the start time of the second aspect is changed from the first display timing to the second display. As a result, when the condition for displaying the second mode by the second display means is not satisfied at the first display timing initially selected, the start time of the second mode is changed to the second display timing and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of cases where the second aspect is not displayed can be reduced, the execution rate of the second aspect by the second display means can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7
The start time selection means
The acquisition means includes a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when information is acquired when the start condition is satisfied.
The dynamic display execution means
An execution establishment determination means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition is provided.
The change executing means is
The feature is that the timing correcting means for correcting the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selecting means is provided based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display executing means. Game machine C8 to play.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied. .. Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. .. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the content of the dynamic display. The execution timing of the second aspect is modified by. As a result, even when the determination of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed by the processes performed at different timings, the contents of the effect can be made consistent. It is possible to make adjustments so that there is no discrepancy with each other's production contents. Therefore, by performing each decision in a separate process, it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each decision, and at the same time, it is possible to execute a consistent effect. is there.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8
The storage means
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, the drive information storage means for storing the drive information of the movable accessory by the accessory drive means (for example, the drive pattern information storage area 223e10). A game machine C9 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each information acquired by the acquisition means, the storage means receives the drive information of the movable accessory by the accessory drive means by the drive information storage means. Be remembered. This makes it possible to easily determine the driving mode of the movable accessory by checking the driving information stored in each storage means. Therefore, for example, it is possible to grasp the driving mode of the movable accessory without determining in detail the driving mode of the movable accessory at the start of the dynamic display, and reduce the processing load at the start of the dynamic display. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Group D: Addition of production to execute "pending change notice">

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning opening and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, there is a case where the variable effect related to the start winning is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect that is being executed ends, the execution of the pending variation effect that has not been executed is started.

In this variation effect, as a part of the interest of the game, a suggestion display (for example, "hold change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. When executing this suggestion display, the time to start the suggestion display is determined by lottery, and the suggestion display is displayed based on the lottery result, thereby suggesting the expectation of the jackpot to the player. ing.

However, in the conventional game machine, even if the time to start the suggestion display is decided in advance, the suggestion display may not be executed at the decided start time depending on the content of the fluctuation element in the fluctuation production. In such a case, the execution of the suggestion display itself was stopped, and the production could not be diversified. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggestion display at the initially selected start time, diversify the production, and preferably improve the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. Control device 114) and
An image display means (for example, a third) that displays a specific image (for example, a large character cut-in image Dc2) in conjunction with the effect content of the dynamic display during execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. With a symbol display device 81)
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
A second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the determination result by the determination means, and
A changing means (for example, a hold display setting process) that changes the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (for example, "hold change notice") showing a judgment result by the determination means. S1209)) and
A start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) that selects the start time of the second aspect by the second display means when the change means changes to the second aspect.
An image lottery means for drawing whether or not to display the specific image in the dynamic display (for example, 223 g of the drive lottery counter of the third embodiment is diverted (described in paragraph 0948)) and
When the specific image is displayed based on the lottery by the image lottery means, the image display means (for example, a large character cut-in command for display) that causes the specific image to appear so as to overlap with the second display means. )When,
Execution determination means for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means (for example, a process for determining revariation information (S1506), or determination for pending deletion information). Processing (S1507)) and
When the execution determining means determines that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selecting means, the image changing means (for example, the image changing means) causes the specific image to appear by the image displaying means. , Pattern to add and display large character cut-in image Dc2),
An appearance-linked display means for displaying the second aspect in the second display means with the appearance of the specific image by the image changing means.
The gaming machine D0, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine D0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. During the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the specific image is displayed by the image display means in conjunction with the effect content of the dynamic display. Further, when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for the determination by the determination means. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the changing means. When the changing means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the start time selecting means selects the start time of the second aspect by the second display means. Further, whether or not to display a specific image in the dynamic display is drawn by the image lottery means, and when the specific image is displayed based on the lottery of the image lottery means, the second display is performed by the image display means. A specific image appears so as to overlap (cover, conceal, superimpose, conceal, shield) with the means. Further, the execution determination means determines whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, and the second aspect is set at the start time selected by the start time selection means by the execution determination means. When it is determined that the image cannot be displayed, the specific image is displayed by the image changing means and the image displaying means. Then, the appearance interlocking display means displays the second aspect in the second display means with the appearance of the specific image by the image changing means. As a result, when the second mode cannot be initially displayed at the selected start time, the specific image can be displayed and the second mode can be displayed along with the appearance. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means can be increased at the initially set start time, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D0
A visual switching means (for example, a change from a variable element of "normal reach" to a variable element of "super reach") for switching and controlling a visible state and a difficult-to-see state of the second display means is provided.
The changing means
A change determination means (for example, a change determination means for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first aspect to a second aspect (for example, "pending change notice") indicating a determination result by the determination means. For example, hold display setting process (S1209)) and
When the change determining means determines that the second aspect is changed, the change executing means (for example, changing the second display means to the second aspect at the execution timing selected by the start time selecting means). , Execution symbol change processing (S1414))
The start time selection means
As the timing for starting the second aspect in the second display means, the first display timing at which the second display means, which has been made difficult to see by the visual recognition switching means, changes from the difficult-to-see state to the visible state is selected. It is equipped with a selection means at the time of re-visualization (for example, a change command after erasure for display that executes "notice of change on hold" of "after erasure on hold").
The execution determination means
A first display timing execution determining means (for example, a process of determining revariability information (S1506)) for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualizing selection means. Alternatively, a process for determining pending erase information (S1507)) is provided.
The appearance-linked display means
When the first display timing execution determining means determines that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualizing selection means, the specific image is determined by the image displaying means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized by comprising a first display timing image changing means (for example, a pattern in which a large character cut-in image Dc2 is added and displayed).

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the visual switching means switches and controls the visible state and the difficult-to-see state of the second display means. Then, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the change determination means provided in the change means. Further, when it is determined by the change determining means to change from the first aspect to the second aspect, the change executing means provided in the changing means changes the second display means at the execution timing selected by the start time selecting means. Is changed to the second aspect. In addition, the re-visualization selection means provided in the start time selection means allows the second display means, which has been made difficult to see by the visual recognition switching means, to be visible as the execution timing for starting the second aspect in the second display means. The first display timing is selected. Here, the first display timing execution determining means provided in the execution determining means determines whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualization selection means, and the first display timing is determined. When it is determined that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-visualization selection means by the execution determination means, the first display timing image changing means provided in the appearance interlocking display means is used. A specific image is displayed by the image display means. As a result, as compared with the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is newly added and displayed, the second display means is displayed. The second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the display means. Therefore, by making the second display means difficult to see once and then subtly changing the second display means when it becomes visible again, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the sense of discomfort is second. It has the effect of recognizing that it is the appearance of the second aspect in the display means, providing the player with an unexpected effect, and diversifying the effect to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, when making the second display means difficult to see from the player, the appearance of a specific image that can be additionally displayed on the dynamic element of the dynamic display instead of changing the dynamic element of the dynamic display. By changing the presence or absence, the second display means can be made difficult to see. Therefore, without adjusting and changing the dynamic elements of the dynamic display or controlling other movable accessories, the second display means can be made difficult to see by a slight change in the effect of the dynamic display. The second aspect can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect can be diversified to enhance the interest of the game without significantly increasing the control load related to the dynamic display.

In the game machine D1
The execution determination means
In the dynamic display, an image discriminating means for determining whether or not the specific image appears (for example, a process for determining whether or not the large character cut-in image Dc2 appears) is provided.
The image changing means is
When the image discriminating means determines that the specific image does not appear, an image adding means for displaying the specific image in the dynamic display (for example, a process of additionally displaying a large character cut-in image Dc2). ), With
The change executing means is
The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the specific image is made to appear by the image adding means, and the second display means redisplayed when the specific image is erased is displayed in the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the image discriminating means provided in the execution discriminating means determines whether or not a specific image appears in the dynamic display, and the image adding means provided in the image changing means produces the specific image by the image discriminating means. When it is determined that the image does not appear, a specific image appears in the dynamic display. Then, the change executing means causes the specific image to appear by the image adding means, and the second display means that is redisplayed when the specific image is erased is displayed in the second aspect. As a result, the second aspect of the second display means can be executed at the initially selected first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2
The dynamic display is composed of a combination of a plurality of dynamic elements.
The image display means
The gaming machine D3, characterized in that the specific image is displayed in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display is composed of a combination of a plurality of dynamic elements. Then, the image display means displays the specific image in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements. As a result, the production of the specific image can be completed with any of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, and the composite production of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the specific image can be performed with consistent contents. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect and improve the interest of the game.

Further, by setting the display time of the specific image shorter than the execution time of each dynamic element, for example, as compared with the case where the second display means is covered by driving a movable accessory that requires a predetermined driving time, the specific image is displayed. There is no need for the process of determining the dynamic element whether or not the image can be displayed. Therefore, when the second aspect is executed after making the second display means difficult to see by the specific image, it is only necessary to perform control for determining the display timing of the specific image, so that the player can reduce the control burden. It has the effect of providing unexpected effects and diversifying the effects to enhance the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3
The start time selection means
The acquisition means includes a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when information is acquired when the start condition is satisfied.
The dynamic display execution means
An execution establishment determination means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition is provided.
The change executing means is
The feature is that the timing correcting means for correcting the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selecting means is provided based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display executing means. Game machine D4 to play.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied. .. Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. .. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the content of the dynamic display. The execution timing of the second aspect is modified by. As a result, even when the determination of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed by the processes performed at different timings, the contents of the effect can be made consistent. It is possible to make adjustments so that there is no discrepancy with each other's production contents. Therefore, by performing each decision in a separate process, it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each decision, and at the same time, it is possible to execute a consistent effect. is there.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4
The storage means
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, the validity information storage means (for example, a first random number counter) for storing the validity information of whether or not the predetermined identification information appears. Storage area 223e1) and
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, the type information storage means for storing the type information for determining the type of the predetermined identification information (for example, the first type counter storage area 223e2). )When,
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, the dynamic information storage means for storing the dynamic information regarding the execution mode of the dynamic display (for example, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 or Fluctuation type counter storage area 223e4) and
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, a second mode storage means (for example, a pending change information storage area 223e5) for storing information regarding the display mode of the second mode is used.
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, a timing storage means (for example, a scenario data storage area 223e6) for storing the execution timing is provided.
The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the storage means stores only the hit / fail information storage means, the type information storage means, the dynamic information storage means, the second aspect storage means, and the timing storage means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, only the following information is stored in the storage means for each information acquired by the acquisition means. First, the pass / fail information storage means stores the pass / fail information as to whether or not the predetermined identification information appears. In addition, the type information storage means stores type information that determines the type of predetermined identification information. Further, the dynamic information storage means stores the execution information of the dynamic display. In addition, the second aspect storage means stores the second aspect to be displayed on the second display means. Further, the timing storage means determines the execution timing of the second aspect. Then, only the above-mentioned pass / fail information storage means, type information storage means, dynamic information storage means, second aspect storage means, and timing storage means are stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity of the entire storage means can be reduced without storing extra information in the storage means.

<Group E: Increase in the value of one-step "pending change notice" according to the execution timing>

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning opening and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, there is a case where the variable effect related to the start winning is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect that is being executed ends, the execution of the pending variation effect that has not been executed is started.

In this variation effect, as a part of the interest of the game, a suggestion display (for example, "hold change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. This suggestion display is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit for each display mode by preparing a display mode of a plurality of stages and selecting a display mode that is difficult to be selected at the time of loss when a big hit is won. There is.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the suggestion display of the display mode that is easy to be selected at the time of loss is difficult to be selected when the jackpot is won, and the suggestion display of the display mode that is easy to be selected at the time of loss appears. Based on the suggestion display, the player's expectation for the jackpot diminished, and he was excited about the game. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game by performing an effect capable of maintaining a feeling of expectation for a big hit. And.

An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. With a control device 114)
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
A second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the determination result by the determination means, and
A changing means (for example, a hold display setting process) that changes the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (for example, "hold change notice") showing a judgment result by the determination means. S1209)) and
A start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) that selects the start time of the second aspect by the second display means when the change means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. Prepare,
In the display mode of the second display means, the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears based on the type is stepwise (for example, "white", "blue", "red" or "rainbow"). Show,
The start time selection means
When the predetermined identification information is displayed and the second display means is changed to the second aspect at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information is one step. Single-step change means for displaying in different single-step change modes (for example, change from "white" to "blue" in "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion")
The gaming machine E0, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine E0, the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the changing means. When the display mode of the second display means is changed by the changing means, the time for changing the display mode of the second display means is selected by the start time selection means. Here, in the display mode of the second display means, the degree of expectation that a predetermined identification information appears based on the type is shown stepwise. Then, when the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means in the case of displaying the predetermined identification information, the single-step change means provided in the start time selection means is used. The expected degree of the predetermined identification information is displayed in a single-step change mode in which the expectation is different by one step. As a result, when the predetermined identification information appears, the change degree of the second display means is displayed in a single-step change mode in which the change degree is different by one step, so that the change degree of the second display means is slight. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to recognize the degree of change. Then, when the predetermined identification information appears, the second display means is subtly changed to first give the player a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is the manifestation of the single-step change mode in the second display means. By recognizing that it is out and the predetermined identification information appears even in the single-step change mode, it is expected that the predetermined identification information will appear even in the single-step change mode in the subsequent games. You can play games while playing. Therefore, there is an effect that the production that can maintain the expectation for the big hit can be executed, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E0
A display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and the non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from a variable element of "normal reach" to a variable element of "super reach") is provided.
The changing means
A change determination means (for example, a change determination means for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first aspect to a second aspect (for example, "pending change notice") indicating a determination result by the determination means. For example, hold display setting process (S1209)) and
When the change determining means determines that the first aspect is changed to the second aspect, the second display means is changed to the second aspect at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. It is equipped with a change execution means (for example, execution symbol change processing).
The start time selection means
Redisplay selection means (redisplay time selection means) for selecting the first display timing for redisplaying the second display means hidden by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second aspect in the second display means (the second display means). For example, S1506) of execution symbol change processing is provided.
The single-step changing means
When the second display means is changed to the second mode by the redisplay selection means, the single-step change mode is changed from the display mode displayed before the second display means is hidden. The second display means is provided with a single-step change means at the time of redisplay (for example, a change from "white" to "blue" of "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion"). The featured game machine E1.

According to the game machine E1, the display switching means switches and controls the display state and the non-display state of the second display means. Then, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the change determination means provided in the change means. Further, when it is determined by the change determining means that the display mode of the second display means is changed, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Then, the redisplay selection means provided in the start time selection means redisplays the second display means hidden by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode in the second display means. The first display timing is selected. Further, when the second display means is changed to the second mode by the redisplay selection means, the second display means is hidden by the redisplay single step change means provided in the single step change means. The second display means is redisplayed in a single-step change mode from the previously displayed display mode. As a result, as compared with the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is newly added and displayed, the second display means is displayed. The second display means can be subtly changed while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the display means. Further, since the degree of change of the second display means is displayed in a single-step change mode that is one step different from the display mode before erasing, the degree of change of the second display means is slight, so that the player is notified of the degree of change. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize. Therefore, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is the manifestation of the single-step change mode in the second display means. It has the effect of making the player aware and providing the player with an unexpected effect, while diversifying the effect and enhancing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E1
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a provisional display means for displaying provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information (for example, a provisional "loss display" in FIG. 33 (e)) and
After the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, the redynamic means for executing the redynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information (for example, a variable element of "revariation"). And with
The change executing means is
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that when the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means, the display of the second display means is changed to the single-step change mode at the first display timing.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means by the redynamic means also provided in the dynamic display execution means, the redynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information is executed. .. Then, when the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means, the display of the second display means is changed to the single-step change mode at the first display timing by the change execution means. That is, in the state where the provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is once displayed in the dynamic display, the single-step change mode of the second display means is displayed, and the re-dynamic display is executed in that state to perform the provisional display. It is configured to change the identification information to a predetermined identification information.

Conventionally, when the display mode of the second display means is changed based on the judgment result of the judgment means, the degree of expectation that a predetermined identification information appears based on the type is configured to be shown stepwise. .. Therefore, for example, when changing the display mode of the second display means, a multi-step mode in which the multi-step expectation is different from the display before the change is used rather than a single-step change mode in which the expectation is one step different from the display before the change. Is set so that the appearance expectation of the predetermined identification information is high. That is, in the display mode of the second display means, the appearance of the predetermined identification information is expected by the appearance of the multi-step change mode, and the appearance of the predetermined identification information is expected by the appearance of the single-step change mode. It is set so that it cannot be performed and the identification information (that is, loss) other than the predetermined identification information is often obtained. Therefore, even when the display mode of the second display means changes, for example, when the single-step change mode appears, the single-step change mode expects the appearance of predetermined identification information from the multi-step change mode. Therefore, the player determines that the appearance of the predetermined identification information cannot be expected with respect to the dynamic display in which the single-step change mode appears, and the dynamic display corresponding to the single-step change mode is used. I couldn't find any interest, but rather awakened.

Therefore, in the dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is displayed, the single-step change mode is displayed by the second display means at the timing when the second display means is hidden and the second display means is redisplayed again. By doing so, even if it is a single-step change mode in which the appearance of the predetermined identification information cannot be expected in the past, the appearance of the predetermined identification information can be made depending on the timing when the single-step change mode appears. It becomes possible to expect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the significance of existence of the single-step change mode, which could not be found in the past, and to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information in any of the production patterns, and to enhance the interest of the game by various productions. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine E2
The game machine E3 is characterized in that the single-step change mode is a mode in which the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information is increased by one step.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the single-step change mode is displayed in a mode in which the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information is increased by one step. As a result, at the timing when the second display means is erased and the second display means is redisplayed again, the single-step change mode in which the expectation level of the predetermined identification information is increased by one step by the second display means is made to appear. Therefore, even in a single-step change mode in which the expectation level of the predetermined identification information is increased by one step, which could not be expected to appear in the predetermined identification information in the past, the timing at which the single-step change mode appears. Depending on the situation, it is possible to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information. As a result, it is possible to increase the significance of existence of the single-step change mode in which the expectation of the predetermined identification information, which has not been found to be interesting in the past, is increased by one step, and the appearance of the predetermined identification information can be expected in any of the production patterns. There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various productions.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3
The single-step change means executes the single-step change mode when the initial mode has the lowest expectation before the second display means is hidden.
The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the single-step change mode is a first ascending mode that is one step higher than the initial mode.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E2 or E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, before the second display means is hidden by the single-step change means, the single-step change mode is executed when the initial mode has the lowest expectation, and the single-step change mode is changed from the initial mode. The first ascending mode, which is increased by one step, is displayed.

Conventionally, when the display mode of the second display means is changed based on the judgment result by the determination means, the first ascending mode in which the expected degree of the predetermined identification information is raised by one step from the lowest expected degree is the predetermined identification information. It is configured so that it is easy to be selected when the identification information other than the above appears, and it is difficult to be selected when the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, the player determines that the appearance of the predetermined identification information cannot be expected with respect to the dynamic display in which the first ascending mode appears, and finds an interest in the dynamic display corresponding to the first ascending mode. Rather, he was awakened.

Therefore, in the dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is displayed, the single-step change mode is displayed by the second display means at the timing when the second display means is hidden and the second display means is redisplayed again. As for the single-step change mode, the appearance of the predetermined identification information is conventionally expected by displaying the first ascending mode in which the predetermined identification information is expected to appear one step higher than the initial mode having the lowest expectation. Even in the first ascending mode that could not be performed, it is possible to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information depending on the timing at which the first ascending mode appears. As a result, it is possible to enhance the significance of existence of the first ascending mode, which could not be found in the past, and to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information in any of the production patterns, and to enhance the interest of the game by various productions. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4
The second display means can display a symbol for the information for each of the information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means.
The single-step change means is waiting for the single-step change mode to appear in the symbol corresponding to the information for which the dynamic display execution means is waiting before the execution by the dynamic display execution means. A game machine E5 characterized by having an execution means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, for each information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means, a symbol for the information can be displayed by the second display means. Then, by the waiting execution means provided in the single-step change means, the single-step change mode is changed in the symbol corresponding to the information before the execution by the dynamic display execution means and in which the execution of the dynamic display is waiting. Appear.

Conventionally, a lottery effect is performed to determine whether or not to display predetermined identification information in the dynamic display during execution, so that the player can suggest a display result of the dynamic display during execution (for example, a first symbol). The game is played while paying attention to how the 3 symbols and the execution symbols change. Therefore, when the display object related to the dynamic display is changed during the execution of the dynamic display, the player may be able to perceive the change no matter how the change is made. Therefore, even if it is desired to casually change the display mode of the second display means based on the determination result for the dynamic display during execution, the change may be noticed by the player.

Therefore, instead of changing the display mode of the second display means that can suggest the display result of the dynamic display being executed, the second display showing the waiting dynamic display before the dynamic display is executed. A single-step change mode is manifested in the means. The player does not pay attention to the change of the second display means for indicating the waiting dynamic display as much as the symbol that can suggest the display result of the dynamic display during execution, and it is difficult to notice the change. Therefore, when the display mode of the symbol corresponding to the second display means indicating the waiting dynamic display is changed, the player is delayed in noticing the change, so that the single-step change mode with respect to the second display means. Can give the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect can be diversified to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E5
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a continuous display means (for example, a variable element of "normal reach") that continuously displays the second display means, and
With a special effect executing means (for example, a variable element of "super reach") that executes a special effect including an effect of hiding the second display means displayed by the continuous display means by the display switching means. ,
After the end of the special effect by the special effect executing means, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means. After the end, the redisplay means (for example, the cockpit display area after the end of the variable element of "super reach"). Db is redisplayed), and
The single-step changing means
The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that when the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means after the end, the display of the second display means is changed to the single-step change mode.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display means is continuously displayed in the dynamic display by the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the special effect executing means executes a special effect including an effect of hiding the second display means displayed by the continuous display means by the display switching means, which is also provided in the dynamic display executing means. After the end of the special effect by the special effect executing means, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means. Then, when the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means after the end by the single-step change means, the display of the second display means is changed to the single-step change mode.

Conventionally, at the start of dynamic display, a symbol representing the number of information stored in the storage means is displayed by the second display means, and the second display means is continuously displayed by the continuous display means. Then, the second display means is hidden when the special effect is executed, the second display means is redisplayed after the end of the special effect, and the second display means is displayed by the continuous display means at the start of the dynamic display. 2 By returning the display means, the next dynamic display is prepared for execution. That is, by redisplaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the special effect, the player can be informed of the end of the dynamic display, and the number of the next dynamic display can be determined. The next dynamic display can be smoothly executed while making the player aware of it. Therefore, when the special effect is completed, making the second display means visible again is a natural expression in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, so that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort.

Then, the second display means continuously displayed by the continuous display means, such as the game machine E6, is hidden by the display switching means based on the execution of the special effect in the dynamic display, and the special effect ends. Occasionally, the display of the second display means is changed to a single-step change mode at the timing of redisplaying the second display means by the display switching means. With such a configuration, in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, the display mode can be changed while making the second display means in the non-display state visible again. Further, since the content to be changed is also a one-step change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize because the change is slight. Further, by making the single-step change mode appear in the second display means that shows the dynamic display during standby that the player is not paying attention to, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change. Therefore, it is possible to subtly change the second display means into a single-step change mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the second display means. As a result, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is the manifestation of the single-step change mode in the second display means. There is an effect that it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

In the gaming machine E6
The storage means
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, when the single-step change mode is displayed on the second display means by the standby execution means, the single-step change mode is displayed. It is equipped with a displayed information storage means for storing displayed information indicating that it has been displayed.
When the displayed information is stored in the displayed information storage means and the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, the single-step changing means may perform the special effect before executing the special effect. The gaming machine E7 is provided with a display maintaining means for maintaining the display mode displayed by the second display means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each information acquired by the storage means, the displayed information storage means, the waiting execution means, and the second display means. When the single-step change mode is displayed in, the displayed information indicating that the single-step change mode has been displayed is stored. Further, when the displayed information is stored in the displayed information storage means by the display maintaining means provided in the single-step changing means, and the special effect has already been executed by the special effect executing means, the special effect is produced. The display mode displayed by the second display means before the execution of is maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second display means from executing the single-step change mode in duplicate, and it is possible to maintain the consistency of the effect.

<Group F: Reach pattern changed to "weak pattern">

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning opening and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, there is a case where the variable effect related to the start winning is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect that is being executed ends, the execution of the pending variation effect that has not been executed is started.

In this variable effect, when suggesting the appearance of a jackpot, any suggestion effect (first suggestion effect or second suggestion effect) having a different degree of expectation that the jackpot appears can be executed. Therefore, for example, at the time of a jackpot, a second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is configured to be easier to select than the first suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is set so that the expectation of the appearance of the jackpot is higher. There is. That is, the player is set so that it is difficult to expect the appearance of the jackpot by executing the second suggestion effect and the appearance of the jackpot by executing the first suggestion effect.

In such a game machine, when the first suggestion effect is executed in the variable effect, the first suggestion effect is less likely to be selected at the time of a big hit than the second suggestion effect, and is more likely to be selected at the time of loss. It was judged that a big hit could not be expected for the variable effect in which the suggestive effect appeared, and he could not find any interest in the variable effect in which the first suggestive effect was executed, but rather he was awakened. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining a sense of expectation for a jackpot in any of the productions and preferably improving the interest of the game. The purpose is.

An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. Control device 114) and
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
In the dynamic display, the first suggestion effect suggesting the appearance of the predetermined identification information (for example, the "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "super reach") and the predetermined identification information from the first suggestion effect. The second suggestion effect (for example, the "strong pattern" of the variable element of "super reach"), which has a high expectation of appearance, and the suggestion effect execution means that can execute the
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
A second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the determination result by the determination means, and
A changing means (for example, a hold display setting process (S1209)) for changing the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode showing a judgment result by the judgment means.
A start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) for selecting the start time of the second aspect by the second display means when the change means is changed to the second aspect is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
When the second aspect is displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means when the predetermined identification information is displayed, the suggestion effect execution means is used before the display of the second aspect. 1 First suggestion execution means for executing suggestion effect (for example, display reach pattern change command),
The gaming machine F0, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine F0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. In the dynamic display, the first suggestion effect suggesting the appearance of the predetermined identification information and the second suggestion effect having a higher expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information than the first suggestion effect are performed by the suggestion effect execution means. Configured to be viable. Further, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the changing means. Further, when the change means is used to change to the second aspect, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second aspect by the second display means. Then, when the predetermined identification information is displayed by the first suggestion execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, the second mode is displayed in the second display means at the start time selected by the start time selection means. At that time, the first suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means before the display of the second aspect. As a result, the first suggestion effect is executed before the display of the second aspect, and then the predetermined identification information appears after the second display means changes to the display of the second aspect. As a result, even in the first suggestion effect in which the appearance of the predetermined identification information could not be expected from the second suggestion effect in the past, the appearance of the second aspect thereafter causes the predetermined identification information to appear. It is possible to expect the appearance. On the other hand, when the second suggestion effect other than the first suggestion effect appears, the expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information by the second suggestion effect is higher than that of the first suggestion effect. It is possible to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information based on the degree. As a result, it is possible to enhance the significance of existence of the first suggestion production, which could not be found in the past, and to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information in any production pattern, and to enhance the interest of the game by various productions. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine F0
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a provisional display means for displaying provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information (for example, a provisional "loss display" in FIG. 33 (e)) and
After the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, the redynamic means for executing the redynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information (for example, a variable element of "revariation"). And with
The first suggestion execution means is
When the changing means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect and the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means, the display of the second display means is displayed. The gaming machine F1 characterized in that the first suggestion effect is executed before the change to the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means by the redynamic means also provided in the dynamic display execution means, the redynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information is executed. To. Then, when the changing means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect and the redynamic display is executed by the redynamic means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second aspect. The first suggestion effect is executed by the first suggestion execution means. That is, the first suggestion effect is executed before the second aspect of the second display means is displayed, then the provisional identification information appears, the second display means changes to the display of the second aspect, and then. , A redynamic display that changes the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information is executed. As a result, even in the first suggestion effect in which the appearance of the predetermined identification information could not be expected in the past, the appearance of the predetermined identification information is expected by the appearance of the second aspect after that. It becomes possible. Further, when the second suggestion effect other than the first suggestion effect appears, the expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information by the second suggestion effect is higher than that of the first suggestion effect. Based on the above, it is possible to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information. As a result, it is possible to enhance the significance of existence of the first suggestion production, which could not be found in the past, and to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information in any production pattern, and to enhance the interest of the game by various productions. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine F1
A display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and the non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from a variable element of "normal reach" to a variable element of "super reach") is provided.
The changing means
Change determination means (for example, hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first aspect to the second aspect showing the determination result by the determination means. )When,
When the change determining means determines that the second aspect is changed, the change executing means (for example, changing the second display means to the second aspect at the execution timing selected by the start time selecting means). , Execution pattern change processing),
The start time selection means
Redisplay selection means (redisplay time selection means) for selecting the first display timing for redisplaying the second display means hidden by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second aspect in the second display means (the second display means). For example, S1506) of execution symbol change processing is provided.
The first suggestion execution means is
When the second aspect is displayed at the first display timing selected by the redisplay selection means, a display in which the suggestion effect execution means executes the first suggestion effect before the display of the second aspect. Previous first suggestion execution means (for example, display reach pattern change command),
The gaming machine F2, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display switching means switches and controls the display state and the non-display state of the second display means. Then, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the change determination means provided in the change means. When it is determined by the change determining means to change to the second aspect, the change executing means changes the second display means to the second aspect at the execution timing selected by the start time selecting means. Then, the redisplay selection means provided in the start time selection means redisplays the second display means hidden by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode in the second display means. The first display timing is selected. Further, when the first suggestion execution means before display provided in the first suggestion execution means displays the second aspect in the second display means by the selection means at the time of redisplay, the suggestion is made before the display of the second aspect. The first suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means.

Conventionally, when suggesting the appearance of predetermined identification information by a suggestion effect executing means, the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears differs depending on the type. Therefore, for example, when suggesting the appearance of predetermined identification information by the suggestion effect execution means, the second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is more important than the first suggestion effect. It is set so that the degree of expectation for appearance is high. That is, the player cannot expect the appearance of the predetermined identification information by executing the second suggestion effect, and cannot expect the appearance of the predetermined identification information by executing the first suggestion effect. It is set so that identification information (that is, loss) other than the identification information of is often predicted. Therefore, for example, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the first suggestion effect cannot be expected to show the predetermined identification information from the second suggestion effect, so that the player can expect the first suggestion effect to appear. Regarding the dynamic display that appeared, it was judged that the appearance of the predetermined identification information could not be expected, and he could not find any interest in the dynamic display in which the first suggestion effect was executed, but rather he was awakened.

Therefore, in the dynamic display in which the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the timing of redisplaying after the second display means is hidden by the redisplay selection means, before the display of the second mode is performed. , The first suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. Then, the provisional identification information appears, the second display means changes to the display of the second mode at the first display timing, and after the provisional identification information is displayed, the provisional identification information is used as the predetermined identification information. A redynamic display that changes to is performed. As a result, even in the first suggestion effect in which the appearance of the predetermined identification information could not be expected in the past, the appearance of the predetermined identification information is expected by the appearance of the second aspect after that. It becomes possible. Further, when the second suggestion effect other than the first suggestion effect appears, the expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information by the second suggestion effect is higher than that of the first suggestion effect. Based on the above, it is possible to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information. As a result, it is possible to enhance the significance of existence of the first suggestion production, which could not be found in the past, and to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information in any production pattern, and to enhance the interest of the game by various productions. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine F2
The second display means can display a symbol representing the number of the information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means.
The suggestion effect execution means
In the dynamic display, a continuous display means (for example, a variable element of "normal reach") that continuously displays the second display means, and
A special effect executing means (for example,) for executing the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect including an effect of hiding the second display means displayed by the continuous display means by the display switching means. "Weak pattern" or "strong pattern" of "super reach") and
After the end of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect by the special effect executing means, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display means. The cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after the end of the variable element), and
The change executing means is
The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that when the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means after the end, the display of the second display means is changed to the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a symbol representing the number of information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means continuously displays the second display means in the dynamic display. Then, the suggestion effect execution means executes the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect including the effect of hiding the second display means displayed by the continuous display means by the display switching means, and the suggestion effect is also executed. After the end of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect by the special effect execution means, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means by the post-end redisplay means provided in the execution means. Then, when the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means after the end by the change executing means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode.

Conventionally, at the start of dynamic display, a symbol representing the number of information stored in the storage means is displayed by the second display means, and the second display means is continuously displayed by the continuous display means. Then, when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, the second display means is switched to the non-display state by the display switching means, and after the end of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, the display switching means is used to switch the second display means. Is redisplayed and the second display means is returned to the state displayed by the continuous display means at the start of the dynamic display to prepare for the execution of the next dynamic display. That is, by redisplaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest the end of the dynamic display to the player, and the next The next dynamic display can be smoothly executed while the player is made aware of the number of dynamic displays of. Therefore, when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is completed, the redisplay of the second display means is a natural expression in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, so that the player feels uncomfortable. do not feel.

Then, the second display means continuously displayed by the continuous display means, such as the game machine F3, is hidden by the display switching means based on the execution of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. At the timing when the display switching means redisplays the second display means at the end of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, the second display means displays the second aspect. With this configuration, the display mode can be changed from the first mode to the second mode while the second display means is redisplayed in the smooth flow of the execution process of the dynamic display. Therefore, the second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, the second display means is temporarily made invisible by the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, and then subtly changed to give the player a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is felt in the second display means. It has the effect of recognizing that it is the appearance of the second aspect, providing the player with an unexpected effect, and diversifying the effect to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine F3
The first suggestion execution means is
A suggestion effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect in the dynamic display (for example, fluctuation change processing (S1471)).
When it is determined by the suggestion effect determination means that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the effect change means for changing the second suggestion effect to the first suggestion effect (for example, "strong pattern" is changed to "weak pattern". Processing to change (S1807)) and
The redisplay selection means is
When the second display means is displayed after the end of the first suggestion effect changed by the effect changing means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second aspect. ..

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the second suggestion effect is executed in the dynamic display is determined by the suggestion effect determination means provided in the first suggestion execution means. Further, when it is determined by the suggestion effect discriminating means that the second suggestion effect is to be executed by the effect changing means also provided in the first suggestion execution means, the second suggestion effect is changed to the first suggestion effect. Then, after the end of the first suggestion effect changed by the effect changing means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode by the redisplay selection means. As a result, the chance that the predetermined identification information appears after the first suggestion effect is executed by the simple control of replacing the second suggestion effect with the first suggestion effect is increased, and the predetermined identification information by the first suggestion effect is increased. It is possible to raise the degree of expectation for the appearance of. Therefore, there is an effect that the production can be diversified and the interest of the game can be enhanced by simple control.

In the gaming machine F4
The gaming machine F5, wherein the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are configured with the same execution time.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are composed of the same execution time. As a result, the first suggestion effect can be changed to the second suggestion effect without changing the execution time of the entire dynamic display. Therefore, by changing the second suggestion effect to the first suggestion effect while maintaining the consistency of the execution time of the dynamic display, it is not necessary to reselect the dynamic element of the dynamic display. 1 It is possible to increase the degree of expectation of the appearance of predetermined identification information by suggestion production. Therefore, there is an effect that the production can be diversified and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5
The start time selection means
The acquisition means includes a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when information is acquired when the start condition is satisfied.
The dynamic display execution means
An execution establishment determination means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition is provided.
The change executing means is
The feature is that the timing correcting means for correcting the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selecting means is provided based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display executing means. Game machine F6 to play.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied. .. Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second aspect selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. .. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the content of the dynamic display. The execution timing of the second aspect is modified by. As a result, even when the determination of the second aspect by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed by the processes performed at different timings, the contents of the effect can be made consistent. It is possible to make adjustments so that there is no discrepancy with each other's production contents. Therefore, by performing each decision in a separate process, it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each decision, and at the same time, it is possible to execute a consistent effect. is there.

<Group G: The content of the hidden object propagates to the hidden object>

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning opening and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, there is a case where the variable effect related to the start winning is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect that is being executed ends, the execution of the pending variation effect that has not been executed is started.

In this variation effect, as a part of the interest of the game, a suggestion display (for example, "hold change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. When executing this suggestion display, the display mode of the display object that is always visible to the player is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or a new display object is additionally displayed to display the display object. It is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot to the player depending on the display mode of.

However, in the conventional game machine, when the suggestion display is executed, the player always changes the display mode of the visible display object or additionally displays the display object, so that the player changes the display object. It was easy to recognize, and it was not possible to create unexpectedness in the production content. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing an unexpected effect and preferably improving the interest of the game.

An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. Control device 114) and
An effect means (for example, a movable accessory, a cut-in image, etc.) controlled in conjunction with the effect content of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means.
The effect mode changing means for changing the display mode of the effect means is provided.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
A second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) configured to be able to display the determination result by the determination means, and
A changing means (for example, a hold display setting process) that changes the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (for example, "hold change notice") showing a judgment result by the determination means. S1209)) and
A start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) that selects the start time of the second aspect by the second display means when the change means changes to the second aspect.
When the display of the second display means is changed to the second aspect at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the display mode of the effect means is propagated to the second display means to the second aspect. The game machine G0 is provided with a display propagation means (for example, the display color of the left movable accessory 87 is reflected in the display color of the execution symbol).

According to the game machine G0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. The effect means are controlled so as to be linked with the effect content of the dynamic display of the identification information. In addition, the display mode of the effect mode is changed by the effect mode changing means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the changing means. When changing to the second aspect by the changing means, the start time of the second aspect by the second display means is selected by the start time selecting means. Then, when the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the display mode of the effect means is propagated to the second display means to display the second mode. .. As a result, when changing from the first aspect to the second aspect of the second display means, the display mode of the effect means is propagated and changed. Therefore, how the effect means is changed and whether or not the effect means is changed. The gameability of whether or not the display mode propagates to the second display means is created. Therefore, when the second display means is changed, the display mode of the effect means is propagated to the second display means to change the effect, so that the player is first provided with an unexpected effect and the effect is diversified. It has the effect of enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, "propagating the display mode of the effect means to the second display means" means that the display mode of the effect means is directly propagated to the second display means and the content related to the display mode of the effect means. 2 The display means is displayed, or the display mode of the effect means is changed (shifted) to the second display means and displayed.

In the gaming machine G0
A display switching means (for example, a change from a variable element of "normal reach" to a variable element of "super reach") for switching and controlling a display state and a non-display state of the second display means by the effect means is provided.
The changing means
A change determination means (for example, a change determination means for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first aspect to a second aspect (for example, "pending change notice") indicating a determination result by the determination means. For example, hold display setting process (S1209)) and
When the change determining means determines that the second aspect is changed, the change executing means (for example, changing the second display means to the second aspect at the execution timing selected by the start time selecting means). , Execution symbol change processing (S1414))
The start time selection means is
Redisplay selection means (redisplay time selection means) for selecting the first display timing for redisplaying the second display means hidden by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second aspect in the second display means (the second display means). For example, S1506) of execution symbol change processing is provided.
The display propagation means
When the display of the second display means is changed to the second aspect at the first display timing by the redisplay selection means, the second display means is made difficult to see by the effect means, and the display switching means of the display switching means. When the second display means is made visible again by switching control, the display mode of the effect means is propagated to the second display means to display the second mode (for example, left movable). The game machine G1 is characterized in that the display color of the accessory 87 is reflected in the display color of the execution symbol).

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display switching means switches and controls the display state and the non-display state of the second display means by the effect means. Then, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means by the change determination means provided in the change means. When it is determined by the change determination means to change to the second mode, the change execution means changes the display mode of the second display means at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Here, the redisplay selection means provided in the start time selection means re-displays the second display means hidden by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode in the second display means. The first display timing to be displayed is selected. Then, when the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the first display timing by the redisplay time selection means by the redisplay time propagation means provided in the propagation display means, the second display means is produced by the effect means. When the second display means is made visible again by the switching control of the display switching means, the display mode of the effect means is propagated to the second display means to display the second mode. As a result, as compared with the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is newly added and displayed, the second display means is displayed. The second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the display means. Further, the change from the first aspect to the second aspect of the second display means is also changed by propagating the display mode of the effect means, so how the effect means changes and the display mode of the effect means. Is transmitted to the second display means or not, which is a game property. Therefore, by temporarily obscuring the second display means by the effect means and then casually propagating the display mode of the effect means to the second display means to change the display mode, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the sense of discomfort is given. Is an appearance of the second aspect in the second display means, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect can be diversified to enhance the interest of the game. ..

In the gaming machine G1
The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the effect means is a movable accessory capable of covering the front surface side of the second display means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect means is composed of a movable accessory that can cover the front side of the second display means. Thereby, the second display means can be made invisible by the driving mode of the movable accessory different from the display means for displaying the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to carry out a combined effect of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the drive of the movable accessory with a consistent content, provide the player with an unexpected effect, and diversify the effect to play the game. It has the effect of enhancing the interest of the.

In the gaming machine G2
The accessory driving means for driving the movable accessory (for example, accessory driving process (S1151)) is provided.
The accessory driving means
The initial position of the movable accessory and
In the dynamic display, the first position (for example, "strong pattern") that makes the second display means difficult to see by the movable accessory, and
The movable accessory can be driven from the first position to the initial position that makes the second display means visible again.
The re-visualization propagation means
With the movable accessory in the first position, the display mode of the movable accessory is propagated to the second display means to start the display of the second aspect.
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the second aspect is continuously displayed by the second display means in a state where the movable accessory has returned to the initial position.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable accessory is driven by the accessory driving means, and the movable accessory is driven from the initial position to the first position by the accessory driving means, which makes the second display means difficult to see, and at the time of re-visualization. The time propagation means propagates the display mode of the movable accessory to the second display means while the movable accessory is in the first position, starts the display of the second aspect, and returns the movable accessory to the initial position. Then, the second aspect is continuously displayed in the second display means.

Conventionally, when a movable accessory is driven during execution of dynamic display, it is configured to complete one driving mode by driving from the initial initial position to the driving position and then driving to the initial position again. There is. That is, when the movable accessory is driven, it is configured so as not to interfere with the contents of other effects in the dynamic display by always returning to the initial position. Therefore, when the movable accessory is driven, returning from the drive position to the initial position is a natural expression as a flow of the driving mode of the movable accessory, so that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort.

Then, like the game machine G3, the movable accessory is driven from the initial position to the first position to make the second display means difficult to see, and the movable accessory is displayed in the state where the movable accessory is in the first position. The aspect propagates to the second display means to display the second aspect. After that, the movable accessory is driven from the first position to the initial position, and the second aspect is continuously displayed by the second display means, so that the player can visually recognize the second aspect. With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode while making the second display means visible in the smooth flow of the drive mode of the movable accessory. Therefore, the second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, by making the second display means invisible once and then subtly changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the discomfort is the manifestation of the second aspect by the second display means. It has the effect of making the player aware and providing the player with an unexpected effect, while diversifying the effect and enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, there is an effect that the playability of whether or not the display mode of the movable accessory is propagated to the second display means is created, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G3
The start time selection means
Execution determination means for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualization selection means (for example, a process for determining revariability information (S1506), or hold deletion. Information determination process (S1507)) and
When it is determined by the execution determining means that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualizing selection means, the movable accessory is moved by the accessory driving means. The gaming machine G4 is characterized by comprising a drive changing means (for example, a process of setting a super strong flag 223j (S1564)) for driving the second display means to a position where it is difficult to see.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-visualization selection means is determined by the execution determination means provided in the start time selection means, and the re-visualization selection is performed by the execution determination means. When it is determined that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the means, the position where the movable accessory is made difficult to see by the accessory driving means by the drive changing means. Driven to. As a result, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected first display timing, the movable accessory can be driven to display the second mode at the first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, when making the second display means difficult to see from the player, the driving mode of the movable accessory, which is different from the dynamic display effect, is changed instead of changing the effect content of the dynamic display. The second display means can be made difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to change to the second mode after making the second display means difficult to see without transmitting an additional command or the like for controlling the dynamic display and replacing the effect contents. It has the effect of providing a player with an unexpected effect and diversifying the effect to enhance the interest of the game without increasing the control burden of the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine G4
The execution determination means
In the dynamic display, a position determining means for determining whether or not the movable accessory is in the first position (for example, a process for determining whether or not to drive with a "strong pattern" (S1561)) is provided. ,
The drive changing means is
When the position determining means determines that the movable accessory does not reach the first position, the drive position changing means for driving the movable accessory to the first position in the dynamic display (for example, a super strong flag). The process of setting 223j (S1564)) is provided.
The re-visualization propagation means
A display mode of the movable accessory in a state where the drive position of the movable accessory is changed to the first position by the drive position changing means and the movable accessory is set to the first position by the accessory drive means. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the display of the second aspect is started by propagating to the second display means.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position determination means provided in the execution determination means determines whether or not the movable accessory is in the first position in the dynamic display, and the drive position change means provided in the drive change means determines the position determination means. When it is determined that the movable accessory is not in the first position, the movable accessory is driven to the first position in the dynamic display. Then, the display mode of the movable accessory is propagated to the second display means in the state where the movable accessory is in the first position by the re-visualization propagation means, and the display of the second aspect is started. As a result, the second aspect can be displayed at the initially selected first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, there is an effect that the playability of whether or not the display mode of the movable accessory is propagated to the second display means is created, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G5
The drive position changing means
In the dynamic display, a dynamic element determining means (for example, "super reach" or higher variable element) for determining the presence or absence of a dynamic element that can drive the movable accessory (for example, "super reach variable element") The process of confirming the presence or absence (S1563)) is provided.
When the dynamic element determining means determines that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the movable accessory is driven to the first position during execution of the dynamic element. A game machine G6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the presence or absence of a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory is determined in the dynamic display by the dynamic element determining means provided in the driving position changing means. Then, when it is determined by the dynamic element discriminating means that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the movable accessory is driven to the first position during the execution of the dynamic element. As a result, when there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the second display means can be changed to a drive mode that makes it difficult to see, and the second display means can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, by making the second display means difficult to see while maintaining the consistency between the effect content of the dynamic display and the driving mode of the movable accessory, the second display means is initially selected at the first display timing. It is possible to display two modes. Therefore, without performing processing such as reselecting the dynamic display of the dynamic display, the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing is increased, and the production is diversified. It has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G6
The accessory driving means
It has a predetermined time to drive the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position and to drive the movable accessory to the initial position again.
The dynamic element discrimination means
In the dynamic display, the gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the presence or absence of the dynamic element for the predetermined time or longer is determined.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the accessory driving means drives the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position, and it takes a predetermined time to drive the movable accessory to the initial position again. Then, the presence or absence of the dynamic element for a predetermined time or longer is determined in the dynamic display by the dynamic element determination means. As a result, in the dynamic element of the dynamic display, the movable accessory can be driven by the dynamic element that can complete the drive of the movable accessory that requires a predetermined time. Therefore, the movable accessory can be driven by the dynamic element. Can be completed, and the combined effect of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the driving of the movable accessory can be performed with a consistent content. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G7
The gaming machine G8, wherein the effect means is a specific image that is displayed overlapping with the second display means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect means is configured by the specific image displayed overlapping with the second display means. As a result, the second display means can be made invisible by additionally displaying an image on the display means for displaying the dynamic display. Therefore, the second is a slight change in the dynamic display effect of adding and displaying a specific image without adjusting and changing the dynamic element of the dynamic display or controlling other movable accessories. The second aspect can be performed after the display means is made invisible, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect can be diversified to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G8
The start time selection means
When the execution determining means determines that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualizing selection means, the image displaying means causes the specific image to appear. The gaming machine G9 is characterized by comprising image changing means (for example, a pattern in which a large character cut-in image Dc2 is added and displayed).

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined by the execution determining means that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the revisualizing selection means, the image changing means causes the image displaying means to display the specific image. To. As a result, when the second aspect cannot be displayed at the initially selected first display timing, the specific image is displayed and the display mode of the specific image is propagated to the second display means at the first display timing. The second aspect can be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second aspect of the second display means at the initially set first display timing can be increased, the production can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G8 or G9
The dynamic display is composed of a combination of a plurality of dynamic elements.
The image display means
The gaming machine G10, characterized in that the specific image is displayed in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G8 or G9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display is composed of a combination of a plurality of dynamic elements. Then, the image display means displays the specific image in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements. As a result, the production of the specific image can be completed with any of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, and the composite production of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the specific image can be performed with consistent contents. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect and improve the interest of the game.

Further, by setting the display time of the specific image shorter than the execution time of each dynamic element, for example, as compared with the case where the second display means is covered by driving a movable accessory that requires a predetermined driving time, the specific image is displayed. There is no need for the process of determining the dynamic element whether or not the image can be displayed. Therefore, when the second aspect is executed after making the second display means difficult to see by the specific image, it is only necessary to perform control for determining the display timing of the specific image, so that the player can reduce the control burden. It has the effect of providing unexpected effects and diversifying the effects to enhance the interest of the game.

<Group H: Chance down & chance up simultaneous display>
An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. With a control device 114)
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
In the dynamic display, as an ascending effect executing means for executing an expectation increasing effect (for example, generation of a variable element of "super reach") indicating that the expectation that the predetermined identification information appears has increased. ,
In the dynamic display, an expectation lowering effect (for example, a loss of a variable element of "super reach") indicating that the expectation that the predetermined identification information appears has decreased, and a lowering effect executing means.
A main execution means capable of executing the expectation increase effect and the expectation decrease effect in the main display unit (for example, the main display area Dm) of the display means, respectively.
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
A second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the determination result by the determination means, and
A display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and the non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from a variable element of "normal reach" to a variable element of "super reach").
A change determination means (for example, a change determination means for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first aspect to a second aspect (for example, "pending change notice") indicating a determination result by the determination means. For example, hold display setting process (S1209)) and
A start time selection means (for example, execution symbol change processing) for selecting the start time of the second aspect by the second display means when it is determined by the change determination means to change to the second aspect. With
The display switching means
A non-display means (for example,) that hides the second display means when the expected degree increase effect is executed by the ascending effect executing means in the main display unit of the display means by the main executing means. Variable factors of "super reach") and
When the expected degree lowering effect is executed by the lowering effect executing means in the main display unit of the display means by the main executing means, the second display means which is hidden by the non-display means. With a redisplay means (for example, the end of the variable element of "super reach"),
The starting selection means
As an execution timing for displaying the second aspect in the second display means, when the expectation lowering effect is executed on the main display unit, the display unit other than the main display unit is the main display unit. In the sub-display unit (for example, cockpit display area Db) which is a smaller display area, the redisplay selection means (for example, “for example,” a redisplay selection means for selecting the first display timing at which the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means. The gaming machine H0 is characterized by having a "change after erasure command" for display that executes "notice of change on hold" of "after erasure on hold".

According to the game machine H0, the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The ascending effect executing means executes an expectation increasing effect indicating that the expectation that the predetermined identification information appears has increased in the dynamic display. In addition, the descending effect executing means executes an expectation lowering effect indicating that the expectation that the predetermined identification information appears has decreased in the dynamic display. Then, the main execution means enables the display means to execute the expectation increase effect and the expectation decrease effect on the main display unit, respectively. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the determination result by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the display switching means switches and controls the display state and the non-display state of the second display means. Then, it is determined by the change determination means whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first aspect to the second aspect showing the determination result by the determination means. When it is determined by the change determining means to change to the second aspect, the start time of the second aspect by the second display means is selected by the start time selecting means. Then, when the non-display means provided in the display switching means executes the expectation increase effect by the main executing means in the main display unit of the display means by the ascending effect executing means, the second display means is in a non-display state. Is said to be. Similarly, when the redisplay means provided in the display switching means executes the expectation lowering effect by the main executing means in the main display unit of the display means by the lowering effect executing means, the non-display means hides the display. The second display means is redisplayed. Then, when the expectation lowering effect is executed in the main display unit as the execution timing for displaying the second mode in the second display means by the redisplay selection means provided in the start time selection means, the main display is performed. In the sub-display unit, which is a display unit other than the unit and is a display area smaller than the main display unit, the display of the second display means is displayed at the first display timing when the second display unit is redisplayed by the redisplay means. It is changed into two modes. As a result, as compared with the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is newly added and displayed, the second display means is displayed. The second display means can be subtly changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the display means. Further, the player can display the second mode by the second display means by the sub-display unit of the display means during the execution of the expectation decrease effect after executing the expectation increase effect on the main display unit of the display means. The second display means can be subtly changed while paying attention to the effect result of the main display unit. Therefore, by subtly changing the second display means, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to recognize that the discomfort is the appearance of the second aspect in the second display means, and the player is surprised. While providing a sexual production, it has the effect of diversifying the production and enhancing the interest of the game.

<Group I: Discomfort in cognition of visual, auditory, and tactile perception>
An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. With a control device 114)
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, hold display setting process (S1209)) and
Suggestion means configured to be able to suggest the judgment result by the judgment means (for example, an execution symbol or a reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db), and
The suggestive means are cognitively difficult means that make cognition difficult by the player's perception (for example, a variable element of "super reach"), and
The cockpit display area that is redisplayed after the variable element of the cognitive resumption means (for example, "super reach") that makes the suggestion means that the player's perceptual cognition difficult due to the cognitive difficulty means perceptible again. Db) and
When the suggestion means becomes recognizable again by the cognitive resuming means, the change executing means (for example, "for example," changes from the predetermined first state to the second state based on the judgment result by the judgment means in the suggestion means. Change command after erasing for display to execute "Notice of change on hold" of "After erasing on hold")
A gaming machine I0 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine I0, the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Will be done. Then, the judgment result by the judgment means can be suggested by the suggestion means. The suggestive means is made cognitive by the player's perception due to the cognitive difficulty means, and the suggestive means whose cognition is difficult to be perceived by the player due to the cognitive difficulty means is configured to be recognizable again by the cognitive resumption means. .. Then, when the suggestion means becomes recognizable again by the cognitive resumption means, the change executing means changes the predetermined first aspect to the second state based on the judgment result of the judgment means in the suggestion. As a result, the player clearly recognizes the suggestion by the suggestion means as compared with the case where the suggestion means that is always recognizable by the player's perception is directly changed from the first state to the second state to suggest. While making it difficult, the suggestion means can be casually changed to the second state to suggest the judgment result of the judgment means. Therefore, by making it difficult to recognize the suggestion means once and then suggesting the judgment result of the judgment means at the timing when it becomes recognizable again, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the discomfort depends on the suggestion means. By recognizing that it is a suggestion, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected production.

In the gaming machine I0
The suggestion means is a display object in the display means.
The difficult-to-recognize means has a hard-to-see means (for example, a variable element of "super reach") that makes the display of the displayed object difficult to see.
The cognitive resuming means has a redisplaying means (for example, the end of a variable element of "super reach") that makes the display object difficult to see by the hard-to-see means visible again.
When the display object is made visible again by the redisplay means, the change executing means changes the display mode of the display object from the display mode of the display object before it is made difficult to see by the difficult-to-see means. It is characterized in that it is provided with a redisplay change means (for example, a display change after erasure command for executing "hold change notice" of "after hold erasure") that changes based on the judgment result by the determination means. Game machine I1.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestion means is a display object in the display means, and the display of the display object is made difficult to see by the visually difficult means provided in the cognitive difficulty means. In addition, the redisplay means provided in the cognitive resumption means makes it possible to visually recognize the display object that has been made difficult to see by the hard-to-see means. Then, when the display object is made visible again by the redisplay means by the change means at the time of redisplay provided in the change executing means, the display mode of the display object is before being made difficult to see by the difficult-to-see means. The display mode of the displayed object is changed based on the judgment result by the judgment means. As a result, the player clearly recognizes the change in the displayed object as compared with the case where the displayed object, which is always visually recognizable by the player, is directly changed from the first state to the second state and notified. While making it difficult, it is possible to suggest the judgment result of the judgment means by casually changing the displayed object. By making the display object, which is a suggestion means, difficult to see once, and then suggesting the judgment result of the judgment means at the timing when it becomes visible again, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the sense of discomfort is the suggestion means. By recognizing that the suggestion is based on the above, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect can be diversified to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1
A sound output means (for example, a speaker) that outputs a sound that can be heard by the player's hearing is provided.
The difficult-to-recognize means has a difficult-to-hear means (for example, stopping the output of sound from a speaker) that makes it difficult to hear the output of the sound by the sound-outputting means.
The cognitive resuming means has a re-output means (for example, re-outputting a sound from a speaker) that outputs the sound made difficult to hear by the difficult-to-hear means so as to be audible again.
When the re-output means outputs the sound so as to be audible again, the notification executing means is based on the determination result by the determination means from the output mode of the sound before being made difficult to hear by the difficult-to-hear means. The gaming machine I2 is provided with a means for changing the output at the time of re-output (for example, changing the loudness of the sound).

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I0 or I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sound output means outputs a sound that can be heard by the player's hearing. The hard-to-hear means provided in the hard-to-recognize means makes it difficult to hear the sound output by the sound-output means. In addition, the re-output means provided in the cognitive resumption means makes it possible to hear the output of the sound that is difficult to hear by the difficult-to-hear means again. Then, when the output of the sound is made audible again by the re-output means by the re-output changing means provided in the notification executing means, the output mode of the sound is before being made hard to hear by the difficult-to-hear means. The sound output mode is changed based on the judgment result by the judgment means. As a result, the player clearly recognizes the suggestion by the suggestion means as compared with the case where the suggestion means that is always audible by the player's hearing is directly changed from the first state to the second state to suggest. Although it is difficult, the judgment result of the judgment means can be casually notified by the suggestion means. In addition, by making the sound, which is a suggestion means, difficult to hear once, and then suggesting the judgment result of the judgment means at the timing when it becomes audible again, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the source of the sense of discomfort is suggested. By recognizing that the suggestion is based on the above, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect can be diversified to enhance the interest of the game.

An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. With a control device 114)
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
A storage means (for example, a holding ball storage area 203b or a holding ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means (for example, hold display setting process (S1209)) and
Suggestion means (for example, a blower) configured to be able to suggest the judgment result by the judgment means, and
A cognitive switching means for switching between a cognitive state (for example, with wind) and a non-cognitive state (for example, without wind) of the suggestive means according to the player's skin sensation (for example, tactile sensation, temperature sensation, pain sensation, wind sensation, etc.). (For example, voice lamp control device 113) and
A change determination means (for example, a change determination means) for determining whether or not to change the suggestion mode of the suggestion means from a predetermined first state (for example, a weak wind) to a second state (for example, a strong wind) indicating a determination result by the determination means. For example, hold display setting process (S1209)) and
When it is determined by the change determining means to change from the first state to the second state, at the first cognitive timing in which the suggestive means that has been made non-cognitive by the cognitive switching means is set as the cognitive state. A change execution means (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)) that changes the suggestion mode of the suggestion means to the second state, and
The gaming machine I3, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine I3, the information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Here, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Will be done. Then, the judgment result by the judgment means can be suggested by the suggestion means. In addition, the cognitive switching means switches and controls the cognitive state and the non-cognitive state of the suggestive means by the skin sensation of the player. Then, the change determination means determines whether or not to change the suggestion mode of the suggestion means from the predetermined first state to the second state indicating the determination result by the determination means. Here, when it is determined by the change determining means to change from the first state to the second state, the change executing means sets the suggestive means that has been made non-cognitive by the cognitive switching means into the cognitive state. At the timing, the suggestion mode of the suggestion means is changed to the second state. As a result, the suggestion means is changed from the first state to the second state according to the skin sensation of the player, and the judgment result by the judgment means is suggested. The judgment result can be suggested. Therefore, it is possible to casually notify the judgment result of the judgment means by the suggestion while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the suggestion means. Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the suggestion means, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the discomfort is the suggestion by the suggestion means. While providing a sexual production, it has the effect of diversifying the production and enhancing the interest of the game.

<Group J: Change at the timing of redisplaying the continuous display>
An acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a display) that causes a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. With a control device 114)
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
Continuous display objects (for example, execution symbols and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db) that suggest information regarding the dynamic display, and
A continuous display executing means (for example, MPU 231 of the display control device 114) that continuously displays the continuous display object on the display means, and
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined identification information appears (for example, MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
An erasing means (for example, a variable element of "super reach") for erasing the display of the continuous display object by the continuous display execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the "super reach" effect mode).
Redisplay means for redisplaying the continuous display object erased by the erasing means (for example, redisplaying the executed symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db after the end of the variable element of "super reach").
When the continuous display object is displayed again by the redisplay means, the display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the continuous display object from the display mode before erasure by the erasing means based on the determination result of the determination means. (For example, a change command after erasure for display that executes "notice of change on hold" of "after erasure on hold")
The gaming machine J0, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine J0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. Information about dynamic display is suggested by the continuous display object that is continuously displayed on the display means by the continuous display execution means. Then, it is determined by the determination means whether or not the predetermined identification information appears based on the determination result by the determination means. Further, the erasing means erases the display of the continuous display object by the continuous display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the continuous display object erased by the erasing means is displayed again by the redisplay means. When the continuous display object is displayed again by the redisplay means, the display mode of the continuous display object is changed from the display mode before the erasure by the erasing means by the display mode changing means based on the judgment result of the determination means. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the continuous display object as compared with the case where the display object that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or the case where the display object is newly displayed and notified. , The judgment result of the judgment means can be displayed casually according to the display mode of the continuous display object. Therefore, when the continuous display object is once made invisible and then the continuous display object is displayed again, the display mode of the continuous display object is subtly changed from before the erasure, thereby first giving the player a sense of discomfort and then. It has the effect of making the player aware that the sense of incongruity is a change in the continuously displayed object, providing the player with an unexpected effect, and diversifying the effect to enhance the interest of the game. Further, when the erased continuous display object is redisplayed, the player redisplays the continuous display object with the same display content as before the continuous display object is erased because the continuous display object is continuously displayed. I'm convinced that it will be displayed. During that time, it is difficult to recognize the difference from the initial assumption because the redisplayed continuous display is changing. Therefore, it is possible to change the display content of the continuous display object so that the player does not notice it, and it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and enhance the interest of the game.

For any of the configurations of the game machines A0 to A10, the game machines B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3 The configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines B0 to B13, the game machines A0 to A10, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3 The configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines C0 to C9, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3 The configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines D0 to D5, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3 The configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines E0 to E7, the game machine A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 The configuration limited to any one of ~ I3 and J0 may be applied. Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines F0 to F6, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3 The configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines G0 to G10, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, H0, I0 to I3 The configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, with respect to the configuration of the game machine H0, any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, I0 to I3, and J0. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. Further, with respect to the configuration of the game machines I0 to I3, any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, and J0. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. Further, with respect to the configuration of the game machine J0, any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3. A configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, J0, the gaming machine is a slot machine. The gaming machine K1 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, J0, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being there. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, J0, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine K3, which is characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

It should be noted that the "entry into the ball" into the "first entry port 64" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined starting conditions" in the claims, and the "counters C1 to C3" described in the above embodiment. The "value of CS1" corresponds to the "information" acquired by the "acquisition means" in the claims, and the "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims. However, the "variation effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and the "big hit symbol" described in the above embodiment is described in the claims. Corresponding to the "predetermined identification information", the "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (dynamic display execution means, part of the second display means)
113 Voice lamp control device (dynamic display execution means, part of the second display means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display execution means, part of the second display means)
203b Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
203c Hold ball execution area (part of storage means)
221 MPU (judgment means)
223e Hold information storage area (part of storage means)
223f Execution information storage area (part of storage means)
Db cockpit display area (part of the second display means)
Db0 execution symbol display area (part of the second display means)
S204 (acquisition means)
S307 Fluctuation start processing (determination means)
S1209 Hold display setting process (judgment means)

Claims (1)

An acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is provided.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.
A storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, up to a predetermined number, and a storage means.
Judgment to determine whether or not there is the dynamic display that expresses the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Means and
A second display means capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means, and
A display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and the non-display state of the second display means,
A changing means for changing the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode showing a judgment result by the judgment means.
When changing from the first aspect to the second aspect by the changing means and redisplaying the second display means which has been hidden by the display switching means, the display of the second display means is displayed. The redisplay changing means for changing to the second aspect, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images